Professional Documents
Culture Documents
®
Edition 4.0 201 5-09
REDLINE VERSION
colour
i n sid e
REDLINE VERSION
colour
i n sid e
INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL
COMMISSION
Warning! Make sure that you obtained this publication from an authorized distributor.
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 7
I NTRODUCTI ON .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 9
1 Scope . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 0
2 Norm ative references ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 0
3 Term s and definitions ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 1
4 Quasi-peak m easuring receivers for the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 000 MH z . ... ... ... ... .. 1 5
4. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 1 5
4. 2 I nput impedance .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 5
4. 3 Sine-wave voltage accuracy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 1 6
4. 4 Response to pulses .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 1 6
4. 4. 1 Amplitude relationship (absolute calibration) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 6
4. 4. 2 Variation with repetition frequency (relative calibration) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 6
4. 5 Selectivity . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 20
4. 5. 1 Overall selectivity (passband) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 20
4. 5. 2 I nterm ediate frequency rejection ratio ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... .. 21
4. 5. 3 I m age frequency rej ection ratio .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 21
4. 5. 4 Other spurious responses ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 23
4. 6 Lim itation of interm odulation effects .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 23
4. 7 Lim itation of receiver noise and internall y generated spurious signals ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 24
4. 7. 1 Random noise . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 24
4. 7. 2 Continuous wave ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 25
4. 8 Screening effectiveness .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 25
4. 8. 1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 25
4. 8. 2 Lim itation of radio-frequency emissions from the m easuring receiver ... ... .. ... .. 25
4. 9 Facilities for connection to a discontinuous disturbance anal yzer .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 26
5 Measuring receivers with peak detector for the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 8 GH z ... ... ... 26
5. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 26
5. 2 I nput impedance .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 26
5. 3 Fundamental characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 26
5. 3. 1 Bandwidth .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 26
5. 3. 2 Charge and discharge tim e constants ratio .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . 27
5. 3. 3 Overload factor ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 27
5. 4 Sine-wave voltage accuracy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 27
5. 5 Response to pulses .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 27
5. 6 Selectivity . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 28
5. 7 I ntermodulation effects, receiver noise, and screening .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . . 29
6 Measuring receivers with average detector for the frequency range 9 kH z to
1 8 GH z .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 29
6. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 29
6. 2 I nput impedance .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30
6. 3 Fundamental characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 30
6. 3. 1 Bandwidth .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 30
6. 3. 2 Overload factor ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 30
6. 4 Sine-wave voltage accuracy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 30
6. 5 Response to pulses .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 31
6. 5. 1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 31
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 –3–
6. 5. 2 Amplitude relationship .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 31
6. 5. 3 Variation with repetition frequency ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 32
6. 5. 4 Response to intermittent, unstead y and drifting narrowband
disturbances .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. 32
6. 6 Selectivity . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 34
6. 7 I ntermodulation effects, receiver noise, and screening .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . . 34
7 Measuring receivers with rms-average detector for the frequency range 9 kH z to
1 8 GH z .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 34
7. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 34
7. 2 I nput impedance .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 34
7. 3 Fundamental characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 35
7. 3. 1 Bandwidth .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 35
7. 3. 2 Overload factor ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 35
7. 4 Sine-wave voltage accuracy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 36
7. 5 Response to pulses .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 36
7. 5. 1 Construction details . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 36
7. 5. 2 Amplitude relationship .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 36
7. 5. 3 Variation with repetition frequency ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 37
7. 5. 4 Response to intermittent, unstead y and drifting narrowband disturbances 37
7. 6 Selectivity . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 38
7. 7 I ntermodulation effects, receiver noise, and screening .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . . 38
8 Measuring receivers for the frequency range 1 GH z to 1 8 GH z with amplitude
probability distribution (APD) measuring function ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 38
9 Disturbance anal yzers .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 39
9. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 39
9. 2 Fundamental characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 40
9. 3 Test m ethod for the validation of the performance check for the click
anal yzer ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... . 46
9. 3. 1 Basic requirements .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 46
9. 3. 2 Additional requirements ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 47
Annex A (norm ative) Determ ination of response to repeated pulses of quasi-peak and
rm s-average measuring receivers (See 3. 6, 4. 4.2, 7. 3. 2 and 7. 5. 1 ) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 48
A. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 48
A. 2 Response of the pre-detector stages ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 48
A. 3 Response of the quasi-peak voltm eter detector to output of preceding stages. ... ... 49
A. 3.1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 49
A. 3.2 Response of the indicating instrument to the signal from the detector . ... ... ... .. 50
A. 4 Response of rm s detector to output voltage of preceding stages ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 51
A. 4.1 Output voltage and amplitude relationship . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 51
A. 4.2 Calculation of overload factor . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 52
A. 5 Relationship between indication of rm s m eter and quasi-peak m eter .. ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 52
Annex B (normative) Determination of pulse generator spectrum (See 4. 4, 5. 5, 6. 5,
7. 5) . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 54
B. 1 Pulse generator ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 54
B. 1 .1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 54
B. 1 .2 The spectrum of the generated pulses .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... .. 54
B. 2 General m ethod of measurem ent ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 54
Annex C (normative) Accurate m easurements of the output of nanosecond pulse
generators (See 4. 4, 5. 5, 6.5, 7. 5) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 56
C. 1 Measurement of im pulse area ( A im p ) .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 56
–4– CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
C. 1 . 1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 56
C. 1 . 2 Area m ethod . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 56
C. 1 . 3 Standard transm ission line m ethod . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... . 56
C. 1 . 4 Harm onic measurement ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 57
C. 1 . 5 Energy method ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 57
C. 2 Pulse generator spectrum . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 57
Annex D (normative) I nfluence of the quasi-peak measuring receiver characteristics
on its pulse response (See 4. 4. 2) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 58
Annex E (normative) Response of average and peak measuring receivers (See 6. 3. 1 ) . ... ... . 59
E. 1 Response of pre-detector stages ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 59
E. 2 Overload factor . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 59
E. 3 Relationship between indication of an average and a quasi-peak measuring
receiver .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 60
E. 4 Peak measuring receivers . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 61
E. 5 Relationship between indication of a peak and a quasi-peak m easuring
receiver .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 61
E. 6 Test of m easuring receiver response above 1 GH z to pulses ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 62
E. 7 Measurement of the impulse bandwidth of a measuring receiver ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 63
E. 7.1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 63
E. 7.2 Method 1 : M easurement by comparison of the responses of B im p to two
pulses with identical am plitude and width but with low and high pulse
repetition frequencies (prf) .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 64
E. 7.3 Method 2: M easurement by comparison of the response of B imp to an
impulsive signal with the response of a narrow bandwidth to the same
signal .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... . 66
E. 7.4 Method 3: I ntegration of the normalized linear selectivity function .. ... ... ... ... ... . 66
Annex F (normative) Perform ance check of the exceptions from the definitions of a
click according to 4. 2. 3 of CI SPR 1 4-1 : 2005 . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 68
Annex G (informative) Rationale for the specifications of the APD m easuring function .. ... ... . 75
Annex H (informative) Characteristics of a quasi-peak measuring receiver.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 78
Annex I (informative) Exam ple of EMI receiver and swept spectrum anal yzer
architecture.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 79
Annex J (normative) Requirem ents when using an external preamplifier with a
measuring receiver ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. 81
J. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 81
J.2 Considerations for optimum em ission m easurem ent system design ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 81
J.3 Linearity specifications and precautions in m easurement ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 84
J.4 Detecting the overload of an external pream plifier in a wideband FFT based
m easuring system ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. 91
Annex K (normative) Calibration requirem ents for measuring receivers .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 92
K. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 92
K. 2 Calibration and verification... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 92
K. 3 Calibration and verification specifics ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... . 92
K. 4 Measuring receiver specifics ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 93
K. 5 Partial calibration of measuring receivers . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 94
K. 6 Determination of compliance of a m easuring receiver with applicable
specifications .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 94
Bibliograph y . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 96
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 –5–
Figure 1 a) 1 – Pulse response curve (Band A) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 1 7
Figure 1 b) 2 – Pulse response curve (Band B) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 1 8
Figure 1 c) 3 – Pulse response curve (Bands C and D) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. 1 8
Figure 1 d) 4 – Theoretical pulse response curve of quasi-peak detector receivers and
average detector receiver (see 6. 5. 4) . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 9
Figure 5 – Lim its of overall selectivity – Pass band (see 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7. 6) (Band A) . ... ... ... 22
Figure 6 – Lim its of overall selectivity – Pass band (see 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7. 6) (Band B) .. ... ... . 22
Figure 7 – Lim its of overall selectivity – Pass band (see 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7. 6) Bands (C
and D) .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 23
Figure 8 – Arrangement for testing intermodulation effects ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 24
Figure 9 – Lim its for the overall selectivity – Pass band (Band E) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 29
Figure 1 0 – Block diagram of an average detector ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . ... ... ... ... 33
Figure 1 1 – Screenshot showing response of the meter-simulating network to an
intermittent narrowband signal . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 33
Figure 1 2 – Exam ple of a disturbance anal yzer ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. 41
Figure 1 3 – A graphical presentation of test signals used in the test of the anal yzer for
the performance check against the definition of a click according to Table 1 4 ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 42
Figure E. 1 – Correction factor for estimating the ratio B im p /B 6 for other tuned circuits . ... ... ... 60
Figure E. 2 – Pulse rectification coefficient P . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 62
Figure E. 3 – Exam ple (spectrum screenshot) of a pulse-m odulated signal with a pulse
width of 200 ns .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 63
Figure E. 4 – Pulse-modulated RF signal applied to a m easuring receiver .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 64
Figure E. 5 – Filtering with a B im p much sm aller than the prf ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 65
Figure E. 6 – Filtering with a B im p m uch wider than the prf . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... . 65
Figure E. 7 – Calculation of the im pulse bandwidth ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 66
Figure E. 8 – Exam ple of a normalized linear selectivity function ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 67
Figure F. 1 – A graphical presentation of the test signals used for the performance
check of the anal yzer with the additional requirements according to Table F.1 ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. 74
Figure G. 1 – Block diagram of APD measurem ent circuit without A/D converter ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 76
Figure G. 2 – Block diagram of APD measurem ent circuit with A/D converter ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 76
Figure G. 3 – Example of display of APD m easurem ent . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 77
Figure I .1 – Example block diagram of EMI receiver consisting of swept spectrum
analyzer with added preselector, pream plifier and quasi-peak/average detector .. ... ... ... .. ... ... 79
Figure J. 1 – Receiver with preamplifier .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 83
Figure J. 2 – Transfer function of an am plifier ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. 85
Figure J. 3 – Response for a sinusoidal signal .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... . 85
Figure J. 4 – Response for an impulse . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 85
Figure J. 5 – Deviation from linear gain for an unm odulated sine wave (exam ple) . ... ... ... .. ... ... 86
Figure J. 6 – Deviation from linear gain for a broadband im pulsive signal as m easured
with the quasi-peak detector (exam ple) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 87
Figure J. 7 – Screenshot of a band-stop filter test for a preamplifier at around 81 8 M H z . ... ... . 88
Figure J. 8 – Band-stop filter test result with the m easuring receiver at 81 8 MH z .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 88
Figure J. 9 – Band-stop filter test results for the same 1 0 dB pream plifier but a different
receiver with preselection (black) and without preselection (blue) ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 89
Figure J. 1 0 – Band-stop filter test results for the same 1 0 dB pream plifier but with the
receiver of Figure J. 9 with preselection (black) and without preselection (green) . ... ... ... .. ... ... 89
–6– CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Figure J. 1 1 – Weighting functions of the various CI SPR detectors with a noise curve to
illustrate the remaining operating ranges for broadband impulsive signals (exam ple) .. ... ... ... . 90
Figure K. 1 – Com pliance determination process wi th application of m easurement
uncertainty . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 95
Table 1 – Test pulse characteristics for quasi-peak measuring receivers (see 4. 4. 1 ) . ... ... ... ... 1 6
Table 2 – Pulse response of quasi-peak measuring receivers . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 20
Table 3 – Combined selectivity of CI SPR measuring receiver and high-pass filter ... ... ... .. ... ... 21
Table 4 – Bandwidth characteristics for intermodulation test of quasi-peak measuring
receivers (see 4. 6) .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 24
Table 5 – VSWR requirem ents for receiver input im pedance . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... . 26
Table 6 – Bandwidth requirements for m easuring receivers with peak detector . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 27
Table 7 – Relative pulse response of peak and quasi-peak m easuring receivers for the
same bandwidth (frequency range 9 kH z to 1 000 MH z) ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... 28
Table 8 – Bandwidth requirements for m easuring receivers with average detector . ... ... ... ... ... 30
Table 9 – Relative pulse response of average and quasi peak m easuring receivers for
the same bandwidth (frequency range 9 kH z to 1 Ghz) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. ... . 31
Table 1 0 – Maximum reading of average measuring receivers for a pulse-modulated
sine-wave input in comparison with the response to a continuous sine wave having the
sam e amplitude ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... . 33
Table 1 1 – VSWR requirem ents of input impedance... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... .. ... . 35
Table 1 2 – Bandwidth requirem ents for measuring receivers with rm s-average detector ... ... . 35
Table 1 3 – Minim um pulse repetition rate without overload ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 35
Table 1 4 – Relative pulse response of rms-average and quasi-peak measuring
receivers . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 36
Table 1 5 – Pulse response of rms-average measuring receiver .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 37
Table 1 6 – Maximum reading of rm s-average m easuring receivers for a pulse-
modulated sine-wave input in com parison with the response to a continuous sine wave
having the same amplitude .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 38
Table 1 7 – Disturbance anal yzer perform ance test – Test signals used for the check
against the definition of a click (1 of 4) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 43
Table B. 1 – Pulse generator characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 54
Table E. 1 – B im p and A imp values for a peak m easuring receiver ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 61
Table E. 2 – Carrier level for pulse-modulated signal of 1 , 4 nVs . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 63
Table F. 1 – Disturbance anal yzer test signals a (1 of 5) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. 69
Table H .1 – Characteristics of quasi-peak m easuring receivers ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 78
Table J. 1 – Examples of pream plifier and measuring receiver data and resulting
system noise figures ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 84
Table K. 1 – Verification param eter sum mary . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 94
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 –7–
___________
DISCLAIM ER
This Redline version is not an official IEC Standard and is intended only to provide
the user with an indication of what changes have been made to the previous version.
Only the current version of the standard is to be considered the official docu ment.
This Redline version provides you with a quick and easy way to compare all the
changes between this standard and its previous edition. A vertical bar appears in the
margin wherever a change has been made. Ad ditions are in green text, deletions are in
strikethrough red text.
–8– CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
I nternational Standard CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 has been prepared by CI SPR subcomm ittee A: Radio-
interference m easurements and statistical m ethods.
This fourth edition cancels and replaces the third edition published in 201 0, Am endment
1 : 201 0 and Am endm ent 2: 201 4. This edition constitutes a technical revision.
The m ain technical change with respect to the previous edition consists of the addition of a
new normative annex on calibration requirem ents for measuring receivers.
I t has the status of a basic EMC publication in accordance with I EC G uide 1 07,
Electromagnetic compatibility – Guide to the drafting of electromagnetic compatibility
publications .
Full inform ation on the voting for the approval of this standard can be found in the report on
voting indicated in the above table.
This publication has been drafted in accordance with the I SO/I EC Directives, Part 2.
A list of all parts of the CI SPR 1 6 series can be found, under the general title Specification for
radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus and methods , on the I EC website.
The committee has decided that the contents of this publication will rem ain unchanged until
the stability date indicated on the I EC website under "http: //webstore. iec.ch" in the data
related to the specific publication. At this date, the publication will be
• reconfirmed,
• withdrawn,
• replaced by a revised edition, or
• amended.
IM PORTANT – The 'colour in si de' logo on th e cover page of this publication in dicates
that it contain s colours which are con sidered to be usefu l for th e correct
understanding of its conten ts. Users shou ld therefore print thi s docu ment u si ng a
col ou r printer.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 –9–
I NTRODUCTI ON
The CI SPR 1 6 series, published under the general title Specification for radio disturbance and
immunity measuring apparatus and methods, is com prised of the following sets of standards
and reports:
• CI SPR 1 6-1 – five six parts covering m easurement instrum entation specifications;
• CI SPR 1 6-2 – five parts covering methods of measurement;
• CI SPR 1 6-3 – a single publication containing various technical reports (TRs) with
further information and background on CI SPR and radio disturbances in general;
• CI SPR 1 6-4 – five parts covering uncertainties, statistics and lim it m odelling.
CI SPR 1 6-1 consists of the following parts, under the general title Specification for radio
disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus and methods – Radio disturbance and
immunity measuring apparatus:
– Part 1 -1 : Measuring apparatus
– Part 1 -2: Ancillary equipm ent – Conducted disturbances
– Part 1 -3: Ancillary equipment – Disturbance power
– Part 1 -4: Ancillary equipm ent – Radiated disturbances
– Part 1 -5: Antenna calibration sites and reference test sites for 30 MH z to 1 000 MH z
5 MH z to 1 8 GH z
– Part 1 -6: EMC-antenna calibration
The I nternational Electrotechnical Comm ission (I EC) draws attention to the fact that it is
claimed that com pliance with this docum ent may involve the use of a patent concerning the
measuring receiver with rms-average detector (patent no DE 1 01 26830) given in Clause 7.
I EC takes no position concerning the evidence, validity and scope of this patent right.
The holder of this patent right has assured the I EC that he/she is willing to negotiate licences
either free of charge or under reasonable and non-discrim inatory terms and conditions with
applicants throughout the world. I n this respect, the statement of the holder of this patent
right is registered with I EC. I nform ation m ay be obtained from :
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Muehldorfstrasse 1 5
81 671 Muenchen
Germ an y
Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elem ents of this document m ay be the
subj ect of patent rights other than those identified above. I EC shall not be held responsible for
identifying an y or all such patent rights.
I SO (www. iso. org/patents) and I EC (http://patents. iec.ch) m aintain on-line data bases of
patents relevant to their standards. Users are encouraged to consult the data bases for the
most up to date inform ation concerning patents.
– 10 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
1 Scope
This part of CI SPR 1 6 specifies the characteristics and performance of equipment for the
measurem ent of radio disturbance in the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 8 GH z. I n addition,
requirem ents are provided for specialized equipment for discontinuous disturbance
measurem ents.
NOTE I n accord ance with I EC Guid e 1 07, CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 is a basic EMC stand ard for use by prod uct comm ittees
of the I EC. As stated in Guid e 1 07, prod uct comm ittees are responsible for determ inin g the applicability of the
EMC stand ard. CI SPR and i ts sub-com m ittees are prepared to co-operate with prod uct comm ittees in th e
evaluati on of the valu e of parti cular EMC tests for specific products.
The specifications in this standard appl y to EMI receivers and spectrum anal yzers. The term
“m easuring receiver” used in this standard refers to both EMI receivers and spectrum
anal yzers. The calibration requirements for measuring receivers are detailed in Annex J .
Further guidance on the use of use of spectrum anal yzers and scanning receivers can be
found in Annex B of any one of the following standards: CI SPR 1 6-2-1 : 201 4, CI SPR 1 6-2-
2: 201 0 or CI SPR 1 6-2-3: 201 0.
2 Normative references
The following documents, in whole or in part, are norm ativel y referenced in this docum ent and
are indispensable for its application. For dated references, onl y the edition cited applies. For
undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including an y
amendm ents) applies.
CI SPR 1 6-2-2: 2003 201 0, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 2-2: Methods of measurement of disturbances and immunity –
Measurement of disturbance power
Amendm ent 1 (2004)
Amendm ent 2 (2005)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 11 –
3.1
bandwidth
Bn
width of the overall selectivity curve of the receiver between two points at a stated
attenuation, below the midband response
Note 1 to entry: n is the stated atten uation in dB.
3.2
CISPR indication range
range specified by the manufacturer which gives the m axim um and the m inim um meter
indications within which the measuring receiver meets the requirem ents of this part of
CI SPR 1 6
3.3
electrical charge time constant
TC
time needed after the instantaneous application of a constant sine-wave voltage to the stage
immediatel y preceding the input of the detector for the output voltage of the detector to reach
63 % of its final value
Note 1 to entry: This tim e constant is determ ined as follows: a sine-wave sig nal of constant am plitude and h avi ng
a frequ ency equal to the m id-ban d freq uency of the I F am plifier is appli ed to the in put of the stage im m ediatel y
precedin g the detector. The i n dication, D , of an i nstrum ent h avi ng n o in erti a (e. g. an oscill oscope) conn ected to a
term inal i n th e d. c. am plifier ci rcuit so as not to affect the beh aviou r of th e detector, is noted.
The l evel of the si gnal is ch osen such th at the response of th e stages concerned rem ains within th e li near
operati ng range. A sin e-wave signal of this level, applied for a l im ited tim e only and h avi ng a wave trai n of
rectan gul ar en vel ope is gated such that th e defl ection registered is 0, 63 D . The du ration of this signal is eq ual to
the charge tim e of the d etector.
– 12 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
3. 4
el ectrical d ischarge time con stant
TD
time needed after the instantaneous removal of a constant sine-wave voltage applied to the
stage immediately preceding the input of the detector for the output of the detector to fall to
37 % of its initial value
Note 1 to entry: The m ethod of m easurem ent is an alogous to that for the charg e tim e con stant, but instead of a
signal bein g appl ied for a lim ited tim e, the signal is interrupted for a defi nite tim e. The tim e taken for the defl ection
to fall to 0, 37 D is the discharg e tim e constant of the detector.
3. 5
impu lse area
A im p
voltage-tim e area of a pulse defined by the integral:
+∞
A im p = ∫ V( t ) dt (1 )
−∞
Note 1 to entry: I m pulse area, som etim es referred to as im pulse strength, is typically expressed in µ Vs
or dB( µ Vs).
Note 2 to entry: Spectral density ( D ) is related to im pul se area and expressed in µ V/M Hz or dB( µV/MHz). For
rectan gul ar im pulses of pulse duration T at frequ encies f < < 1 / T, the relati onshi p D ( µ V/M H z) = 2 × 1 0 6 A i mp ( µ Vs)
appl ies.
3. 6
impu lse bandwidth
B im p
A( t ) max
Bimp = (2)
2G0 × Aimp
where
A ( t) m ax is the peak of the envelope at the I F output of the receiver with an im pulse area
A im p applied at the receiver input;
3. 7
measuring receiver
instrum ent such as a tunable voltmeter, an EMI receiver, a spectrum anal yzer or a FFT-based
measuring instrum ent, with or without preselection, that meets the requirements of the
relevant parts of this standard
NOTE 1 Th e term “m easuri ng recei ver” used i n this standard refers to both EMI receivers and spectrum
anal yzers.
Note 1 to entry: See Ann ex I for fu rther inform ation.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 13 –
3. 8
mech ani cal ti me con stant of a criti cal ly damped in dicatin g instru ment
TM
TM = TL (4)
2π
where TL is the period of free oscillation of the instrument with all dam ping rem oved.
Note 1 to entry: For a criticall y dam ped i nstrum ent, the equation of m otion of th e system may be written as:
2
TM2 d α2 + 2TM dα + α = ki (5)
dt dt
where
α is the deflecti on;
i is the current th rough th e instrum ent; and
k is a constant.
I t can be deduced from this relation that this tim e constant i s al so equal to th e duration of a rectan gular pulse (of
constant am plitu de) th at prod uces a defl ection eq ual to 35 % of the stead y defl ection produced by a conti nu ous
current h avi ng th e sam e am plitude as that of the rectan gul ar pulse.
Note 2 to entry: The m ethods of m easurem ent and adj ustm ent are deduced from one of th e followi ng:
a) the period of free oscill ation havin g been adjusted to 2 π TM , dam ping is added so that α T = 0, 35 α max .
b) when the period of oscillation cannot be m easured, th e d am ping is adj usted to be just bel ow critical such that
the overswin g is not g reater th an 5 % an d the m om ent of inertia of the m ovem ent is such th at α T = 0, 35 α ma x .
3. 9
overload factor
ratio of the level that corresponds to the range of practical linear function of a circuit (or a
group of circuits) to the level that corresponds to full-scale deflection of the indicating
instrum ent
Note 1 to entry: Th e m axim um level at wh ich th e stead y-state response of a circuit (or group of circuits) d oes n ot
depart by m ore than 1 dB from ideal li nearity defi nes the ran g e of practical linear fu nction of the circuit (or g roup of
circuits).
3. 1 0
symm etri c voltage
radio-frequency disturbance voltage appearing between the two wires in a two-wire circuit,
such as a single-phase m ains suppl y. This is som etim es called the differential mode voltage.
I f Va is the vector voltage between one of the m ains terminals and earth and Vb is the vector
voltage between the other mains term inal and earth, the symm etric voltage is the vector
difference ( Va -Vb )
3. 1 1
weighting (of e. g. impulsive disturbance)
pulse-repetition-frequency (PRF) dependent conversion (m ostl y reduction) of a peak-detected
im pulse voltage level to an indication that corresponds to the interference effect on radio
reception
Note 1 to entry: For the analogu e recei ver, the psychoph ysical annoyance of the i nterference is a su bjecti ve
quantity (au dibl e or visu al, usu ally not a certain num ber of m isunderstan dings of a spoken text).
Note 2 to entry: For the digital receiver, the i nterference effect is an objecti ve quantity that m ay be defin ed by th e
critical bit error ratio (BER) or bit error probability (BEP) for which perfect error correction can still occur or by
anoth er, objecti ve and reprodu cible param eter.
– 14 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
3. 1 1 . 1
weigh ted di stu rban ce measu remen t
measurem ent of disturbance using a weighting detector
3. 1 1 . 2
wei gh ti n g ch aracteri sti c
peak voltage level as a function of PRF for a constant effect on a specific radiocomm unication
system, i. e. the disturbance is weighted by the radiocom munication system itself
3. 1 1 . 3
wei gh ti n g detector
detector which provides an agreed weighting function
3. 1 1 . 4
wei gh ti n g factor
value of the weighting function relative to a reference PRF or relative to the peak value
Note 1 to entry: Weightin g factor is expressed in dB.
3. 1 1 . 5
weigh ti n g fu n cti on
weigh ti n g cu rve
relationship between input peak voltage level and PRF for constant level indication of a
measuring receiver with a weighting detector, i.e. the curve of response of a m easuring
receiver to repeated pulses
3. 1 2
measu rem en t tim e
Tm
effective, coherent tim e for a m easurem ent result at a single frequency (in som e areas also
called dwell tim e)
– for the peak detector, the effective time to detect the m axim um of the signal envelope
– for the quasi-peak detector, the effective time to measure the maxim um of the weighted
envelope
– for the average detector, the effective time to average the signal envelope
– for the rms detector, the effective tim e to determ ine the rms of the signal envelope
3. 1 3
cali brati on
operation that, under specified conditions, in a first step, establishes a relation between the
quantity values with measurem ent uncertainties provided by m easurement standards and
corresponding indications with associated m easurement uncertainties and, in a second step,
uses this information to establish a relation for obtaining a m easurement result from an
indication
Note 1 to entry: A calibrati on m ay be expressed by a statem ent, calibration function, cal ibration diagram ,
calibration cu rve, or calibrati on table. I n som e cases, it m ay consist of an additi ve or m ultiplicative correction of the
indicati on with associated m easurem ent uncertai nty.
Note 2 to entry: Cal ibration should not be confused with adjustm ent of a m easuring system , often m istakenly
called “self-cali bration”, nor with verification of cali bration.
Note 3 to entry: Often, the fi rst step alone i n the above defi nition is percei ved as being cal ibrati on.
______________
1 Figu res in brackets refer to Bibliog raph y.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 15 –
3. 1 4
verifi cation
provision of obj ective evidence that a given item fulfils specified requirements
EXAMPLE Checkin g whether the fu nctions of a m easuri ng i nstrum ent or au xili ary eq uipm ent, such as a com m on
m ode absorption device (CMAD), m eets stated specifications, such as those gi ven i n a d ata sheet.
[SOU RCE: I SO/I EC Guide 99: 2007, 2. 44, m odified – addition of an example] [1 7]
3. 1 5
adj ustm ent (of a m easu rin g system)
set of operations carried out on a m easuring system so that it provides prescribed indications
corresponding to given values of a quantity to be measured
Note 1 to entry: Types of ad justm ent of a m easu rin g system include zero adjustm ent of a m easuri ng system ,
offset adjustm ent, and span ad justm ent (som etim es called gai n adj ustm ent).
Note 2 to entry: Adjustm ent of a m easurin g system should n ot be confused with calibration, which is a
prerequisite for adjustm ent.
Note 3 to entry: After an adj u stm ent of a m easurin g system , the m easurin g system shall usuall y be recal ibrated.
3. 1 6
correcti on
compensation for an estim ated system atic effect
Note 1 to entry: See Gui de I SO/CEI 98-3: 2008, 3. 2. 3 [1 6] for an expl anati on of ‘system atic effect’.
Note 2 to entry: Th e com pen sation can take d ifferent form s, such as an ad dend or a factor, or can be d educed
from a table.
3. 1 7
(metrolog ical) traceabi li ty
property of a measurement result whereby the result can be related to a reference through a
docum ented unbroken chain of calibrations, each contributing to the m easurem ent uncertainty
4 Quasi-peak measuri ng recei vers for the frequency range 9 kHz to 1 000 MHz
4. 1 Gen eral
The receiver specification depends on the frequency of operation. There is one receiver
specification covering the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 50 kH z (Band A), one covering 1 50 kH z
to 30 MH z (Band B), one covering 30 MH z to 300 MH z (Band C), and one covering 300 MH z
to 1 000 M H z (Band D). Fundamental characteristics of a quasi-peak measuring instrument
are provided in Annex H.
Spectrum anal yzers and FFT-based m easuring instruments that m eet the requirements of this
clause can be used for compliance m easurements. For em ission measurements, FFT-based
measuring instrum ents shall sam ple and evaluate the signal continuousl y during the
measurem ent tim e.
standing wave ratio (VSWR) not to exceed 2, 0: 1 when the radio frequency (RF) attenuation is
0 dB and 1 , 2: 1 when the RF attenuation is 1 0 dB or greater.
Symm etric input im pedance in the frequency range 9 kH z to 30 M H z: to perm it sym m etrical
measurements a balanced input transform er is used. The preferred input im pedance for the
frequency range 9 kH z to 1 50 kH z is 600 Ω . This symm etric input im pedance m ay be
incorporated either in the relevant symm etrical artificial network necessary to couple to the
receiver or optionall y in the m easuring receiver.
When external preamplifiers are used, refer to Annex J for applicable requirem ents.
The source im pedances of the pulse generator and the signal generator shall both be the
same. A tolerance of ± 1 , 5 dB shall be permitted on the sine-wave voltage level.
NOTE Annexes B an d C d escribe m ethods for d eterm inin g the output characteristics of a pulse g en erator for use
in testing th e requi rem ents of this subclause.
As an alternative the response of the measuring receiver to repeated pulses shall be such
that for a constant voltage setting of the pulse generator of e. g. 50 dB( µ V) at repetition
frequencies of 25 H z (Band A) and 1 00 H z (Bands B, C and D), the relationship between
receiver indication and repetition frequency is in accordance with Figures 1 , 2, 3 and 4 under
opposite sign conditions.
20
10
–1 0
1 10 25 1 00
Pulse repetition frequency (Hz)
IEC
Figu re 1 a) 1 – Pulse response cu rve (Band A)
– 18 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
22, 5 ±2
Relative input in decibels for constant output
24
Asym ptote
22
20, 5 ±2
20
Absolute cali bration
18
E0
16
14 C.I.S.P.R.
Pul se g en erator C receiver
12 R
E0 RC = 0, 31 6 µ Vs 1
1 0 ±1 , 5 Freq . = 1 00 im p. /s
10
2 R
8 Sin e-wave gen erator α
6, 5 ±1 E = 66 d B ( µ V) eff.
6 U = 60 dB ( µ V) eff. R
U
E
4 α1 = α2 ±1 ,5 dB
2
0
0
–2
–4 –4, 5 ±1
–6
–8
1 1 01 1 02 1 03 1 04
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
Figu re 1 b) 2 – Pu lse response cu rve (Band B)
Relative input in decibels for constant output
31 , 5 Asym ptote
U = 60 d B ( µ V) eff.
α1 = α2 ±1 ,5 dB
5
–5
–1 0
–1 5
1 1 01 1 02 1 03 1 04
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
E0
C.I.S.P.R.
30 Pulse generator receiver
C
E0 RC = IS µVs R
1 5, 5 µ Vs 1
Band A R
2
20 Quasi-peak detector α
Sine-wave generator
recei vers E = 66 dB ( µV) eff. R
U
E
U = 60 dB (µV) eff.
α1 = α 2
2, 8 µ Vs
10
Band B
Quasi-peak detector Averag e detector
0 recei vers recei vers
0 31 6 µ Vs
–1 0 0, 28 µ Vs
– 19 –
–20 Band C/D
Quasi-peak detector
recei vers 0 044 µ Vs
–30
–40
–50
1 10 1 00 1 000 1 0 000 1 00 000
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
NOTE ‘I S’ is the abbreviation used for A i mp in previous editions
Figu re 1 d) 4 – Th eoreti cal pu lse respon se cu rve of qu asi-peak detector receivers
and average detector receiver (see 6. 5.4)
Figu re 1 – Pu lse respon se cu rves
– 20 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
The response curve for a particular m easuring receiver shall lie between the lim its defined in
the appropriate figure and quantified in Table 2. For spectrum anal yzers without preselection,
the requirem ents in Table 2 for pulse repetition frequencies less than 20 H z are not
applicable. The use of such instruments for com pliance testing is conditional. I f such
spectrum anal yzers are used for measurements, the user shall verify and document that the
equipment under test does not emit broadband signals of pulse repetition frequencies of
20 H z or lower. A determination of the suitability of a spectrum anal yzer for testing shall be
made by perform ing the procedure documented i n Annex B of CI SPR 1 6-2-1 : 201 4, Annex B of
CI SPR 1 6-2-2: 201 0, or Annex B of CI SPR 1 6-2-3: 201 0.
The pulse response is restricted due to overload at the input to the receiver at frequencies
above 300 M H z. The values m arked with an asterisk (*) in Table 2 are optional and are not
essential.
4.5 Selectivity
4.5.1 Overall selectivity (passband)
The curve representing the overall selectivity of the m easuring receiver shall lie within the
lim its shown in Figure 5, 6 or 7.
Selectivity shall be described by the variation wi th frequency of the amplitude of the input
sine-wave voltage that produces a constant indication on the measuring receiver.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 21 –
NOTE For the m easurem ent of eq uipm ent that requi res hig her selecti vity at the transition between 1 30 kH z an d
1 50 kH z (e. g. m ains sig nalli ng eq uipm ent as d efin ed in EN 50065-1 ), a hig h-pass filter m ay can be added i n front
of the m easurin g recei ver to achieve th e com bined selecti vity of CI SPR m easurin g recei ver and hi gh-pass filter as
shown i n Table 3.
NOTE 2 The m easuring receiver in conj unction with the high -pass filter should meet the
requirements of this standard.
220 Hz/ 20 dB
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max Bw
Min Bw
8
3
45 Hz/ 1 ,5 dB
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max. bandwidth
8 Min. bandwidth
–4 kHz/6 dB 5 kHz/6 dB
3
2 kHz/
1 ,5 dB
–1 ,5 dB
–2
–1 0 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
–∆ f kHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max. bandwidth
Min. bandwidth
8
–50 kHz/6 dB 70 kHz/6 dB
3
20 kHz/1 ,5 dB
–1 ,5 dB
–2
–1 40 –1 20 –1 00 –80 –60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 1 00 1 20 1 40
–∆ f kHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
Figu re 7 – Li mits of overall selectivity –
Pass band (see 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6.6, 7.6) Ban ds (C an d D)
1 1
(nfL ± fi ) and ( f0 ) (6)
m k
where
m, n, k are integers;
NOTE Where m ore than one i nterm ediate freq uency is used, the freq uenci es fL an d fi m ay can refer to each of the
local oscillator and interm ediate freq uencies used. I n additi on, spuri ous responses may can occur when no in put
signal is applied to the m easuring recei ver; for exam ple, when harm onics of the local oscill ators differ in freq uency
by one of the i nterm edi ate frequencies. The requ irem ents of this subclause therefore can n ot appl y in th ese latter
cases. The effect of these spurious responses is dealt with in 4. 7. Exam ples of sources of spurious sign als includ e
local oscillators (or thei r harm onics), internal clocks, com puter boards, and thei r m ixi ng prod ucts with th e input
signal i nto the recei ver.
Arrange the apparatus as shown in Figure 8. The pulse generator has a spectrum sub-
stantially uniform up to frequency 3) but at least 1 0 dB down at frequency 4) of the
– 24 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
frequencies given in Table 4. The band -stop filter has an attenuation at the test frequency of
at least 40 dB. I ts bandwidth, B 6 , relative to the m aximum attenuation of the filter shall lie
between the frequencies 1 ) and 2) given in Table 4.
Pulse generator 2
a b α
Receiver tuned to f
IEC
NOTE Followin g the discussion in 4. 6, the m easuri ng recei ver responses are:
α 1 a = α 2a
α 1 b = α 1 a – 40 dB
α 2b = α 2a – 36 dB
Connect the sine-wave generator output direct to the measuring receiver input and adj ust for
a convenient reading. Substitute the pulse generator for the sine-wave generator and adj ust
for the same reading. The pulse repetition frequency shall be 1 00 H z for Band A and 1 000 H z
for the other bands.
With the pulse generator connected as described above, switching the filter into circuit shall
introduce attenuation of not less than 36 dB for m easuring receivers, and of not less than
20 dB for spectrum anal yzers without preselection.
4.7 Limitation of receiver n oise and internally gen erated spu rious sign als
4.7. 1 Ran dom noise
Background noise shall not introduce an error in excess of 1 dB.
NOTE The point wh ere the backgrou nd n oise causes an error of 1 dB can be fou nd by applyi ng a sign al, S, such
that the m eter i ndicati on is m uch larger (e. g. 40 dB) th an the n oise level N. By reducin g the sign al level S, the
m eter indication wil l reach a point, S1 , where ( S1 + N) deviates by 1 dB from the linear ch aracteristic.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 25 –
The screening of the receiver shall be such that when it is imm ersed in an am bient
electrom agnetic field of 3 V/m (unm odulated) at an y frequency in the range 9 kH z to
1 000 MH z, an error of not greater than 1 dB is produced at the maxim um and minimum of the
CI SPR indication range as specified by the m anufacturer of the receiver. I n cases where a
measuring receiver is not im mune to the requirement of 3 V/m, the field strength and
frequency at which the error exceeds 1 dB shall be stated by the m anufacturer. The test shall
be perform ed as described below.
The receiver is placed inside a screened enclosure. An input signal is applied to the receiver
via a 2 m long well-screened cable (e.g. semi-rigid), through a feedthrough in the enclosure
wall, to a signal generator placed outside the enclosure. The level of the input signal shall be
at the maximum and the m inimum of the CI SPR indication range as specified by the
manufacturer of the receiver. All other coaxial term inals of the receiver shall be term inated in
their characteristic im pedance.
Onl y essential leads (e. g. mains and input cables) for the normal use of the measuring
receiver in its minimum configuration (excluding options such as headphones) shall be
connected during the test. The leads shall have the lengths and be arranged as in typical use.
The strength of the ambient field in the vicinity of the measuring receiver shall be m easured
by a field strength m onitor.
The receiver m eter indication in the presence of the am bient electromagnetic field shall differ
by not more than 1 dB from the meter indication when the field is absent.
Before perform ing radiated and conducted emission m easurem ents, it is essential that the
noise contributions of the test equipm ent do not affect the m easured results (e. g. com puter
control).
5 Measuring receivers with peak detector for the frequency range 9 kHz to
1 8 GHz
5.1 General
This clause specifies requirem ents for measuring receivers em ploying a peak detector when
used for the m easurement of im pulsive or pulse-m odulated disturbance.
Spectrum anal yzers and FFT-based m easuring instruments that m eet the requirem ents of this
clause can be used for compliance m easurements. For emission m easurements, FFT-based
measuring instrum ents shall sam ple and evaluate the signal continuousl y during the
measurem ent tim e.
I f the test receiver has a peak-hold capability, the hold time shall be adjustable to values
between 30 ms and 3 s.
NOTE For receivers that use peak hol d (an d forced discharge after th e hol d tim e) or dig ital peak d etection
techniq ues, the requi rem ent on the charge/disch arge tim e constants ratio is not rel evant. A m axim um -hold function
of the displ ay m ay can be used for sign als with tim e-varyi ng am plitudes.
I f a spectrum anal yzer is used for peak measurem ents, the video bandwidth ( B vi deo ) shall be
set to a value greater than or equal to the resolution bandwidth ( B resol ). For peak
m easurements, the result can be read from the spectrum analyzer display with the detector
operating either in the linear or logarithmic mode.
signal generator shall be the sam e. The pulses shall have a uniform spectrum according to
Table 2. A tolerance of ± 1 , 5 dB is perm itted in the sine-wave voltage level, and this is a
requirem ent for all pulse repetition frequencies for which no overlapping pulses occur at the
output of the I F am plifier.
NOTE 1 Annexes B and C describe m ethods for determ ining the output characteristics of pulse gen erators for use
in testing for the requi rem ents of this subclause.
NOTE 2 At a repetition rate of 25 Hz for Band A an d 1 00 Hz for the oth er bands, the relationsh ip between th e
indicati ons of a peak m easuri ng receiver and a quasi -peak m easuring recei ver with th e preferred band wi dth are
given in Tabl e 7.
Above 1 GH z, the required impulse area is defined using a pulse-modulated carrier at the
frequency of test, since pulse generators with a uniform spectrum up to 1 8 GH z are not
feasible. See E. 6.
5.6 Selectivity
Since the bandwidth requirem ents stated in 5. 3. 1 allow variations from the bandwidths shown
in Figures 5, 6 and 7, these selectivity curves appl y to peak m easuring receivers in regard to
shape onl y, and the frequency axis shall be scaled accordingl y. For exam ple, B 6 /2
corresponds to 1 00 H z in Figure 5.
The curve representing the overall selectivity of the m easuring receiver reference bandwidth
for Band E shall lie within the limits of Figure 9.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 29 –
1 ,35 MHz/20 dB
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
3 0,25/3
–1 dB
–2
–1 ,4 –1 ,2 –1 –0,8 –0,6 –0,4 –0,2 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1 ,2 1 ,4
–∆f MHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
NOTE 1 The lim its for the i m pulse band width cann ot be shown i n the di ag ram , as the rel ated filter attenuati on
depends on the type of th e fil ter. Therefore bou nds for the 6-dB an d the 9-dB bandwidth s have been gi ven for
ori entati on.
NOTE 2 Th e lim its for th e overall selecti vity have been d eri ved from equipm ent bei ng in use at th e tim e of
introduction of the sel ectivity requi rem ent.
For the frequency range below 1 GH z, the requirements stated in 4. 6, 4. 7 and 4. 8 appl y.
Subclauses 4. 7 and 4.8. 2 appl y also for Band E.
Requirem ents for screening effectiveness, that is, the im munity to high am bient radiated
disturbances, are under consideration.
6 M easuri ng recei vers with average d etector for the frequency ran ge 9 kH z to
1 8 GH z
6. 1 Gen eral
Average m easuring receivers are generally not used for the m easurement of im pulsive
disturbance. This type of receiver has a detector designed to indicate the average value of the
envelope of the signal passed through the pre-detector stages. The average d etector is used
– 30 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Spectrum anal yzers and FFT-based m easuring instruments that m eet the requirements of this
clause can be used for compliance m easurem ents. For emission m easurements, FFT-based
measuring instrum ents shall sam ple and evaluate the signal continuousl y during the
measurem ent tim e.
Table 8 – Bandwidth requirements for measu ring receivers with average detector
Frequen cy range Bandwidth B 6 Reference BW
9 kHz to 1 50 kH z (Band A) 1 00 Hz to 300 Hz a 200 Hz ( B 6 )
1 50 kH z to 30 M H z (Band B) 8 kHz to 1 0 kH z a 9 kHz ( B 6 )
30 MH z to 1 000 MH z (Bands C an d D) 1 00 kH z to 500 kH z a 1 20 kH z ( B 6 )
1 GH z to 1 8 GH z (Band E) 300 kH z to 2 MHz a 1 M Hz b ( B i mp )
a The subj ect of band width is discussed in E. 1 . I f a bandwi dth oth er th an th e reference BW is used, this
ban dwi dth shal l be stated when the distu rbance l evel is reported.
b The band width selected shall be defi ned as in Table 6.
The receiver shall not overload for pulse rates equal to or greater than 25 H z for Band A,
500 H z for Band B, and 5 000 H z for Bands C and D.
NOTE With this type of recei ver, in gen eral, it is not possible to provide a sufficient overload factor to prevent
non -lin ear operation of the receiver at very l ow pulse rates (the response to a sin gle pulse i s not defin ed ).
6. 5 Response to pulses
6. 5.1 Gen eral
NOTE Annexes B an d C describe m ethods for determ ining the output characteristics of pulse generators for use
in testing th e requi rem ents of this clause in th e frequ ency ran ge below 1 GH z.
NOTE 1 At repetiti on frequencies of 25 Hz, 1 00 H z, 500 H z, 1 000 H z and 5 000 Hz, the relationship between th e
indicati ons of an averag e an d a q uasi-peak m easuri ng receiver of th e sam e ban d wi dth, assum ing adequ ate
overl oad factors an d a constan t output level, is given i n Tabl e 9.
Above 1 GH z (Band E), two modes of the average (weighting) detector are defined − linear
and logarithm ic:
For the linear average detector, the response of the measuring receiver to pulses of repetition
rate n H z and impulse area of 1 , 4/ n mVs e.m .f. at 50 Ω source im pedance shall be equal to
the response of an unmodulated sine-wave signal at the tuned frequency having an e.m .f. of
rms value of 2 mV [66 dB( µ V)]. The pulse shall be defined as a pulse-m odulated carrier. The
value of n shall be 50 000 H z. A tolerance of ± 1 , 5 dB is perm itted on the sine-wave voltage
level.
For the logarithmic average detector, the response of the m easuring receiver to pulses of
repetition rate 333 kH z (inverse of period 3 µ s) and impulse area of 6, 7 nVs e.m .f. at 50 Ω
source impedance shall be equal to the response of an unm odulated sine-wave signal at the
tuned frequency having an e.m .f. with rms value of 2 m V [66 dB( µ V)]. A tolerance of ± 4 dB is
allowed on the sine-wave voltage level (the 1 0 % tolerance of the bandwidth causes a
possible variation of approximatel y ± 2, 5 dB).
NOTE 2 Average detection can be achieved with spectrum analyzers operated with a video
bandwidth B vi d eo << B re sol in order to achieve proper averaging based on the repetition
frequency of the measured signal. For m easurem ents based on a reduction of the video
– 32 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
bandwidth, ensure the scanning tim e is sufficientl y long to allow the video filter to respond
correctl y.
NOTE 2 For average (weig hted) m easurem ents in the li near m ode, th e result will correspond to th e average l evel
of the m easured sig nal. I f the l ogarithm ic m ode is used, th e result wi ll correspond to th e average of th e l ogarithm ic
val ues of the m easu red sign al. Th us, for a sq uare-wave signal taking altern ativel y th e val ues 20 dB( µ V) and
60 dB( µ V), the level obtain ed in the logarithm ic m ode is 40 dB( µ V), wh ereas in the li near m ode, the level of
54, 1 dB( µV) represents th e tru e averag e value of the sig nal.
NOTE 1 The th eoretical pulse response curves of q uasi-peak and average d etector receivers, com bined on an
absolute scale, are shown in Figu re 4. Th e response to repeated pulses of th e m easurin g receiver eq uipped with a
logarithm ic average detector (above 1 GHz) is infl uenced by th e n oise level between the pulses. Usin g the
following values:
L l og Av is the level in dicated by the l og arithm ic average d etector;
TP is the pulse duration;
LP is the pulse l evel in dB( µV);
TN is the du ration of the noise l evel;
LN is noise level i n dB( µ V);
then th e followin g approxim ate relati onshi p appli es:
T L +T L
LlogAv = P P N N (7)
TP + TN
EXAMPLE I f th e pulse level L P is 85 dB( µV) and the noise level L N is 8 dB( µ V), TP = 1 / B i mp = 1 µ s,
the pu lse rate n is 1 00 000 Hz, then TN ≈ 9 µ s. From this equ ation, L l og Av = 1 5, 7 dB( µV). I n reality, L l og Av is hi gher
because TP is hi gh er, because the pu lse signal at the I F outpu t does not d rop to n oise level i mm ediately after 1 µ s.
NOTE 2 A tolerance is u nd er consideration.
Meter A
Envel ope Simulating Micro-
detector network processor
D
IEC
Figu re 1 0 – Block diagram of an average detector
For Band E, the meter tim e constant for the linear average detector is 1 00 m s. For the
logarithm ic average detector, the requirem ent is under consideration.
I t is deduced from the above requirem ent that an average measuring receiver shall yield the
maxim um reading listed in Table 1 0 for a radio frequency sine-wave input signal modulated
with repeated rectangular pulses having the duration and period indicated in the table. A
tolerance of ± 1 , 0 dB is allowed for this requirement.
Table 1 0 – M aximu m reading of average measu ring receivers for a
pulse-modulated sine-wave input in comparison with the response to
a continuous sine wave having the same amplitude
Repeated rectangular pul ses for Band A/B receiver Band C/D receiver
modulation TM = 0, 1 6 s TM = 0, 1 s
Duration = TM
0, 353 (= –9, 0 dB) 0, 353 (= –9, 0 dB)
Period = 1 , 6 s
NOTE I n Band E, this appli es for the li near average detector only.
4,0 V
SEL>>
0V
V (video)
4,0 V
0V
0 1 ,0 2,0 3,0 4,0
V (AV) Time s IEC
NOTE 1 The response shown is caused by an interm ittent narrowban d sig nal with a d urati on of 0, 3 s and a
repetition freq uency of 1 Hz, when a tim e constant of 1 00 m s is used. I f th e tim e constant i s 1 60 m s, the peaks at
the output of th e m eter-sim ulating network will be lower.
NOTE 2 Th e response to i n term ittent narrowband disturbances m ay can also be defi ned for the log arithm ic
average detector operati ng with a certain vi deo band width, for exam ple, 1 0 H z, and the m axim um hold function of
the spectrum display.
6.6 Selectivity
For receivers with a bandwidth of 200 H z (for the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 50 kH z) or a
bandwidth of 9 kH z (for frequency range 0, 1 5 MH z to 30 MH z) the overall selectivity shall be
within the lim its shown in Figure 5 and 6, respectivel y. For receivers wi th a bandwidth of
1 20 kH z (for the frequency range 30 MH z to 1 000 MH z), the overall selectivity shall be within
the lim its shown in Figure 7. For receivers having other bandwidths, Figures 5, 6 and 7
describe the shape only and the frequency axis shall be scaled accordingly. The curve
representing the overall selectivity of the m easuring receiver reference bandwidth for Band E
shall lie within the limits of Figure 9.
NOTE For the m easurem ent of eq uipm ent that requi res hig her selecti vity at the transition between 1 30 kH z an d
1 50 kH z (for exam ple, m ains signal ing eq uipm ent as d efined i n EN 50065-1 [1 8] 2 ), a hig h-pass filter m ay be ad ded
in front of th e m easuri ng recei ver to achieve the foll owin g com bined sel ectivity of CI SPR m easuring receiver an d
high -pass filter:
Frequen cy Relative attenu ation
kHz dB
1 50 ≤1
1 46 ≤6
1 45 ≥6
1 40 ≥ 34
1 30 ≥ 81
The measuring receiver in conjunction with the high-pass filter should m eet the requirem ents
of this standard.
Spectrum anal yzers and FFT-based measuring instrum ents that m eet the requirem ents of this
clause can be used for com pliance measurem ents. For em ission measurements, FFT-based
m easuring instruments shall sample and evaluate the signal continuousl y during the
m easurement time.
______________
2 Figu res in squ are brackets refer to the Bibliograph y.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 35 –
Sym metric input impedance in the frequency range 9 kH z to 30 MH z: to permit symm etrical
measurem ents, a balanced input transformer is used. The preferred input impedance for the
frequency range 9 kH z to 1 50 kH z is 600 Ω . This sym metric input impedance may be
incorporated either in the relevant symm etrical artificial network necessary to couple to the
receiver or optionally in the m easuring receiver.
NOTE 1 “Corner freq uency” i s the pulse repetition freq uency above which the rm s-averag e detector behaves like
an rm s detector and below whi ch the rm s-average detector h as the slope of a lin ear averag e detector.
The minim um pulse repetition rate without overload shall conform to the values given in
Table 1 3.
NOTE 2 With this type of d etector it will n ot, in gen eral, be possible to provid e sufficient overload factor to
prevent n on -lin ear operation of the instrum ent at very l ow pul se repetition rates for short pul ses in Ban ds C/D an d
E (the response to a short sing le pulse is onl y theoreticall y defined i n these ban ds).
NOTE 3 Ann ex A describes the calcul ation for the overl oad factor for th e rm s detector. Annex B descri bes th e
determ ination of the pulse gen erator spectrum . Annex C describes th e accurate m easurem ent of th e output l evels
of nan osecon d pu lse generators.
NOTE 4 For Ban d E, the test m ay can be m ade with a pulse-m odulated si ne-wave si gnal, with an occupied
ban d wi dth of e. g. 2 M H z. E. 6 g ives the specification of an applicable test sign al.
NOTE Annexes B, C and E describe m ethods for determ ining th e output characteristics of pulse gen erators for
use in testin g the req uirem ents of this clause.
NOTE Annex A describes the calculati on for th e pulse response of the rm s detector. At a repetition frequency of
25 H z and 1 00 H z (i. e. the qu asi-peak detector reference pul se repetiti on frequency), respectivel y, the relati onshi p
between the in dications of an rm s-average and a qu asi-peak m easuring recei ver of th e same ban d width is gi ven in
Table 1 4.
When external preamplifiers are used, refer to Annex J for applicable requirem ents.
Below the corner frequency fc the relationship shall be in accordance with the following rule:
The response curve for a particular receiver shall lie between the lim its in Table 1 5.
I t is deduced from the above requirement that an rm s-average m easuring receiver shall yield
the m aximum reading listed in Table 9 for a radio frequency sine-wave input signal m odulated
with repeated rectangular pulses having the duration and period indicated in Table 1 6. A
tolerance of ± 1 , 0 dB is allowed for this requirem ent.
– 38 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
7.6 Selectivity
The selectivity curves for the rm s-average weighting receiver shall be equal to those of
Figures 5, 6 and 7, for Bands A, B, C and D. For the Band E receiver, the selectivity curve is
given in Figure 9.
The requirements of 4. 5.2, 4. 5. 3 and 4. 5. 4 apply. For Band E receivers, requirements are
under consideration.
Requirem ents for screening effectiveness, i. e. the immunity to high am bient radiated
disturbances, are under consideration.
8 Measuring receivers for the frequency range 1 GHz to 1 8 GHz with amplitude
probability distribution (APD) measuring function
APD of disturbance is defined as the cumulative distribution of the “probability of tim e that the
amplitude of disturbance exceeds a specified level”.
APD can be m easured at the output of the envelope detector or the succeeding circuits of an
RF measuring receiver or a spectrum anal yzer. The amplitude of disturbance should be
expressed in term s of the corresponding field strength or voltage at the receiver input.
Usuall y, an APD m easurement is carried out at a fixed frequency.
The APD m easuring function will be an additional function of the m easuring apparatus and
may be attached to, or incorporated in the m easuring instrum ent.
The APD m easuring function can be implem ented using the following m ethods. One approach
uses com parators and counters (Figure G. 1 ). The equipm ent determines the probabilities of
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 39 –
exceeding a set of pre-assigned am plitude (i. e. voltage) levels. The number of levels equals
the number of com parators. Another possible m ethod involves the use of an analog-to-digital
converter, a logic circuit, and m emory (Figure G. 2). The equipment can also provide the APD
figure for a set of pre-assigned am plitude levels. The num ber of levels depends on the
resolution of the analog-to-digital converter (e. g. 256 levels for an 8-bit converter).
APD m easurem ents using the aforem entioned function are applicable to products or product
families if their potential to cause interference to digital comm unication systems is to be
determined (see 4. 7 of CI SPR 1 6-3: 201 0/CI SPR 1 6-3: 201 0/AM D1 :201 2, for background
material on amplitude probability distribution, APD, specifications).
The following specifications appl y to the APD measuring function. A rationale for these
specifications is provided in Annex G.
• Specifications
a) The d ynamic range of the amplitude shall be greater than 60 dB.
b) The am plitude accuracy, including threshold level setting error, shall be better than
± 2, 7 dB.
c) The maxim um measurable tim e of a disturbance shall be longer than or equal to 2 m in.
The interm ittent m easurement can be used if the dead tim e is less than 1 % of the total
m easurem ent tim e.
d) The m inim um measurable probability shall be 1 0 –7 .
e) The APD measuring function shall be capable of assigning at least two amplitude
levels. The probabilities corresponding to all pre-assigned levels shall be measured
simultaneousl y. The resolution of the pre-assigned am plitude levels shall be 0, 25 dB at
a m inim um or better.
f) The sam pling rate shall be greater than or equal to 1 0 m illion sam ples per second
when using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MH z.
• Recommended specification
g) Amplitude resolution of the APD display should be less than 0, 25 dB for APD
m easuring equipment with an A/D converter.
NOTE APD m easurem ents may can also be applicable in th e freq uency ran ge below 1 GH z.
9 Disturbance analyzers
9.1 General
Disturbance anal yzers are used for the autom atic assessm ent of amplitude, rate and duration
of discontinuous disturbances (clicks).
The tim e param eters are determ ined from the signal that exceeds the I F reference level of the
measuring receiver.
NOTE 1 Defi nition an d assessm ent of clicks are in com pl ian ce with CI SPR 1 4-1 .
– 40 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
NOTE 2 Cu rrent anal yzers are desig ned for use with a quasi-peak m easurin g recei ver of the type that works with
a lim ited internal si gnal l evel. As a result, such an alyzers m ay not i nterface correctl y with al l recei vers.
B
Analogue of C.I.S.P.R. Indicator
detector and motor time Timing circuit
for more than two clicks
constants in any 2 s interval
– 41 –
Calibration
circuit
C
Shaping Duration of each disturbance
Timing circuit other than clicks (durations
network are additive if the counter
is not reset)
Supply Artificial
voltage mains
network
Clock
D
Apparatus Number of operations
under test on apparatus under test
IEC
Test Evaluation by
No. Test signal the analyzer
1 0,1 1 ms/1 dB
1 click
9,5 ms/1 dB
−1 s +1 s
2 1 click
Background: noise or CISPR pulses, 200 Hz: −2,5 dB (QP)
1 90 ms/1 dB
3 −1 s +1 s 1 click
Background: noise or CISPR pulses, 200 Hz: –2,5 dB (QP)
Other than click
1 333 ms/1 dB
4
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
6 1 80 ms Other than click
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
1 30 ms 1 click
7
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
8 21 0 ms 2 clicks
30 ms/25 dB
1 click
10 265 ms
30 ms/−2,5 dB
1 90 ms/25 dB
Band B: 1 034 ms/Band C: under consideration
11 2 clicks
30 ms/–2,5 dB/2 dB IF
IEC
Figu re 1 3 – A g raph ical presentation of test signal s u sed i n th e test of the an alyzer for
the performance ch eck again st th e d efinition of a cli ck according to Table 1 4
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 43 –
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
2a 1 9, 5 1 click
2, 2 s
0 04 08 12 16 2 22
3a 1 1 90 1 click
2, 2 s
0 04 08 12 16 2 22
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 1 2 14 16 18 2
– 44 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Table 1 7 (2 of 4)
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
6 5 5 30 30 1 80 Other than
click (240 m s)
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
7 5 5 30 30 1 30 1 click
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10
8 5 5 30 30 21 0 2 clicks
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 45 –
Table 1 7 (3 of 4)
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
1s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 1 2 14 1 6 18 2
12 25 –2, 5 c 1 90 30 1 1 66 e 1 click
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 1 2 14 1 6 18 2
– 46 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Table 1 7 (4 of 4)
a To be perform ed with backgroun d n oise consisting of 200 Hz CI SPR pu lses at a level 2, 5 dB bel ow the
quasi -peak threshol d level. These pulses should be present comm encing at least 1 s before the test pulse
and l asting u ntil at l east 1 s after the test pulse.
Observati ons :
1 ) The graphical representation i s done with peak m easurem en ts of a very short hold tim e ( < 1 m s) of the
test receiver which show the 200-H z pulse. When the pulse-m odul ated sine wave arri ves, the 200-H z-
pul se is no lon ger visibl e (as seen in the g raph for test no. 3) but still present du rin g the event of the
click disturbance
2) The very n arrow responses at the origi n in th e graphs are du e to a firm ware im perfection.
b The 1 , 333 s im pulse checks the th reshold of the analyzer for im pulses, which are onl y 1 dB above the
quasi -peak threshol d level.
c These l ower l evels shal l be set such that the i nterm ediate frequ ency threshol d is exceeded but th e q uasi-
peak th reshold is not exceeded
d I f these two pulses are m easured as separate distu rbances, only one click will be registered.
e The correspon dent valu es for the frequ ency rang e above 30 MH z are u nd er considerati on and will be
revised after fu rther in vestigati ons.
f The rise tim es of the pul ses shall not be long er than 40 µ s.
9. 3 Test method for th e validation of the performan ce check for th e click analyzer
9. 3.1 Basic requ irements
The disturbance anal yzer is connected to the quasi-peak m easuring receiver and tuned to a
convenient frequency.
A CW signal and a pulsed CW signal both at the tuned frequency of the receiver are required.
A signal generated by CI SPR pulse generator, as d efined in Annex B, with a 200 H z PRF
covering the receiver bandwidth at the tuned frequency is also required for test numbers 2
and 3.
The pulsed CW signal source shall provide two independentl y variable pulses. The rise time
of the pulses shall not be longer than 40 µ s. The pulse duration shall be variable between
1 1 0 µ s and 1 , 3 s and the amplitudes variable over a 44 dB range. An y background noise of
the pulsed CW signal source shall be at least 20 dB below the reference level used in step a)
in the test m easured on the receiver’s quasi-peak meter.
9. 3. 2 Ad di ti on al requ i rem en ts
The test m ethod is identical to the one described in 9. 3. 1 a). The parameters of the signal are
given in Table F. 1 .
– 48 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Annex A
(normative)
Determination of response to repeated pulses of quasi-peak
and rms-average measuring receivers
(See 3.6, 4.4.2, 7.3.2 and 7.5.1 )
A. 1 General
This annex sets out the data for the num erical calculation, and the procedure for establishing
the curve of response to repeated pulses. The assumptions inherent in the method are also
stated. The calculation is divided into three successive stages.
NOTE The text on the rm s detector in this an nex deal s with the rm s m easuring receiver i n theory and applies to
the rm s-average m easu rin g receiver above th e corner frequ en cy fc as defin ed i n Cl ause 7.
The pulse response of these stages is, in general, determ ined solel y by the I F stages that
define the overall selectivity of the receiver.
I t is common practice to consider that this selectivity can be obtained by an assem bl y of two
criticall y-coupled tuned transformers arranged in cascade so as to produce the desired
passband at the –6 dB points. An y other equivalent arrangem ent can be reduced to the above
for purposes of calculation. The practical symm etry of this passband perm its the use of the
equivalent low-pass filter for calculating the envelope of the pulse response. The error
resulting from this approxim ation is negligible.
where
The envelope of the response of two criticall y-coupled tuned transform ers to an im pulse area
υt is, from the previous equation:
The corresponding selectivity curve of the equivalent low-pass filter may be written, for t << 1 / ω0 :
2ω02
F( f ) = G × (A. 3)
[(ω0 + jω )2 + ω02 ]2
where ω = 2 π f .
2 × 4 ( 2 − 1 )ω 0 (A. 4)
B3 =
= 0,361ω 0
π
2 × ω0 (A. 5)
B6 = = 0, 450ω 0
π
The effective bandwidth of a receiver, com prising an idealized rectangular filter giving the
sam e rms value of response as an actual receiver, is equal to the power bandwidth ∆ f defined
as:
1
+∞
2 ( f ) df
∆ f =
∫− ∞ F (A. 6)
F02
where
F( f) is the selectivity curve;
f = ∫ F 2 ( f )df (A. 7)
+∞
∆
−∞
∞
2ω 02
∆ f = ∫ 2
df (A. 8)
24
0
[(ω 0 + jω )2 +ω 0 ]
thus:
B 3 = 0, 963 ∆ f (A. 1 0)
An y detector may be reduced to the form (actual or equivalent) of a non-linear element (for
exam ple a diode) in association with a resistance (total forward resistance S) and followed by
a circuit consisting of a capacitance C in shunt with a discharge resistance R .
– 50 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
The el ectrical ch arge ti m e constant TC is rel ated to the prod uct S × C, wh i l e th e electrical
d isch arge tim e constan t TD is g i ven by the prod uct R × C.
The rel ationshi p between TC an d th e prod uct S × C wi l l be establish ed by obtai n i ng, i n a tim e
t = TC , an i nd icated voltage of 0, 63 tim es the fi n al stead y val ue wh en a constant am pl i tu d e RF
si gn al is su d den l y appl i ed.
This eq uation can n ot be d irectl y i n tegrated. A value for the prod uct S × C, wh ich, for th e tim e
constan ts ch osen satisfi es th e above con d iti ons, is foun d by m eth ods of approxim ati on , for
exam ple:
i n Ban d A: TC = 45 m s
TD = 500 m s
2, 81 S × C = 1 ms
i n Ban d B: TC = 1 ms
TD = 1 60 m s
3, 95 S × C = 1 ms
i n Ban ds C an d D: TC = 1 ms
TD = 550 m s
4, 07 S × C = 1 ms
By inserti ng th e val u e thus obtained in Eq uation (A. 1 1 ), th is m ay be sol ved for ei ther an
isol ated pu lse or repeated pu lses (agai n by m eth ods of approxim ati on) by in trod ucin g, i n
place of th e constant am pli tud e A , the fu nction A ( t) g i ven by Equ ati ons (A. 1 ) an d (A. 2).
This case of repeated pu lses can be sol ved practi call y onl y by arbitraril y assum in g a level for
th e ou tpu t vol tage of th e detector at th e start of each pu lse, by d eterm in i n g th e increm en t Δ U
of this vol tag e caused by th e pulse, an d then fi n d in g th e spaci n g wh ich shal l exist between
two successi ve pu lses in ord er to repeat th e assu m ed in iti al cond i tions.
A.3.2 Response of the indicating instrument to the signal from the detector
The on l y sim plifyi n g, bu t perfectl y l egitim ate, assum ption is that the ri sing porti on of th e
ou tpu t voltage of the d etector is instan tan eous.
− t / TD
d 2α
+
2 dα 1
+
α = 1 (A. 1 2)
dt 2 T
M dt
T
2
T2
M M
wh ere
TM is the mechanical tim e constant of the criticall y dam ped indicating instrum ent.
The solution of the problem is relativel y sim ple for the two extremes of the response curve; on
the one hand, for pulses sufficiently separated for the starting point to be zero and thus
known, and on the other, for pulses having a sufficientl y high repetition rate for the inertia of
the instrument to prevent it following the fluctuations faithfull y. For the interm ediate cases, the
calculation becomes more com plicated. At the start of each pulse, the instrument deflection is
varying and it is necessary to find a solution that takes account of the initial position and
velocity.
1 /2
+∞ A 2 (t)
(A. 1 3)
Urms = n∫ dt
0 2
The output m ay also be deduced from the frequency response curve as:
1 /2
+∞ 2υτ × F 2 ( f ) (A. 1 4)
Urms = n∫ df
−∞ 2
This gives:
1 /2
n ∫ F 2 ( f ) df (A. 1 5)
+∞
Urms = 2 × υτ ×
−∞
Urms = 2 × υτ × n × ∆ f (A. 1 6)
Urm s = 2 m V, when n = 1 00 H z
– 52 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
th us:
1 00 2
υτ = μVs (A. 1 7)
Δf
1 39
υτ = μVs (A. 1 8)
B3
( ) peak = 0, 944 × υτ × ω0
A t
A t ( ) peak 1/2
B3
= 1, 28
(A. 1 9)
2 × Urms n
1 39
(υτ ) rms = μVs
B3
For the selectivity characteristic qu oted in Eq uation (A. 3), this corresponds to:
1 55
(υτ ) rms = μVs
B6
wh en reference is m ad e to th e band wi d th at 6 d B.
For the q u asi -peak recei ver, the val u e of pu lse ( υτ ) qp , wh ich is equ ivalent to a si ne-wave
sign al of 2 m V, is as fol l ows:
Thus for m easuring receivers having band-pass characteristics according to Equation (A. 3)
and a bandwidth at 6 dB equal to the nom inal bandwidths prescribed in Clauses 4, 5, 6 and 7
the following relationships for ( υt ) rm s /( υt ) qp exist:
(υt ) rms
= 1 4,3 dB
(υt ) qp
(υt ) rms
= 20,1 dB
(υt ) qp
These relationships are valid for a pulse repetition frequency of 1 00 H z. At other repetition
frequencies, it is necessary to use the corresponding pulse response curves.
– 54 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Annex B
(normative)
Determination of pulse generator spectrum
(See 4.4, 5.5, 6.5, 7. 5)
B. 1 . 1 Gen eral
For checking compliance with the requirem ents of this standard, a pulse generator is needed.
Compliance with the requirements of 4. 4, 4. 6, 5. 5, 6. 5 and 7.5 m ay be tested using the pulse
generator technique.
For each frequency band of the measuring receiver under test, the generator used shall be
capable of producing pulses with the im pulse area specified and over the range of repetition
frequencies given in Table B. 1 . The impulse area should be known within ± 0, 5 dB and the
repetition frequency to within about 1 %.
The spectrum should be substantiall y constant up to the upper lim it of the frequency band of
the receiver under test. The spectrum m ay be regarded as satisfactoril y uniform if, within this
band, the variation of the spectrum amplitude is not greater than 2 dB relative to its value for
the lower frequencies within the band. The im pulse area at the measurement frequency shall
be known to within ± 0,5 dB.
For checking compliance with the requirements of 4.6, the spectrum above the upper lim it of
the frequency band shall be lim ited (1 0 dB down at twice the upper frequency). This is
necessary to standardize the severity of the test since the inter-modulation products of all
com ponents of the spectrum will contribute to the response.
Methods for the accurate determ ination of the absolute value of the spectrum amplitude of
pulses are given in Annex C.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 55 –
For measurem ent of the variation of the spectrum am plitude with frequency, the following
method may be used.
E
St ( f ) = 0
B6
The m easurement is repeated for various test frequencies in the band under consideration.
The spectrum of the pulse generator is given by the curve relating St ( f) to the measurem ent
frequency.
The receiver used should be linear for the peak levels of the signals used.
The suppression of parasitic responses, in particular the im age frequency and I F responses,
should be at least 40 dB.
Annex C
(normative)
Accurate measurements of the output of
nanosecond pulse generators
(See 4.4, 5.5, 6.5, 7. 5)
The total area under the envelope A t, f of the output from the band-pass filter (taking into
( )
account the sign of different parts of it) is measured, so as to evaluate the integral in the
equation:
(C. 1 )
+∞
2( Aimp ) = S( f ) = ∫ A ( t, f )dt
−∞
where
I n a variation of this method for pulses of duration much shorter than the period of the
frequency ( f), the impulse area can be measured directl y as an integrated area by m eans of a
suitable oscilloscope (for example, for nanosecond pulses, a sam pling oscilloscope is
required), the integration taking into account the sign of different parts of the area.
When the pulse repetition frequency F exceeds the values of the bandwidth of the measuring
receiver, the latter m ay select one line from the pulse spectrum. I n this case, the impulse area
may be determined as follows:
VK V 2 (C. 2)
Aimp = =
2F 2F
The pulse generator may then be used to calibrate the pulse response characteristics of a
measuring receiver in which the bandwidth is sufficientl y wide to accept m an y harmonic
com ponents (approximatel y 1 0 or more within the 6 dB bandwidth).
C. 1 .5 En ergy meth od
Another method compares the power produced by a therm al source (resistor) with that
produced by the pulse generator. H owever, the accuracy obtained with this method is som e-
what less than with the three methods m entioned above. This method may be useful at
frequencies of the order of 1 000 MH z.
C. 2. 1 To determine compliance with 4. 4. 1 , 5.5, 6. 5. 2 and 7.5. 2, the im pulse area shall be
known with an error not greater than ± 0,5 dB.
C. 2. 2 The pulse repetition frequency shall be known with an error not greater than 1 %.
C. 2. 3 For determining compliance with 4. 4. 2, 5.5, 6. 5. 4 and 7. 5. 3, the impulse area shall not
depend on their repetition frequency.
C. 2. 4 For determ ining com pliance with 4. 4, 5. 5, 6. 5 and 7. 5, the generator frequency
spectrum should be uniform over the passband of the m easuring receiver. This requirem ent is
considered fulfilled in the following cases:
a) if variation of the frequency spectrum is substantiall y linear with respect to frequency
within the frequency passband of the receiver, and the spectrum irregularity does not
exceed 0, 5 dB within the receiver passband measured at the –6 dB points;
b) if the frequency spectrum is smoothl y tapered on both sides from the tuning frequency
of the receiver, and if the spectrum width at the –6 dB points is at least five tim es greater
than the receiver passband at that level.
In both cases, the im pulse area is assumed to be equal to its value at the tuning frequency.
– 58 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Annex D
(normative)
Influence of the quasi-peak measuring receiver
characteristics on its pulse response
(See 4.4.2)
The level of the pulse response curve for high repetition frequencies depends essentially on
the m agnitude of the bandwidth. On the other hand, for low repetition frequencies, the time
constants play the m ore important role. N o tolerance has been stated for these tim e
constants, but it is suggested for guidance that a value of 20 % is considered reasonable.
I t is also at very low repetition frequencies that the effect of lack of overload factors will be
most noticeable. The values requ ired for the overload factors are those necessary for the
accurate measurem ent of an isolated pulse using the bandwidth and the time constants
prescribed.
Examination of the pulse response-curve at the two ends of the range of the indicating
instrum ent provides a check on possible non-linear behaviour of the detector. The m ost
critical repetition frequencies in this respect are most probabl y in the neighbourhood of 20 H z
to 1 00 H z.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 59 –
Annex E
(normative)
Response of average and peak measuring receivers
(See 6.3.1 )
I t is shown in [1 9] and [20] that the area under the envelope of the impulse response curve of
a narrowband circuit having a symm etrical frequency characteristic is independent of the
bandwidth, and is given by:
(E. 1 )
+∞
∫−A∞ ( t ) dt = 2υτG0
where υ and t are the am plitude and duration of a rectangular pulse for which B im p t << 1 and
G0 is the gain of the circuit at the centre frequency.
This theorem is valid only in the case of a non-oscillating envelope. The oscillatory envelope
is characteristic of double-tuned circuits, and unless a phase sensitive detector is used, it may
be necessary to com pensate by calibration the error introduced by the oscillatory response. I n
the case of critical coupling, the second peak of the envelope is about 8,3 % of the first one.
NOTE The response of th e pre-detector stages as defi ned in A. 2 is oscillatory. Therefore, the cali bration error
introduced by the oscillatory response sh oul d be is com pensated with a bi ased tolerance of + 2, 5 dB/–0, 5 d B
in 6. 5. 2.
As long as pulses do not overlap in the output of the I F am plifier, the average value is
proportional to the pulse repetition rate, n .
I n view of Equation (E.1 ), it is not considered meaningful to define an effective bandwidth for
an average measuring receiver.
For calculation of overload factor and for use in connection with peak measuring receivers, it
is useful to define a quantity known as the effective impulse bandwidth of the pre-detector
circuit as follows:
A( t ) max
Bimp = (E. 2)
2 G0
where A ( t) m ax is the peak envelope output of the intermediate-frequency stages with a unit
im pulse applied.
0,944
= 1, 05 B6 or 1 ,31 B3 (E. 3)
Bimp
2 0
= ω
For other types of tuned circuits, the ratio of B imp to B 6 may be estim ated from Figure E.1 if
the ratio of B 20 to B 3 is known, where B 20 is the bandwidth at 20 dB.
1 , 20
1 ,1 5
∆ f6 d B
∆ fimp
1 ,1 0
1 , 05
Dou ble tu ned stages critical coupli ng
1 , 00
0, 95
1 2 3 4 5
B 20
Shape factor
B3
IEC
Figu re E.1 – Correction factor for estimatin g th e ratio B i mp / B 6 for oth er tun ed circu its
1, 4
υt = mVs (E. 4)
n
Therefore, from A. 5 the ratio of ( υt ) ave to ( υt ) qp to produce the sam e indication will be:
for the frequency range 0, 1 5 MH z to 30 MH z:
(υt )ave
= 32 ,9 dB
(υt )qp
(υt )ave
= 50 ,1 dB
(υt )qp
The above assum es adequate overload factor at the repetition rate in question, and that the
bandwidths in use correspond respectivel y to those in Clause 4. At a repetition rate of
1 000 H z, the corresponding ratios will be 1 7, 4 dB and 38, 1 dB.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 61 –
Where a direct-reading m eter is used in the receiver, the requirement for tim e constants can
be determined from the curve in Figure E. 2, which shows the percentage of the reading
referred to the true peak in function of a parameter and which includes the time constants
ratio, the bandwidth B 6 and the pulse repetition rate. I n using this curve, it should be noted
that:
RC 1 TC
= 4 (E. 5)
RD TD
where TC and TD are respectively the charge and discharge tim e constants.
For exam ple, if it is desired to have the receiver read at least 90 % of true peak at a repetition
rate of 1 H z, it would be necessary to have a discharge-tim e constant to charge tim e constant
ratio of:
1 , 25 × 1 0 6 in the frequency range 0, 1 5 MH z to 30 MH z;
1 , 67 × 1 0 7 in the frequency range 30 MH z to 1 000 MH z.
1, 4
mVs (with B im p in H z) (E. 6)
Bimp
From the 6 dB bandwidths specified in Table H .1 , the B im p values are obtained as 1 , 05 B 6 (see
E. 2). These values and the corresponding A im p values required for a peak m eter are shown in
Table E. 1 .
Therefore, using the values given as a) in Table 1 for A im p, qp , the ratio of A i m p, qp to A im p, peak
to produce the sam e indication is:
For Band A 6, 1 at 25 H z pulse repetition frequency;
For Band B 6, 6 at 1 00 H z pulse repetition frequency;
For Bands C and D 1 2, 0 at 1 00 H z pulse repetition frequency.
– 62 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
P%
πR B
α =( c 6 )
RDN
R C = Ch argin g resistance ( Ω )
R D = Discharg e resistance ( Ω )
B 6 = 6 dB band wi dth (Hz)
1 00
N = Pulse repetition frequ ency (PPS)
P = Meter readin g as a percentage of true peak
80
60
40
20
0
1 0 -3 1 0 -2 1 0 -1 1 10
α
IEC
Pulse generators with a uniform spectrum up to 1 8 GH z are not feasible. To test the response
of m easuring receivers above 1 GH z to pulses and to verify the amplitude relationship of
various types of m easuring receivers, it is practical to use a pulse-m odulated carrier tuned to
the receive frequency. The pulse width shall be less than or equal to (1 /3 B im p ). The accuracy
of the im pulse width is im portant for the precise generation of a certain impulse area as
required in the relevant subclause. I n addition to a measurement of the pulse duration using
an oscilloscope, the pulse duration of a rectangular pulse can be verified by the distance
between the m inim a on the spectrum display (see Figure E. 3 for a sam ple waveform ).
For the m easuring receiver with a peak detector with a bandwidth B im p of 1 MH z, an impulse
area (e.m. f. ) of 1 , 4/ B im p m Vs is required, that is, 1 , 4 nVs for a response equal to that of an
unm odulated sine-wave signal tuned to the receive frequency having an e. m.f. with rm s value
of 2 m V [66 dB( µ V)]. A pulse-m odulated carrier having the requ ired impulse area can be
generated with the various pulse widths as shown in Table E. 2.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 63 –
For a m easuring receiver with a linear average detector, the impulse area (e.m .f. ) equal to an
unm odulated sine-wave signal at the receive frequency having an e.m .f. with rms value of
2 m V [66 dB( µ V)] shall be 1 , 4/ n m Vs ( n being the pulse repetition rate). For n = 50 000, the
im pulse area is 28 nVs, that is, 26 dB higher than for the peak measuring receiver with a B im p
of 1 MH z.
For a measuring receiver with an rms detector, the impulse area (e. m .f.) equal to an
unm odulated sine-wave signal at the receive frequency having an e.m .f. with rm s value of
2 mV [66 dB( µ V)] shall be 44( B 3 -1 /2 ) µ Vs for pulse repetition rate of 1 kH z. For an im pulse
bandwidth B im p of 1 MH z, the corresponding B 3 is 700 kH z. Therefore, the required impulse
area is 52, 6 nVs, that is, 31 , 5 dB higher than for the peak m easuring receiver with a B im p of
1 MH z.
50 PRN
40
30
20
10
–1 0
Center 1 28 MHz 5 MHz Span 50 MHz
IEC
U
Bimp = p (E. 7)
D
The pulse spectral density D will frequentl y not be available as a precise reference quantity.
I n order to reduce the uncertainty of the im pulse bandwidth m easurem ent, Methods 1 and 2
are using two m easurements. U nder certain circumstances, the selectivity curve of a
measuring receiver can also be used to calculate B im p (as described in method 3), since B im p
is the “voltage bandwidth” of the measuring receiver (not to be confused with the power
bandwidth or equivalent noise bandwidth, which determines the rms value of Gaussian noise
when using the rms detector of the m easuring receiver). B im p is determined by the selectivity
curve of the I F filter, the (possibl y non-linear) phase response of the filter and the video
bandwidth of the receiver. I t is wider than B 6 , but there is no general factor for the relationship
between B im p and B 6 or B 3 of the receiver.
t T0
Voltage
U1
Time
Figu re E.4 – Pu lse-mod ulated RF si gnal appl ied to a measu ring receiver
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 65 –
fp >> Bimp
U2 = U1 × t × fp
Voltage
Frequency
f0 – 1 f0 f0 + 1
t t
2 1
t t
IEC
fp >> Bimp
Voltage
f0 – 1 f0 f0 + 1 Frequency
t t
2 1
t t
U1
Carrier signal
U2 = U1 × t × Bimp
Voltage
Frequency
IEC
With the first m easurement, the rms amplitude U2 can be expected as U2 = U1 × t × fp1 . Low
m easurement uncertainty can be achieved by a high signal-to-noise ratio. But care shall be
taken to avoid overload. With the second m easurement, the maxim um response of the rms
value of the peak to the transient can be expected as Up = U1 × t × B im p . I f the product U1 × t
is perfectl y equal in both m easurements, then B im p can be calculated from the two
measurem ent results as shown in Figure E. 7 using Equation (E.2):
U
Bimp = fp1 × p (E. 8)
U2
– 66 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Receiver response
U2 U2 = U1 × t × fp1
Up = U1 × t × Bimp
Up
Up Bimp = fp1 ×
U2
This m ethod determines the pulse spectral density D using the equation D = Uk / fp , where Uk
is the measured voltage of one spectral line (i. e. , the carrier frequency, if the signal is a
pulse-modulated carrier, or the center line at the receive frequency, at which B im p is to be
measured) and fp is the prf. Again, fp shall be m uch higher than the narrow bandwidth and
m uch lower than the B im p to be m easured, i. e. B n arrow « fp « B im p . Exam ple settings could be
B narrow = 9 kH z, fp = 1 00 kH z for B im p = 1 MH z. The m ethod requires a comparison of the
responses of the narrowband filter and of the filter to be measured by applying an
unm odulated sinewave signal to both filters and deriving a correction factor c for the
calculation of D ( c = U2 / U1 , with U2 being the value for the wide filter and U1 being the valu e
for the narrow filter). Therefore D = c × Uk/fp . When D is determined, Up is measured with th e
peak detector and B im p can be calculated using Equation (E. 2).
I n this case, the im pulse bandwidth of a measuring receiver is defined as the area of the
norm alized linear selectivity function U( f), with 1 / Um ax as the normalization factor:
1 +∞
Bimp = U ( f )df (E. 9)
Umax ∫ −∞
Measuring receivers with high-resolution digital frequency displays can be tuned in N steps of
∆ f to m easure the selectivity function U( f ). Measurem ents between the 60 dB points with 1 00
n
steps ( N = 1 01 ) are usuall y sufficient for a correct bandwidth m easu rem ent. Analogous, a
swept receiver can be set up such that its start and stop frequencies coincide with the 60 dB
points of the filter curve and a sweep is taken to obtain the amplitude values. The test signal
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 67 –
will be a CW signal to trace out the filter shape of the filter under investigation. I n this case,
the impulse bandwidth can be m easured and calculated using
N
1 ∆f
[U( fn ) + U( fn +1 )] ×
Umax ∑
Bimp = (E. 1 0)
n =1 2
1 MHz
1 ,2
1 ,0
0,8
MHz
0,6 1 MHz
0,4
0,2
0
–3 000 –1 500 0 1 500 3 000
kHz IEC
Annex F
(normative)
Performance check of the exceptions from the definitions
of a click according to 4.2.3 of CISPR 1 4-1 : 2005
For the application of the exceptions given in CI SPR 1 4-1 , the disturbance anal yzer shall
provide the following additional information (refer to Table F. 1 for test details):
a) the num ber of clicks of duration equal to or less than 1 0 ms;
b) the num ber of clicks of duration greater than 1 0 m s but equal to or less than 20 m s;
c) the num ber of clicks of duration greater than 20 m s but equal to or less than 200 ms;
d) the duration of each registered disturbance the am plitude of which exceeds the QP level
lim it for continuous disturbance;
e) an indication that the appliance failed the test, if it is clear that it produces disturbances
other than clicks not corresponding to the definition of a click and to which none of the
exceptions can be applied;
f) the tim e interval from the start of the test to the occurrence of disturbances; mentioned
under e);
g) the total duration of disturbances other than clicks the QP level lim it of which exceeds the
lim it for continuous disturbance;
h) the click rate.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 69 –
500 m s
2 1 9, 5 1 click
≤1 0 m s
500 m s
3 1 1 0, 5 1 click
> 1 0 m s,
≤ 20 m s
500 m s
– 70 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Table F.1 (2 of 5)
500 m s
5 1 21 1 click
> 20 m s
500 m s
6 1 1 90 1 click
> 20 m s
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
7 5 5 21 0 21 0 1 50 IF
onl y once per
program cycle
or per
m inim um
observation
tim e: counted
as
1 click > 20 m s
(See E2 and
Note 1 of this
table, 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
1 s
900 1 000
600 m s rule)
OTHERWISE
Conti nu ous distu rbance (570 m s)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 71 –
Table F.1 (3 of 5)
630 m s > 1 s
600 m s)
9 5 5 1 90 1 90 1 90 IF
the final click
rate is less than
5:
2 clicks > 20 ms
(See E4 and
Note 1 of this
table;
refri gerator rule;
also see N ote 2 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
of this table)
OTHERWISE IF
onl y once per prog ram cycle or once du ri ng the
m inim um observati on tim e:
counted as 1 cl ick > 20 m s
(see E2 and Note 1 of this tabl e)
OTHERWISE
Fail: contin uous disturbance (570 m s)
10 5 5 50 50 1 85 IF
the final click
rate is less than
5:
2 clicks > 20 ms
(See E4 and
Note 1 of this
table; also see
Note 2 of this
table) 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
1 s
– 72 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Table F.1 (4 of 5)
Table F.1 (5 of 5)
Test Evaluation by
No Test signal the analyzer
1 click >20 ms
6 1 90 ms/1 dB
1 click ≤ 600 ms
21 0 ms/5 dB 21 0 ms/5 dB
7 1 50 ms (DUT programme-controlled)
Continuous
8 220 ms/5 dB 220 ms/5 dB
1 90 ms ≥ 600 ms
1 click ≤ 600 ms
1 90 ms/5 dB 1 90 ms/5 dB (counted as 2 clicks
9 1 90 ms refrigerator rule)
for N <5 - 2 clicks
for N ≥5 - continuous, or
10 50 ms/5 dB 50 ms/5 dB 1 click ≤600 ms
1 85 ms for programme controlled DUT
IEC
Figu re F.1 – A graph ical presentation of the test sign als used for
the performance ch eck of th e an alyzer with the addition al requi rements
according to Table F. 1
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 75 –
Annex G
(informative)
Rationale for the specifications of the APD measuring function
The specifications are based on the following definitions and considerations:
a) Dynamic range of the amplitude
The d ynamic range of the am plitude is defined as the range necessary to obtain the APD.
The upper limit of the d ynamic range shall be greater than the peak level of disturbance to
be m easured and the lower limit shall be lower than the level of disturbance limit specified
by the product comm ittees.
According to CI SPR 1 1 , the peak lim it for group 2, class B, for I SM equipment is set at
1 1 0 dB( µ V/m ), and the weighted lim it is specified as 60 dB( µ V/m). Therefore, a d ynam ic
range of greater than 60 dB is proposed, with a 1 0 dB margin.
b) Sampling rate
I deally, the APD of disturbances is m easured using the equivalent bandwidth of the radio
service to be protected. H owever, the spectrum anal yzer’s resolution bandwidth is
specified as 1 MH z for the frequency range above 1 GH z. The sam pling rate shall
therefore be greater than 1 0 m illion sam ples per second.
c) M aximum measu rable time
CI SPR 1 1 specifies the m axim um hold tim e as a 2 min period for peak measurements of
m icrowave cooking appliances above 1 GH z. Therefore, the m easurable time for an APD
m easurement shall be 2 min m inim um. Because the size of the counter or m emory is
lim ited, continuous measurem ents m ay be difficult for long measurem ent periods.
Therefore, intermittent m easurements are allowed under the condition that the dead tim e
is less than 1 % of the total m easurement time.
d) M inimum measu rable probability
About 1 00 occurrences may be necessary to obtain a m eaningful result. Therefore, the
m inim um measurable probability is calculated as follows:
assuming 2 min for the measuring time and a 1 0-million-samples-per-second sampling
rate, the probability is determined as:
1 00/(1 20 × 1 0 × 1 0 6 ) ± 1 0 –7
e) Display of APD measurement data
The amplitude resolution for the display of APD results depends on the d yn amic range and
the resolution of the A/D converter. For example, the resolution of the display comes to
less than 0, 25 dB ( ± 60 dB/256) when an 8-bit A/D converter is applied to a d ynamic range
of 60 dB.
Figures G. 1 and G.2 show block diagram s of im plementations of the APD measurement
function.
I nput
Pre-assigned
level N o. 1
Pre-assigned
level N o. 2
Pre-assigned
level No. n
IEC
Fi gu re G . 1 – Block d i ag ram of APD m easu rem en t ci rcu i t with ou t A/D con verter
+1 increm ent
APD( i )
IEC
Figu re G .2 – Bl ock d i ag ram of APD m easu rem en t ci rcu it with A/D con verter
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 77 –
1 00
1 0 –4
1 0 –6
EUT: OFF
(receiver noise)
1 0 –8
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Am plitude dB( µ V/m )
IEC
Annex H
(informative)
Characteristics of a quasi-peak measuring receiver
Table H . 1 provides specifications of a quasi-peak measuring receiver. These specifications
describe the overall characteristics of such an instrument and do not describe the
specification of individual com ponents and subassemblies of the instrum ent. The responses to
pulses as specified in 4. 4 are calculated on the basis of the measuring receivers having the
following fundam ental characteristics.
Frequ en cy band
Characteri sti cs Band A Band B Bands C and D
9 kHz to 1 50 kH z 0, 1 5 M H z to 30 M H z 30 MHz to 1 000 MHz
Band width at the –6 dB points, 0, 20 9 1 20
B 6 in kHz
Detector electrical charg e tim e 45 1 1
constant, in m s
Detector electrical discharg e ti m e 500 1 60 550
constant, in m s
Mech anical tim e constant of cri tically 1 60 1 60 1 00
dam ped in dicating instrum ent, in m s
Overload factor of circuits precedin g 24 30 43, 5
the detector, in dB
Overload factor of the d. c. am plifier
between detector and in dicatin g 6 12 6
instrum ent, in dB
NOTE 1 The d efiniti on of m echanical tim e constant (see 3. 8) assum es that the indicati ng instrum ent is linear,
i. e. eq ual i ncrem ents of cu rrent produce equ al increm ents of deflection. An i ndicati ng instrum ent havi ng a
different relati on between cu rrent and deflecti on m ay can be used provided that th e instrum ent satisfies the
requirem ents of this subclause. I n an electronic i nstrum ent, the m echanical tim e-constant m ay can be sim ulated
by a ci rcuit.
NOTE 2 No tol erance is gi ven for the electrical an d m echanical tim e constants. The actual valu es used in a
specific recei ver are determ ined by th e d esign to m eet the req uirem ents in 4. 4.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 79 –
Annex I
(informative)
Example of EMI receiver and swept spectrum anal yzer architecture
This annex provides a brief description of the main differences between “EMI receivers” and
“swept spectrum anal yzers”, as far as this standard is concerned. Figure I . 1 illustrates an
example of the architecture of both types of instrum ents. The parts shaded in grey are
typicall y im plemented in test instrumentation to achieve com pliance with specifications called
out in this standard.
NOTE Additional background inform ation is currentl y in preparati on for CI SPR 1 6-3.
Loudspeaker
Envelope
Attenuator Preselection Preamplifier Mixer IF bandwiths detector Detectors
Quasi-peak/
RF average
IF
e.g. 1 0 Hz-3 MHz
LO
Sweep Display
generator IEC
Figu re I. 1 – Exampl e block d iag ram of EM I receiver con sisting of swept spectru m
an alyzer with added preselector, preamplifi er and qu asi-peak/averag e detector
The m ain differences between the two instrument types are described below.
a) Swept spectrum anal yzers are scanning instrum ents, which tune their local oscillator (LO)
frequency continuousl y to cover the selected frequency range of interest. Som e EMI
receivers perform a stepped sweep, i. e. the instrum ent is tuned to fixed frequencies, in
defined frequency step sizes, to cover the frequency range of interest. The amplitude at
each tuning frequency is measured and retained for further processing or display.
b) Most swept spectrum anal yzers do not have preselection (i. e. filtering at the input) built
into the instrument before the first frequency conversion stage. This usuall y results in an
inadequate d ynamic range for m easurem ents of low repetition frequency pulses with
quasi-peak detection and thus m ay lead to erroneous measurem ent results under these
circumstances.
c) Swept spectrum anal yzers with preselection are comm erciall y available. This type of
instruments m ay meet all requirements called out in this standard and, in case of full
com pliance with this standard, can be used without an y restrictions to perform emission
measurem ents in accordance with CI SPR 1 6-2 series.
– 80 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Annex J
(normative)
Requirements when using an external
preamplifier with a measuring receiver
J.1 General
Therefore the operator of a measuring system that includes an external preamplifier shall
determ ine the limitations of the system and shall appl y linearity checks for the test system.
Automated m easurement results with external pream plifiers need to be verified using a final
manual linearity check. The inform ation given in this annex provides guidance for the user of
emission measurement system s.
I nternall y, measuring receivers are designed to achieve optimum sensitivity while avoiding
overload. Built-in preselection in the m easuring receiver avoids overload by impulsive signals.
I n spite of preselection, measuring receivers usuall y have no linearity reserve for quasi -peak
measurem ents of a single pulse above the specified indication range. Missing preselection in
measuring receivers causes problems with quasi-peak detection of im pulsive sign als with low
PRF.
The use of an external broadband preamplifier shall be considered onl y after all other
possible measures for improving the system sensitivity have been exhausted, e. g. using
measuring receivers with built-in preamplifiers, using antennas of sufficient gain, or using low
loss connecting cables. An external preamplifier need onl y be added when the disturbance
lim it and all of the em issions expected and emissions to be m easured are very close to the
system noise level, e.g. for com pliance with Class 5 radiated disturbance lim its of CI SPR 25
[1 4]. I f high em ission signals or high am bients are expected, external preamplifiers are not
recom mended.
From experience, external preamplifiers are not needed for radiated disturbance
measurem ents to Class B limits of CI SPR 1 1 , CI SPR 22 [1 3] and CI SPR 32 [1 5], either at 3 m
or at 1 0 m m easurem ent distance, when measuring receivers with built-in preamplifiers
including preselection and low-loss antenna cables are used. The sam e situation applies for
radiated disturbance m easurements to CI SPR 1 4-1 , CI SPR 1 5 [1 ], and the generic em ission
standards, as well as for disturbance power m easurem ents.
External preamplifiers are not recom mended for conducted disturbance m easurements below
30 MH z; their use m ay cause harm onics in the presence of high-level disturbance at
frequencies below 1 50 kH z, where m an y emission standards do not specify disturbance limits.
I f an external pream plifier is added for im proved sensitivity, the following needs to be
considered:
a) pream plifiers have a wide bandwidth, i. e. they are susceptible to overload by im pulsive
signals and high level narrowband signals;
– 82 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
b) pream plifiers may produce interm odulation products and harmonics; this is especiall y
important when measurem ents are m ade on an OATS and/or in the presence of radio
transm ission equipment;
c) pream plifiers increase the signal level at the receiver input and thus may overload the
receiver input stages, a condition which cannot be avoided entirel y by the receiver’s built-
in preselection;
d) the gain in sensitivity will be less than the gain in signal level, thus lim iting the d ynam ic
range of the preamplifier/receiver com bination;
NOTE 1 Th e g ain in sensitivity is u nderstood as th e differen ce between th e n oise fig ure wi thout pream plifier
and th e system noise figu re with pream plifier.
e) for maxim um sensitivity in the frequency range above 1 GH z, the pream plifier is
m ounted/connected directl y to the m easurement antenna;
f) use of an external preamplifier requires that an accurate gain versus frequency
characterization be accounted for in the measurement result;
g) the uncertainty of the gain as a function of tem perature and aging, as well as the
additional m ismatch uncertainty between the pream plifier output port and the receiver
input port, shall be included in the uncertainty budget for the m easurement; the input
impedance shall, as far as possible, compl y with the requirem ents for the m easuring
receiver and shall be included in the uncertain ty budget;
h) for CI SPR Band E, a system consisting of an external preamplifier and a measuring
receiver shall be designed such that it cannot be overloaded by signals of lower frequency
bands, and/or by an y signal whose out-of-band or spurious signals are to be measured;
e. g. the I SM signal of a microwave oven shall not drive the system into overload.
The gain in sensitivity is determined using the following quantities and equations:
Pie
F= and, (J. 1 )
kT0 B
Po
for an am plifier, F = (J.2)
gkT0 B
where
F is the noise factor, with 1 0 lg F = noise figure (often denoted by the symbol NF);
Pie is the equivalent noise input power;
Po is the noise output power;
g is calculated from the gain, G = 1 0 lg g, respectively g = 1 0 G/1 0 ;
k is Boltzm ann’s constant = 1 , 38 × 1 0 –23 Ws/K and kT0 = 4 × 1 0 –21 W/Hz;
T0 is the absolute reference room temperature (293 K);
B is the noise bandwidth (e.g. of the measuring receiver).
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 83 –
Preamplifier Receiver
F1 , g1 F2
ac1 ac2
IEC
F2 − 1
1 0 lg Ftot = ac1 + 1 0 lg F1 + (J.3)
g1
where Ftot is the noise factor of the system at the input cable with a c1 .
I f a c2 ≠ 0 dB, then the preamplifier gain factor g1 in Equation (J .3) has to be replaced by
1 0 (G 1 – a c2 )/1 0 . Cable attenuation a c1 = 0 dB is achieved by m ounting and/or connecting the
preamplifier directly to the antenna. I f a c1 ≠ 0 dB, then the cable attenuation a c1 adds to the
system noise figure as shown by Equation (J . 3).
NOTE 2 The noise fi gure 1 0 l g F2 of a m easuri ng recei ver can be d eterm ined from the in dicated n oise level usin g
1 0 lg F2 = VN av + 67 – 1 0 lg B N – w N av
where
VN av is the recei ver noise floor with linear average d etection, in dB( µV);
BN is the noise ban d wi dth of th e measuring recei ver, in Hz;
w N av is the noise wei ghtin g factor for l inear averag e detection, in d B.
EXAMPLE I f VN av = –1 0, 7 dB( µ V), B N = 85 kHz (for B 6 = 1 20 kH z), an d w N av = − 1 dB, then the n oise fi gu re
1 0 lg F2 = 8 dB.
The quantity w Nav is the difference between the indications of the linear average detector and
the r. m.s. detector for Gaussian noise [21 ]; values for quasi-peak detection w Nq p are
approximatel y 4 dB for Band B, and 6 dB for Bands C/D; for peak detection w Npk is up to
1 2 dB, depending on measurem ent tim e.
The noise bandwidth B N is close to the 3 dB bandwidth B 3 of the m easuring receiver. A rough
approxim ation is given by B N = 1 ,1 B 3 . See [21 ] for details about specific filter
im plementations.
Considering a given pream plifier noise figure of 3 dB, it will be acceptable to achieve a
system noise figure 1 0 lg Ftot = 4 dB, corresponding to a noise factor of 2, 51 . This requires
that ( F2 – 1 )/ g1 = 0, 51 , or g1 = ( F2 –1 )/0, 51 .
• For receivers with a built-in pream plifier, the resulting gain is g1 = 1 0, 39, or G1 = 1 0,2 dB.
– 84 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
• For receivers without a built-in preamplifier, the resulting gain is g1 = 60, or G 1 = 1 7, 8 dB.
For a receiver without a built-in pream plifier, as described above, an external preamplifier with
a noise figure of 3 dB and a gain of 1 0 dB will give a system noise figure of 7 dB.
From the preceding exam ples, it can be seen that an im provement in sensitivity of 4 dB
requires a signal gain of around 1 0 dB for a receiver with a built-in preamplifier. For a receiver
without a built-in preamplifier, an improvement in sensitivity of 1 1 dB requires a signal gain of
alm ost 1 8 dB, and an improvement of 8 dB requires a signal gain of 1 0 dB. I t is evident that a
system noise figure of 3, 5 dB cannot easil y be achieved with a preamplifier noise figure of
3 dB, because an excessive preamplifier gain would be necessary. Refer to Table J.1 for
exam ple noise figures.
Because it will severel y lim it the system’s linearity perform ance, it is not advisable to use
pream plifiers with a gain of 30 dB or m ore.
Figure J. 3 shows that the sinusoidal signal is distorted in time dom ain, which is due to the
nonlinear effects of the pream plifier. The frequency dom ain display shows that the level is
decreased at 1 00 MH z, and that further harmonics exist. A corresponding sim ulation for a
broadband pulse is shown in Figure J. 4.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 85 –
1 000
800
600
1 000
1 000
1 20
1 20
Relative level (dB)
500
Quantized values
500
1 00
1 00
Relative Level in dB
Quantized Values
00 8080
-500
-500 6060
4040
-1 000
-1 000
2020
11 50
50 200
200 250
250
Sample n
300
3 00 350
3 50 400
400
1100
00 200
200 3 00
300 400
400 500
500 600
600 700
700
Frequency / MHz
Sample n Frequency (MHz)
IEC IEC
Green = n orm ali zed i nput sign al; red = output sign al
800800
Relative Level in dB
6060
600600
5050
400400
4040
200200
00 303 0
-200
-200
2020
4 4980
980 44985
985 44990
990 44995
995 55000
000 55005
005 5501
Sample n
0100 5501015 5 5020
5 020 5025
5 025 00 500
500 1 1000
000
11 500
Frequency 500
/ MHz 22000
000 22500
500
Sample n Frequency (MHz)
IEC IEC
Green = n orm ali zed i nput sign al; red = output sign al
Comparing Figures J. 3 and J . 4, it can be seen that the saturation level in the time domain is
exactl y the same. H owever in the frequency domain the effects of saturation of the external
preamplifier are different. For the impulsive signal, the amplitude level is decreased,
invalidating the measurem ent result. For sinusoidal signals, the am plitude of the fundamental
is decreased, while further harmonics are generated by the nonlinear effect of the external
preamplifier; the measurem ent result is also invalidated.
The perform ance of the system , i. e. system noise level and overload capability, will depend
on the characteristics of both the preamplifier and the measuring receiver. For narrowband
signals, generall y the 1 dB compression point of the preamplifier output exceeds the 1 dB
compression point of the measuring receiver input. Preselection of the m easuring receiver will
im prove system linearity for the m easurement of broadband impulsive signals. Therefore, two
types of systems are taken into consideration: system s with, and without, preselection at the
measuring receiver input.
A broadband overload detector, which is effective at the input of some measuring receivers
without preselection, is used to detect signal levels at the 1 dB com pression point of the first
mixer, to alert the user of linearity problems. The overload detector can also be used as an
indicator to assure valid measurem ent results. Sim ilar overload detection is recommended for
wideband FFT based m easuring systems to avoid over-range of the wideband A/D converter
(see J. 4).
Further precautions for m easurements include a prediction of the available overload factor for
the measurem ent of impulsive disturbances. Apart from gain versus frequency and noise
figure, the 1 dB com pression point of the pream plifier and the com plete system, consisting of
preamplifier and m easuring receiver, shall be specified. For CI SPR Ban ds C/D, the
relationship between the 1 dB com pression point for sine wave signals and the peak value of
the broadband CI SPR pulse signal with a bandwidth of 2 GH z gives a bandwidth factor Fbw of
85 dB [ Fbw = 20 lg(2 000/0, 1 2)]. Figures J. 5 and J. 6 show the deviations from linearity of a
preamplifier with a 1 dB compression point of 1 1 2 dB( µ V), for an unmodulated sine wave and
im pulsive signals.
-2,50
deviation
Deviation
-3,00
-3,50
-4,00
-4,50
-5,00
-5,50
1 00 1 02 1 04 1 06 1 08 110 112 114 116 118 1 20
Input
Inputlevel / dB (μ V)
Level/dB(uV)
IEC
Figure J.5 – Deviation from linear gain for an unmodulated sine wave (example)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 87 –
0
-0,5
-1
-1 ,5
-2
/ dB
Deviation/dB
-2,5 Deviation for pos. pulse
Deviation
-3 deviation for neg. pulse
-3,5
-4
-4,5
-5
-5,5
-6
1 0 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 8 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
Input
Input Level/dB(uV)
level / dB (μ V)
IEC
NOTE Using Fbw = 85 dB, the peak val ue of the positi ve pu lse sign al with a PRF of 1 00 Hz is at arou nd
37 dB( µ V) + 1 2 dB + 85 dB = 1 34 dB( µ V), i. e. arou nd 22 d B above the 1 dB com pressi on point of Fig ure J . 5.
1 2 dB is the q uasi peak weighti ng factor, i. e. the difference between peak and qu asi peak for a PRF of 1 00 H z.
Figu re J.6 – Devi ati on from l in ear g ain for a broadban d impu l sive sign al
as measured with the quasi-peak detector (example)
The flatness of the deviation curve for positive pulses in Figure J. 6 is misleading, because the
amplifier nonlinearity is masked by the amplifier’s own intermodulation products. This effect
can be dem onstrated using a band-stop filter with a notch depth of greater than 40 dB (band-
stop filter as specified in 4.6) at the input of the pream plifier. For an acceptable operation
(error contribution less than 1 dB by interm odulation), the notch depth shall rem ain at least
20 dB during the interm odulation test. The value of 20 dB is obtained with quasi-peak
measurements at a PRF of 1 00 H z; the PRF of 1 00 H z is a com promise.
I deall y the 20 dB notch depth would be needed for quasi-peak measurem ents at all PRFs.
This is shown in Figure J . 7 for the pream plifier used above with 1 0 dB gain, where the 20 dB
depth is retained as long as the peak level of the input signal is less than 37 dB( µ V), and the
peak level of the output signal is less than 46 dB( µ V) (blue curve). For a PRF of 1 00 H z, a
peak level of 37 dB( µ V) corresponds to a quasi-peak level of 25 dB( µ V). Thus while the 1 dB
compression point for the broadband impulsive signal in Figure J. 6 “positive pulse” looks like
being at 37 dB( µ V) quasi-peak, the preamplifier is alread y overloaded. The input signal
should be at least 1 2 dB lower, i. e. at 25 dB( µ V) quasi-peak, to avoid excessive
intermodulation.
I n Figure J. 6 the “positive pulse” also shows that a simple overload test with a switchable
1 0 dB attenuator at the pream plifier input may not properl y indicate the overload in case of
im pulsive signals, because the output level can still follow the input level, while the
preamplifier input signal is up to 20 dB above the 1 dB com pression point. The sim ple test
may work for sine wave signals. A better characterization of the system with respect to
im pulsive signals is obtained using the band-stop filter interm odulation test. I f the band-stop
filter intermodulation test is not available, the 1 dB compression point of the pream plifier,
referred to its input, should be used to characterize the system.
NOTE The ban d-stop filter in term odulati on test is inten ded to characteri ze the system , e. g. done by th e system
provi der. I t woul d be im practical to use a ban d-stop filter test in each EMC test lab du rin g an em ission test.
Note that during the band-stop filter intermodulation test, it shall be assured that the
measuring receiver used as an indicator at the output of the preamplifier is not overloaded.
Figure J. 8 shows that the notch depth result from a CI SPR interm odulation test of a
measuring receiver with preselection still exceeds 30 dB with an input signal (quasi peak) of
55 dB( µ V), which corresponds to an input level (quasi peak) of 45 dB( µ V) to a 1 0 dB
preamplifier. Using a m easuring receiver with built-in broadband pream plifer may not show
– 88 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
the linearity of the external pream plifier correctl y, due to overload of the m easuring receiver,
as shown in Figure J. 9 and J. 1 0, whereas with preselection the output will be linear.
RBW 120 kHz Marker 1 [T2 ]
MT 1 s 19. 16 dBµV
Att 5 dB PREAMP OFF 824. 300000000 MHz
dBµV 100 1 GHz
90
1 PK
VIEW 80
2 PK
VIEW 70
3 PK
CLRWR 60
50
6DB
40 DC
30
1
20
10
90
1 PK
VIEW 80
2 PK
CLRWR 70
60
50
6DB
40 DC
30
20
10
Figure J.8 – Band-stop filter test result with the measu ring receiver at 81 8 M Hz
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 89 –
IEC
Figu re J. 9 – Band-stop filter test resu lts for th e same 1 0 dB preampl ifi er bu t a d ifferen t
receiver with preselection (black) an d withou t preselection (blu e)
IEC
NOTE A 1 5 dB atten uator between extern al pream plifier an d recei ver was used to avoid overl oad of the recei ver
without preselecti on; however the recei ver’s noise l evel then h ides the n otch.
When an external broadband pream plifier is used with a measuring receiver, the user cannot
expect proper weighting of broadband impulsive signals by such a measuring system using
average, rms-average and quasi-peak detection at low pulse repetition frequencies.
Therefore, the user shall determine the operating range between noise level and the 1 dB
compression point for broadband im pulsive signals for the peak detector of the measurement
– 90 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
system . This determ ination allows a prediction of the lowest PRF for proper weighting of
broadband impulsive signals using each individual detector.
Figure J .1 1 shows the weighting functions of the detectors specified in CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 for
CI SPR Bands C/D, and an exam ple ‘N oise’ line to illustrate the operating range between
noise level and 1 dB com pression point. I n the example, the peak detector noise level is
1 5 dB below the 1 dB compression point. For the quasi-peak detector, the noise level is
approximatel y 5 dB lower, i. e. the operating range is approxim ately 5 dB wider. For the rms-
average and average detectors, the noise level is approximatel y 1 0 dB lower, which increases
the operating range to about 25 dB in the example.
To draw the noise line shown in Figure J .1 1 , the peak level Vp is used from the band-stop
filter test in Figure J. 7 and the average detector noise level VNav determ ined. The difference
Vp – VN av m arks the crossing of the “N oise” line with the “Average” line. For the 1 0 dB
pream plifier above, Vp = 37 dB( µ V), VN av = –1 4 dB( µ V) for a noise figure of 4 dB and Vp – VNav
= 51 dB. The noise line in Figure J. 1 1 is drawn from an exam ple where Vp – VN av = 27 dB.
-20
Noise
-30
Quasi-Peak
-40
-50
Average
RMS-AV
-60
fp /Hz
-70
1 10 1 00 1 000 1 0 000 1 00 000 1 000 000
IEC
Figure J.1 1 – Weighting functions of the variou s CISPR detectors with a noise cu rve to
illustrate the remaining operating ranges for broadband impu lsive signals (example)
From Figure J .1 1 , the critical PRF can be seen at which the impulsive signal level, with peak
level at the 1 dB com pression point, is equal to the noise level . H owever for an accurate
measurem ent, the signal level needs to be approximatel y 6 dB above the noise level (the
actual value depends on the PRF). As a consequence, in this example quasi-peak
measurem ents can be carried out above a PRF of about 60 H z. For the rms-average and
average detectors, the critical PRFs are near 1 kH z and 1 0 kH z, respectively. For practical
measurem ents, a linearity check is recom mended using the weighting factor at the critical
PRF. For this example, the linearity check is as follows:
a) For the quasi-peak m easurem ent: the critical PRF of 60 H z is exceeded if the difference
between peak and quasi-peak values is less than 1 5 dB.
b) For the rms-average and average m easurements: the critical PRFs of 1 kH z and 1 0 kH z
are exceeded if the difference between peak and rms-average or average detector results
are less than 20 dB.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 91 –
However, if the m easurements are made close to the noise level, the differences might be
reduced by the noise level, which will give the impression of PRFs higher than actual.
Detecting whether the pream plifier is in the linear range during the measurement can be
perform ed for sinusoidal as well as im pulsive signals, by taking the maximum of the
preamplifier output signal then comparing it with a given threshold level corresponding to the
1 dB compression point. The maxim um (positive) and m inim um (negative) voltage of the
signal in the time domain shall be sampled continuousl y during the measurem ent time, and
compared to that threshold level. The 1 dB compression point is defined for a sinusoidal
signal yielding an output 1 dB lower than expected, as shown in Figure J. 5.
During a m easurement, a m easuring apparatus that digitizes the signal of the output of the
external preamplifier can be used to detect whether an over-range has occurred. For the
preceding example, a threshold level of a normalized value in Figure J .2 ‘I nput’ of about 900
would be appropriate to avoid nonlinear effects. The threshold level should be identified by
the system manufacturer depending on the application. For example, the measurem ent of
harm onics of intentional radiators requires a better linearity (lower threshold) than the
measurem ent of im pulsive disturbance. A measuring apparatus that digitizes the input signal
shall fulfil the following requirements, to allow a correct decision:
a) continuous (gapless) acquisition during the m easurem ent tim e;
b) selectable threshold level;
c) broadband acquisition of the entire m easurem ent band, e. g. up to 1 GH z.
Typical instruments that fulfil such requirem ents include broadband FFT-based measurement
instrum ents with over-range detection, as described in CI SPR TR 1 6-3, and oscilloscopes in
single-shot trigger mode. Over-range detection is used to avoid exceeding the operating
range of the wideband A/D converter.
– 92 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
Annex K
(normative)
Calibration requirements for measuring receivers
K.1 General
When perform ing EMI measurem ents it is essential to use measuring equipm ent that meets
the specifications called out in this standard such that the expected measurem ent
instrum entation uncertainty for conducted and radiated disturbance measurem ents as well as
disturbance power m easurem ents can be achieved. I n addition, the results of these
measurem ents shall be traceable (see 3. 1 7) to national or internationall y accepted standards.
These requirem ents can be m et by selecting m easuring equipm ent that is correctly calibrated.
The calibration requirements described in this annex are onl y applicable to the test
instrum entation (i.e. EMI receivers and spectrum anal ysers) covered in this standard.
The EM C test laboratory is responsible for the selection and use of adequate measuring
equipment as well as the purchase of accredited (or otherwise deem ed appropriate)
calibration services. A clear understanding of the calibration requirements related to
measuring equipment is essential to determ ine the necessary specifics of calibration service
in the purchasing process and to review the obtained service upon receipt of the equipm ent
back from the calibration laboratory, before it is placed back into service at the test
laboratory.
The calibration process itself does not necessarily require the instrum ent under calibration to
be adj usted. However, adjustments m ay be required if the calibration process determ ines that
the instrument does not m eet the manufacturer’s specifications. The goal of the instrument
calibration process is the determ ination of com pliance of a m easuring receiver under
calibration with its published specifications in a traceable m anner (see 3. 1 7).
“Verification” should not be confused with “intermediate checks” (also called confidence
checks); the latter consists of a set of operations aimed at providing evidence of the proper
functioning of a test instrum ent. An intermediate check of a measuring receiver can differ
considerabl y from the calibration process because the purpose of these two activities is
entirely different.
Calibration of a m easuring receiver requires a specific process that defines the various
measurem ents to determine if the receiver meets its specifications. I n general, this calibration
process has also been used by the receiver m anufacturer to establish the receiver
specifications. Therefore, onl y the m anufacturer’s calibration process or verification process
in accordance with this standard shall be applied by a calibration laboratory or test laboratory
perform ing its own calibrations to determine whether the receiver meets its specifications at
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5 – 93 –
the tim e of calibration or the requirements called out in this standard. This requirement
applies to m easuring receivers onl y.
The calibration process for measuring receivers also defines the following essential
parameters that shall be used for proper calibration:
a) the specific set-up of the receiver under calibration for each m easurem ent in the
calibration process (e. g. in the case of an EM I receiver or spectrum analyzer the tuning
frequency, attenuator setting, resolution bandwidth setting, and other parameters, for each
m easurem ent to be perform ed);
b) the required test set-up for the m easurement of a specific param eter (e. g. the use of
power splitters for ratio m easurements and an y other required measuring equipment);
c) the required accuracy of measuring equipm ent used to perform the m easurem ents of the
calibration process (e. g. required am plitude accuracy and frequency accuracy);
d) the actual num ber of m easurements to be performed and their sequence. For man y types
of m easuring receiver this sequence is m andatory and cannot be changed because the
m easurem ents of some param eters require the measurem ents of previous calibration
param eters to be com pleted. I n addition, it is possible that the interpretation of a test
result for a calibration param eter is dependent on the test result of a previous
m easurem ent in the calibration sequence;
e) the required environm ental conditions (e. g. required ambient tem perature and relative
hum idity), if deem ed necessary by the m anufacturer.
Only if the manufacturer’s calibration process is used can the results of the calibration
measurem ents be compared to the published specifications. Consequentl y, the calibration
laboratory or the test laboratory performing its own calibrations (also called internal
calibrations) should use the m anufacturer’s calibration process for a specific measuring
receiver. I f an alternative process is used, it shall be verifiabl y validated and it shall be stated
in the calibration certificate that this process deviates from the calibration process defined by
the manufacturer.
This standard specifies measuring receiver requirem ents using a “black box” approach. This
means that the instrum ent shall show a specific response when a defined signal is applied to
its input. Therefore, the dem onstration of compliance of m easuring receivers with
specifications defined in this standard can be provided through the manufacturer’s calibration
process or the procedures and m easuring equipment defined in this standard.
I n case compliance of a measuring receiver is determ ined with the specifications in this
standard, the following minim um set of parameters shown in Table K.1 shall be included in the
verification process.
– 94 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 RLV © I EC 201 5
The param eters summarized in Table K. 1 are onl y applicable to the frequency ranges covered
by the instrument under verification and its im plem ented detector functions. Specifics
described in the referenced subclauses appl y in their entirety as well as the stated tolerances.
I t is to be noted that the requirem ents called out in this standard constitute a subset of all the
specifications the receiver m anufacturer publishes. I n addition, som e requirements in this
standard may be stated in a way that differs from the m anufacturer’s specifications (e. g. CW
frequency accuracy in this standard versus a combination of absolute amplitude accuracy at a
reference frequency and frequency response).
I f evidence of compliance with the requirements presented in this standard cannot be d irectl y
provided through the m anufacturer’s calibration process, due to differences in the form of the
stated specifications, the verification of these requirem ents shall be requested by the test
laboratory in addition to the actual receiver calibration based on the m anufacturer’s calibration
process.
specifications. The application of measurem ent uncertainty to a measurem ent result can lead
to one of the four cases described as follows and depicted in Figure K. 1 :
a) the m easurem ent result is within the specified limit range by a margin larger than the
expanded uncertainty value applicable to the calibration m easurement;
b) the measurem ent result is within the specified lim it range by a margin less than the
expanded uncertainty value applicable to the calibration m easurement;
c) the m easurem ent result is outside of the specified lim it range by a margin less than the
expanded uncertainty value applicable to the calibration m easurement; or
d) the m easurem ent result is outside of the specified lim it range by a margin larger than the
expanded uncertainty value applicable to the calibration measurem ent, and the
specification is not met.
Upper lim it
Measurem ent
result
Expand ed
uncertainty rang e
Lower lim it
a) specification is met;
Bibliograph y
[2] CI SPR 1 6-1 -2: 201 4, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 1 -2: Radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus – Ancillary equipment Coupling devices for conducted disturbances
measurements
[3] CI SPR 1 6-1 -3: 2004, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 1 -3: Radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus – Ancillary equipment – Disturbance power
[4] CI SPR 1 6-1 -4: 2007 201 0, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 1 -4: Radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus – Ancillary equipment Antennas and test sites for radiated disturbance
measurements
[5] CI SPR 1 6-1 -5: 2003 201 4, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 1 -5: Radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus – Antenna calibration sites and reference test sites for 30 MHz to 1 000 MHz
5 MHz to 1 8 GHz
[6] CI SPR 1 6-2 (all parts), Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods
[7] CI SPR 1 6-2-4: 2003, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 2-4: Methods of measurement of disturbances and
immunity – Immunity measurements
[8] CI SPR 1 6-4 (all parts), Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods
[9] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-1 : 2009, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-1 : Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Uncertainties in standardized EMC tests (on l y avai labl e i n Engl ish)
[1 0] CI SPR 1 6-4-2: 2003 201 1 , Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-2: Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Uncertainty in EMC measurements Measurement instrumentation uncertainty
[1 1 ] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-3: 2004, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-3: Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Statistical considerations in the determination of EMC compliance of mass-produced
products (on l y avai labl e i n Engl ish)
[1 2] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-4: 2007, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-4: Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Statistics of complaints and a model for the calculation of limits for the protection of
radio services (on l y avai l abl e i n En glish)
[1 4] CI SPR 25, Vehicles, boats and internal combustion engines – Radio disturbance
characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement for the protection of on-board
receivers
[21 ] SABAROFF, S., Impulse excitation of a cascade of series tuned circuits, Proceedings of
the I RE, Decem ber 1 944, vol. 32, p. 758-760 (onl y available in English)
____________
CISPR 1 6-1 -1
®
Edition 4.0 201 5-09
INTERNATIONAL
STANDARD
NORME
INTERNATIONALE colour
i n sid e
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 7
I NTRODUCTI ON .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 9
1 Scope . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 0
2 Norm ative references ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 0
3 Term s and definitions ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 1
4 Quasi-peak m easuring receivers for the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 000 MH z . ... ... ... ... .. 1 5
4. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 1 5
4. 2 I nput impedance .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 5
4. 3 Sine-wave voltage accuracy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 1 5
4. 4 Response to pulses .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 1 6
4. 4. 1 Amplitude relationship (absolute calibration) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 6
4. 4. 2 Variation with repetition frequency (relative calibration) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 6
4. 5 Selectivity . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 20
4. 5. 1 Overall selectivity (passband) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 20
4. 5. 2 I nterm ediate frequency rejection ratio ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... .. 21
4. 5. 3 I m age frequency rej ection ratio .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 21
4. 5. 4 Other spurious responses ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 23
4. 6 Lim itation of interm odulation effects .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 23
4. 7 Lim itation of receiver noise and internall y generated spurious signals ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 24
4. 7. 1 Random noise . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 24
4. 7. 2 Continuous wave ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 25
4. 8 Screening effectiveness .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 25
4. 8. 1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 25
4. 8. 2 Lim itation of radio-frequency emissions from the m easuring receiver ... ... .. ... .. 25
4. 9 Facilities for connection to a discontinuous disturbance anal yzer .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 26
5 Measuring receivers with peak detector for the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 8 GH z ... ... ... 26
5. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 26
5. 2 I nput impedance .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 26
5. 3 Fundamental characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 26
5. 3. 1 Bandwidth .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 26
5. 3. 2 Charge and discharge tim e constants ratio .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . 27
5. 3. 3 Overload factor ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 27
5. 4 Sine-wave voltage accuracy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 27
5. 5 Response to pulses .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 27
5. 6 Selectivity . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 28
5. 7 I ntermodulation effects, receiver noise, and screening .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . . 29
6 Measuring receivers with average detector for the frequency range 9 kH z to
1 8 GH z .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 29
6. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 29
6. 2 I nput impedance .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30
6. 3 Fundamental characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 30
6. 3. 1 Bandwidth .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 30
6. 3. 2 Overload factor ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 30
6. 4 Sine-wave voltage accuracy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 30
6. 5 Response to pulses .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 30
6. 5. 1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 30
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 –3–
6. 5. 2 Amplitude relationship .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 31
6. 5. 3 Variation with repetition frequency ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 32
6. 5. 4 Response to intermittent, unstead y and drifting narrowband
disturbances .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. 32
6. 6 Selectivity . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 33
6. 7 I ntermodulation effects, receiver noise, and screening .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . . 34
7 Measuring receivers with rms-average detector for the frequency range 9 kH z to
1 8 GH z .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 34
7. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 34
7. 2 I nput impedance .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 34
7. 3 Fundamental characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 35
7. 3. 1 Bandwidth .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 35
7. 3. 2 Overload factor ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 35
7. 4 Sine-wave voltage accuracy ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 35
7. 5 Response to pulses .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 36
7. 5. 1 Construction details . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 36
7. 5. 2 Amplitude relationship .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 36
7. 5. 3 Variation with repetition frequency ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 36
7. 5. 4 Response to intermittent, unstead y and drifting narrowband
disturbances .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. 37
7. 6 Selectivity . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 37
7. 7 I ntermodulation effects, receiver noise, and screening .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . . 38
8 Measuring receivers for the frequency range 1 GH z to 1 8 GH z with amplitude
probability distribution (APD) measuring function ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 38
9 Disturbance anal yzers .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 39
9. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 39
9. 2 Fundamental characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 39
9. 3 Test m ethod for the validation of the performance check for the click
anal yzer ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... . 46
9. 3. 1 Basic requirements .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 46
9. 3. 2 Additional requirements ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 47
Annex A (normative) Determination of response to repeated pulses of quasi-peak and
rm s-average measuring receivers (See 3. 6, 4. 4.2, 7. 3. 2 and 7. 5. 1 ) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 48
A. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 48
A. 2 Response of the pre-detector stages ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 48
A. 3 Response of the quasi-peak voltm eter detector to output of preceding stages. ... ... 49
A. 3.1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 49
A. 3.2 Response of the indicating instrument to the signal from the detector . ... ... ... .. 50
A. 4 Response of rm s detector to output voltage of preceding stages ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 51
A. 4.1 Output voltage and am plitude relationship ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. 51
A. 4.2 Calculation of overload factor . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 52
A. 5 Relationship between indication of rm s m eter and quasi-peak m eter .. ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 52
Annex B (norm ative) Determination of pulse generator spectrum (See 4. 4, 5. 5, 6. 5,
7. 5) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 54
B. 1 Pulse generator ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 54
B. 1 .1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 54
B. 1 .2 The spectrum of the generated pulses .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... .. 54
B. 2 General m ethod of measurem ent ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 54
Annex C (normative) Accurate m easurements of the output of nanosecond pulse
generators (See 4. 4, 5. 5, 6.5, 7. 5) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 56
–4– CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
C. 1 Measurement of im pulse area ( A im p ) .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 56
C. 1 . 1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 56
C. 1 . 2 Area m ethod .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. 56
C. 1 . 3 Standard transm ission line m ethod . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... . 56
C. 1 . 4 Harm onic measurement ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 57
C. 1 . 5 Energy method ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 57
C. 2 Pulse generator spectrum . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 57
Annex D (normative) I nfluence of the quasi-peak measuring receiver characteristics
on its pulse response (See 4. 4. 2)... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 58
Annex E (normative) Response of average and peak measuring receivers (See 6. 3. 1 ) . ... ... . 59
E. 1 Response of pre-detector stages ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 59
E. 2 Overload factor . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 59
E. 3 Relationship between indication of an average and a quasi-peak measuring
receiver ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 60
E. 4 Peak m easuring receivers . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 61
E. 5 Relationship between indication of a peak and a quasi-peak m easuring
receiver .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 61
E. 6 Test of m easuring receiver response above 1 GH z to pulses ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 62
E. 7 Measurement of the impulse bandwidth of a m easuring receiver ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 63
E. 7.1 General . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . 63
E. 7.2 Method 1 : M easurement by comparison of the responses of B im p to two
pulses with identical am plitude and width but with low and high pulse
repetition frequencies (prf) .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 64
E. 7.3 Method 2: M easurement by comparison of the response of B imp to an
impulsive signal with the response of a narrow bandwidth to the same
signal .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... . 66
E. 7.4 Method 3: I ntegration of the normalized linear selectivity function .. ... ... ... ... ... . 66
Annex F (normative) Perform ance check of the exceptions from the definitions of a
click according to 4. 2. 3 of CI SPR 1 4-1 : 2005 . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 68
Annex G (informative) Rationale for the specifications of the APD m easuring function .. ... ... . 75
Annex H (inform ative) Characteristics of a quasi-peak measuring receiver.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 78
Annex I (informative) Exam ple of EMI receiver and swept spectrum anal yzer
architecture.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 79
Annex J (normative) Requirem ents when using an external preamplifier with a
measuring receiver ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. 81
J.1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 81
J.2 Considerations for optimum em ission m easurem ent system design ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 81
J.3 Linearity specifications and precautions in m easurement ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 84
J.4 Detecting the overload of an external pream plifier in a wideband FFT based
m easuring system ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. 91
Annex K (normative) Calibration requirem ents for measuring receivers .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 92
K. 1 General . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... . 92
K. 2 Calibration and verification... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 92
K. 3 Calibration and verification specifics ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... . 92
K. 4 Measuring receiver specifics ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 93
K. 5 Partial calibration of measuring receivers . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 94
K. 6 Determination of compliance of a m easuring receiver with applicable
specifications .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 94
Bibliograph y . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 96
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 –5–
Figure 1 – Pulse response curve (Band A) ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 7
Figure 2 – Pulse response curve (Band B) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 1 8
Figure 3 – Pulse response curve (Bands C and D) . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. 1 8
Figure 4 – Theoretical pulse response curve of quasi-peak detector receivers and
average detector receiver (see 6. 5. 4) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 9
Figure 5 – Lim its of overall selectivity – Pass band (see 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7. 6) (Band A) . ... ... ... 22
Figure 6 – Lim its of overall selectivity – Pass band (see 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7. 6) (Band B) .. ... ... . 22
Figure 7 – Lim its of overall selectivity – Pass band (see 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7. 6) Bands (C
and D) .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 23
Figure 8 – Arrangement for testing intermodulation effects ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 24
Figure 9 – Lim its for the overall selectivity – Pass band (Band E) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 29
Figure 1 0 – Block diagram of an average detector ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . ... ... ... ... 32
Figure 1 1 – Screenshot showing response of the meter-simulating network to an
intermittent narrowband signal .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 33
Figure 1 2 – Exam ple of a disturbance anal yzer ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. 41
Figure 1 3 – A graphical presentation of test signals used in the test of the anal yzer for
the performance check against the definition of a click according to Table 1 4 ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 42
Figure E. 1 – Correction factor for estimating the ratio B im p /B 6 for other tuned circuits . ... ... ... 60
Figure E. 2 – Pulse rectification coefficient P . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 62
Figure E. 3 – Exam ple (spectrum screenshot) of a pulse-m odulated signal with a pulse
width of 200 ns .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 63
Figure E. 4 – Pulse-modulated RF signal applied to a m easuring receiver .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 64
Figure E. 5 – Filtering with a B im p much sm aller than the prf ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 65
Figure E. 6 – Filtering with a B im p m uch wider than the prf . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... . 65
Figure E. 7 – Calculation of the im pulse bandwidth ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 66
Figure E. 8 – Exam ple of a normalized linear selectivity function ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 67
Figure F. 1 – A graphical presentation of the test signals used for the perform ance
check of the anal yzer with the additional requirements according to Table F.1 ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. 74
Figure G. 1 – Block diagram of APD measurem ent circuit without A/D converter ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 76
Figure G. 2 – Block diagram of APD measurem ent circuit with A/D converter ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 76
Figure G. 3 – Example of display of APD measurem ent . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 77
Figure I .1 – Example block diagram of EMI receiver consisting of swept spectrum
analyzer with added preselector, pream plifier and quasi-peak/average detector .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 79
Figure J. 1 – Receiver with preamplifier .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 83
Figure J. 2 – Transfer function of an am plifier ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. 85
Figure J. 3 – Response for a sinusoidal signal .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... . 85
Figure J. 4 – Response for an impulse . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 85
Figure J. 5 – Deviation from linear gain for an unmodulated sine wave (example) . ... ... ... ... ... .. 86
Figure J. 6 – Deviation from linear gain for a broadband im pulsive signal as m easured
with the quasi-peak detector (exam ple) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 87
Figure J. 7 – Screenshot of a band-stop filter test for a preamplifier at around 81 8 M H z . ... ... . 88
Figure J. 8 – Band-stop filter test result with the measuring receiver at 81 8 MH z .. ... ... ... .. ... ... 88
Figure J. 9 – Band-stop filter test results for the same 1 0 dB pream plifier but a different
receiver with preselection (black) and without preselection (blue) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 89
Figure J. 1 0 – Band-stop filter test results for the same 1 0 dB pream plifier but with the
receiver of Figure J. 9 with preselection (black) and without preselection (green) . ... ... ... ... ... .. 89
–6– CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Figure J. 1 1 – Weighting functions of the various CI SPR detectors with a noise curve to
illustrate the rem aining operating ranges for broadband impulsive signals (example) ... ... ... ... 90
Figure K. 1 – Com pliance determination process wi th application of m easurement
uncertainty . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 95
Table 1 – Test pulse characteristics for quasi-peak measuring receivers .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. 1 6
Table 2 – Pulse response of quasi-peak measuring receivers . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 20
Table 3 – Combined selectivity of CI SPR measuring receiver and high-pass filter .. ... ... ... ... ... 21
Table 4 – Bandwidth characteristics for intermodulation test of quasi-peak measuring
receivers . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 24
Table 5 – VSWR requirem ents for receiver input im pedance . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... . 26
Table 6 – Bandwidth requirements for m easuring receivers with peak detector . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 27
Table 7 – Relative pulse response of peak and quasi-peak m easuring receivers for the
same bandwidth (frequency range 9 kH z to 1 000 MH z) ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... 28
Table 8 – Bandwidth requirements for m easuring receivers with average detector . ... ... ... ... ... 30
Table 9 – Relative pulse response of average and quasi peak m easuring receivers for
the same bandwidth .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... .. 31
Table 1 0 – Maximum reading of average measuring receivers for a pulse-modulated
sine-wave input in comparison with the response to a continuous sine wave having the
sam e amplitude ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... . 33
Table 1 1 – VSWR requirem ents of input impedance. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 34
Table 1 2 – Bandwidth requirem ents for measuring receivers with rm s-average detector ... ... . 35
Table 1 3 – Minim um pulse repetition rate without overload ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . 35
Table 1 4 – Relative pulse response of rms-average and quasi-peak measuring
receivers . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 36
Table 1 5 – Pulse response of rms-average measuring receiver .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 37
Table 1 6 – Maximum reading of rm s-average m easuring receivers for a pulse-
modulated sine-wave input in comparison with the response to a continuous sine wave
having the same amplitude .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 37
Table 1 7 – Disturbance anal yzer perform ance test – Test signals used for the check
against the definition of a click .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . 43
Table B. 1 – Pulse generator characteristics .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 54
Table E. 1 – B im p and A imp values for a peak m easuring receiver ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 61
Table E. 2 – Carrier level for pulse-modulated signal of 1 , 4 nVs . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 63
Table F. 1 – Disturbance anal yzer test signals ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . 69
Table H .1 – Characteristics of quasi-peak m easuring receivers ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 78
Table J. 1 – Examples of pream plifier and m easuring receiver data and resulting
system noise figures . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. 84
Table K. 1 – Verification param eter sum mary . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 94
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 –7–
___________
I nternational Standard CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 has been prepared by CI SPR subcommittee A: Radio-
interference m easurem ents and statistical m ethods.
This fourth edition cancels and replaces the third edition published in 201 0, Am endm ent
1 : 201 0 and Am endm ent 2: 201 4. This edition constitutes a technical revision.
The main technical change with respect to the previous edition consists of the addition of a
new normative annex on calibration requirem ents for measuring receivers.
I t has the status of a basic EMC publication in accordance with I EC G uide 1 07,
Electromagnetic compatibility – Guide to the drafting of electromagnetic compatibility
publications .
–8– CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Full inform ation on the voting for the approval of this standard can be found in the report on
voting indicated in the above table.
This publication has been drafted in accordance with the I SO/I EC Directives, Part 2.
A list of all parts of the CI SPR 1 6 series can be found, under the general title Specification for
radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus and methods , on the I EC website.
The committee has decided that the contents of this publication will remain unchanged until
the stability date indicated on the I EC website under "http: //webstore. iec. ch" in the data
related to the specific publication. At this date, the publication will be
• reconfirm ed,
• withdrawn,
• replaced by a revised edition, or
• amended.
IM PORTANT – The 'colour in si de' logo on th e cover page of thi s publication in dicates
that it contain s colours which are con sidered to be usefu l for th e correct
understanding of its conten ts. Users shou ld therefore print thi s docu ment u si ng a
col ou r printer.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 –9–
I NTRODUCTI ON
The CI SPR 1 6 series, published under the general title Specification for radio disturbance and
immunity measuring apparatus and methods, is comprised of the following sets of standards
and reports:
• CI SPR 1 6-1 – six parts covering m easurement instrumentation specifications;
• CI SPR 1 6-2 – five parts covering methods of measurement;
• CI SPR 1 6-3 – a single publication containing various technical reports (TRs) with
further information and background on CI SPR and radio disturbances in general;
• CI SPR 1 6-4 – five parts covering uncertainties, statistics and lim it m odelling.
CI SPR 1 6-1 consists of the following parts, under the general title Specification for radio
disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus and methods – Radio disturbance and
immunity measuring apparatus:
– Part 1 -1 : Measuring apparatus
– Part 1 -2: Ancillary equipm ent – Conducted disturbances
– Part 1 -3: Ancillary equipment – Disturbance power
– Part 1 -4: Ancillary equipm ent – Radiated disturbances
– Part 1 -5: Antenna calibration sites and reference test sites for 5 MH z to 1 8 GH z
– Part 1 -6: EMC-antenna calibration
The I nternational Electrotechnical Commission (I EC) draws attention to the fact that it is
claim ed that compliance with this document m ay involve the use of a patent concerning the
measuring receiver with rms-average detector (patent no DE 1 01 26830) given in Clause 7.
I EC takes no position concerning the evidence, validity and scope of this patent right.
The holder of this patent right has assured the I EC that he/she is willing to negotiate licences
either free of charge or under reasonable and non-discriminatory term s and conditions with
applicants throughout the world. I n this respect, the statem ent of the holder of this patent
right is registered with I EC. I nformation may be obtained from:
Rohde & Schwarz Gm bH & Co. KG
Muehldorfstrasse 1 5
81 671 Muenchen
German y
Attention is drawn to the possibility that som e of the elem ents of this docum ent may be the
subj ect of patent rights other than those identified above. I EC shall not be held responsible for
identifying an y or all such patent rights.
I SO (www. iso. org/patents) and I EC (http: //patents. iec. ch) maintain on-line data bases of
patents relevant to their standards. Users are encouraged to consult the data bases for the
m ost up to date information concerning patents.
– 10 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
1 Scope
This part of CI SPR 1 6 specifies the characteristics and performance of equipment for the
measurem ent of radio disturbance in the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 8 GH z. I n addition,
requirem ents are provided for specialized equipment for discontinuous disturbance
measurem ents.
NOTE I n accord ance with I EC Guid e 1 07, CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 is a basic EMC stand ard for use by prod uct comm ittees
of the I EC. As stated in Guid e 1 07, prod uct comm ittees are responsible for determ inin g the applicability of the
EMC stand ard. CI SPR and i ts sub-com m ittees are prepared to co-operate with prod uct comm ittees in th e
evaluati on of the valu e of parti cular EMC tests for specific products.
The specifications in this standard appl y to EMI receivers and spectrum anal yzers. The term
“m easuring receiver” used in this standard refers to both EMI receivers and spectrum
anal yzers. The calibration requirem ents for measuring receivers are detailed in Annex J .
Further guidance on the use of use of spectrum anal yzers and scanning receivers can be
found in Annex B of any one of the following standards: CI SPR 1 6-2-1 : 201 4, CI SPR 1 6-2-
2: 201 0 or CI SPR 1 6-2-3: 201 0.
2 Normative references
The following documents, in whole or in part, are normatively referenced in this document and
are indispensable for its application. For dated references, onl y the edition cited applies. For
undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including an y
amendm ents) applies.
CI SPR 1 6-2-2: 201 0, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus
and methods – Part 2-2: Methods of measurement of disturbances and immunity –
Measurement of disturbance power
CI SPR TR 1 6-3:201 0, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus
and methods – Part 3: CISPR technical reports
CI SPR TR 1 6-3:201 0/AMD1 : 201 2
CI SPR TR 1 6-3:201 0/AMD2: 201 5
3.1
bandwidth
Bn
width of the overall selectivity curve of the receiver between two points at a stated
attenuation, below the midband response
Note 1 to entry: n is the stated atten uation in dB.
3.2
CISPR indication range
range specified by the m anufacturer which gives the m axim um and the m inimum meter
indications within which the measuring receiver meets the requirem ents of this part of
CI SPR 1 6
3.3
electrical charge time constant
TC
time needed after the instantaneous application of a constant sine-wave voltage to the stage
immediatel y preceding the input of the detector for the output voltage of the detector to reach
63 % of its final value
Note 1 to entry: This tim e constant is determ ined as follows: a sine-wave sig nal of constant am plitude and h avi ng
a frequ ency equal to the m id-ban d freq uency of the I F am plifier is appli ed to the in put of the stage im m ediatel y
precedin g the detector. The i n dication, D , of an i nstrum ent h avi ng n o in erti a (e. g. an oscill oscope) conn ected to a
term inal i n th e d. c. am plifier ci rcuit so as not to affect the beh aviou r of th e detector, is noted.
The l evel of the si gnal is ch osen such th at th e response of th e stages concerned rem ains within th e li near
operati ng ran ge. A sin e-wave signal of this level, applied for a l im ited tim e only and h avi ng a wave trai n of
rectan gul ar en vel ope is gated such that th e defl ection registered is 0, 63 D . The du ration of this signal is eq ual to
the charge tim e of the d etector.
3.4
electrical discharge time constant
TD
time needed after the instantaneous removal of a constant sine-wave voltage applied to the
stage immediately preceding the input of the detector for the output of the detector to fall to
37 % of its initial value
Note 1 to entry: The m ethod of m easurem ent is an alogous to that for the charg e tim e con stant, but instead of a
signal bein g appl ied for a lim ited tim e, the signal is interrupted for a defi nite tim e. The tim e taken for the defl ection
to fall to 0, 37 D is the discharg e tim e constant of the detector.
– 12 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
3. 5
impu lse area
A im p
voltage-tim e area of a pulse defined by the integral:
+∞
A im p = ∫ V( t ) dt (1 )
−∞
Note 1 to entry: I m pulse area, som etim es referred to as im pulse strength, is typically expressed in µ Vs
or dB( µ Vs).
Note 2 to entry: Spectral density ( D ) is related to im pul se area and expressed in µ V/M Hz or dB( µV/MHz). For
rectan gul ar im pulses of pulse duration T at frequ encies f < < 1 / T, the relati onshi p D ( µ V/M H z) = 2 × 1 0 6 A i mp ( µ Vs)
appl ies.
3. 6
impu lse bandwidth
B im p
A( t ) max
Bimp = (2)
2G0 × Aimp
where
A ( t) m ax is the peak of the envelope at the I F output of the receiver with an im pulse area
A im p applied at the receiver input;
3. 7
measuring receiver
instrum ent such as a tunable voltmeter, an EMI receiver, a spectrum anal yzer or a FFT-based
measuring instrum ent, with or without preselection, that m eets the relevant parts of this
standard
Note 1 to entry: See Ann ex I for fu rther inform ation.
3. 8
mech ani cal ti me con stant of a criti cal ly damped in dicatin g instrum ent
TM
TL
TM = (4)
2π
where TL is the period of free oscillation of the instrument with all dam ping rem oved.
Note 1 to entry: For a criticall y dam ped i nstrum ent, the equation of m otion of th e system may be written as:
d 2α dα
TM2 2
+ 2TM +α = ki (5)
dt
dt
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 13 –
where
α is the deflecti on;
i is the current th rough th e instrum ent; and
k is a constant.
I t can be deduced from this relation that this tim e constant i s al so equal to th e d uration of a rectan gular pulse (of
constant am plitu de) th at prod uces a defl ection eq ual to 35 % of the stead y defl ection produced by a conti nu ous
current h avi ng th e sam e am plitude as that of the rectan gul ar pulse.
Note 2 to entry: The m ethods of m easurem ent and adj ustm ent are deduced from one of th e followi ng:
a) the period of free oscill ation havin g been adjusted to 2 π TM , dam ping is added so that α T = 0, 35 α max .
b) when the period of oscillation cannot be m easured, th e d am ping is adj usted to be just bel ow critical such that
the overswin g is not g reater th an 5 % an d the m om ent of inertia of the m ovem ent is such th at α T = 0, 35 α ma x .
3. 9
overload factor
ratio of the level that corresponds to the range of practical linear function of a circuit (or a
group of circuits) to the level that corresponds to full-scale deflection of the indicating
instrum ent
Note 1 to entry: Th e m axim um level at wh ich th e stead y-state response of a circuit (or group of circuits) d oes n ot
depart by m ore than 1 dB from ideal li nearity defi nes the ran g e of practical linear fu nction of the circuit (or g roup of
circuits).
3. 1 0
symm etri c voltag e
radio-frequency disturbance voltage appearing between the two wires in a two-wire circuit,
such as a single-phase mains suppl y. This is sometim es called the differential mode voltage.
I f Va is the vector voltage between one of the m ains terminals and earth and Vb is the vector
voltage between the other mains term inal and earth, the symm etric voltage is the vector
difference ( Va -Vb )
3. 1 1
weigh ti n g (of e. g. impulsive disturbance)
pulse-repetition-frequency (PRF) dependent conversion (m ostl y reduction) of a peak-detected
im pulse voltage level to an indication that corresponds to the interference effect on rad io
reception
Note 1 to entry: For the analogu e recei ver, the psychoph ysical annoyance of the i nterference is a su bjecti ve
quantity (au dibl e or visu al, usu ally not a certain num ber of m isunderstan dings of a spoken text).
Note 2 to entry: For the digital receiver, the i nterference effect is an objecti ve quantity that m ay be defin ed by th e
critical bit error ratio (BER) or bit error probability (BEP) for which perfect error correction can still occur or by
anoth er, objecti ve and reprodu cible param eter.
3. 1 1 . 1
weigh ted di stu rban ce measu remen t
measurem ent of disturbance using a weighting detector
3. 1 1 . 2
weigh ti n g ch aracteri sti c
peak voltage level as a function of PRF for a constant effect on a specific radiocomm unication
system , i. e. the disturbance is weighted by the radiocommunication system itself
3. 1 1 . 3
weigh ti n g detector
detector which provides an agreed weighting function
– 14 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
3. 1 1 . 4
weigh ti n g factor
value of the weighting function relative to a reference PRF or relative to the peak value
3. 1 1 . 5
weigh ti n g fu n cti on
weigh ti n g cu rve
relationship between input peak voltage level and PRF for constant level indication of a
measuring receiver with a weighting detector, i. e. the curve of response of a measuring
receiver to repeated pulses
3. 1 2
measu rem en t tim e
Tm
effective, coherent tim e for a m easurem ent result at a single frequency (in som e areas also
called dwell time)
– for the peak detector, the effective time to detect the m axim um of the signal envelope
– for the quasi-peak detector, the effective time to measure the m axim um of the weighted
envelope
– for the average detector, the effective tim e to average the signal envelope
– for the rm s detector, the effective tim e to determine the rms of the signal envelope
3. 1 3
cali bration
operation that, under specified conditions, in a first step, establishes a relation between the
quantity values with m easurement uncertainties provided by m easurement standards and
corresponding indications with associated measurem ent uncertainties and, in a second step,
uses this inform ation to establish a relation for obtaining a m easurement result from an
indication
Note 1 to entry: A calibrati on m ay be expressed by a statem ent, calibration function, cal ibration diagram ,
calibration cu rve, or calibrati on table. I n som e cases, it m ay consist of an additi ve or m ultiplicative correction of the
indicati on with associated m easurem ent uncertai nty.
Note 2 to entry: Cal ibration should not be confused with adjustm ent of a m easuring system , often m istakenly
called “self-cal i bration”, n or with verification of cali bration.
Note 3 to entry: Often, the fi rst step alone i n the above defi nition is percei ved as being cal ibrati on.
3. 1 4
verifi cati on
provision of obj ective evidence that a given item fulfils specified requirements
EXAMPLE Checkin g whether the fu nctions of a m easuri ng i nstrum ent or au xili ary eq uipm ent, such as a com m on
m ode absorption device (CMAD), m eets stated specifications, such as those gi ven i n a d ata sheet.
[SOU RCE: I SO/I EC Guide 99: 2007, 2. 44, m odified – addition of an example] [1 7]
3. 1 5
adj u stm en t (of a m easu ri n g system )
set of operations carried out on a m easuring system so that it provides prescribed indications
corresponding to given values of a quantity to be m easured
______________
1 Figu res in brackets refer to Bibliog raph y.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 15 –
Note 1 to entry: Types of ad justm ent of a m easu rin g system include zero adjustm ent of a m easuri ng system ,
offset adjustm ent, and span ad justm ent (som etim es called gai n adj ustm ent).
Note 2 to entry: Adjustm ent of a m easurin g system should n ot be confused with calibration, which is a
prerequisite for adjustm ent.
Note 3 to entry: After an adj u stm ent of a m easurin g system , the m easurin g system shall usuall y be recal ibrated.
3.1 6
correction
compensation for an estim ated systematic effect
Note 1 to entry: See Gui de I SO/CEI 98-3: 2008, 3. 2. 3 [1 6] for an expl anati on of ‘system atic effect’.
Note 2 to entry: The com pen sation can take different forms, such as an addend or a factor, or can be ded uced
from a table.
3.1 7
(metrological) traceability
property of a measurement result whereby the result can be related to a reference through a
docum ented unbroken chain of calibrations, each contributing to the m easurem ent uncertainty
4 Quasi-peak measuring receivers for the frequency range 9 kHz to 1 000 MHz
4.1 General
The receiver specification depends on the frequency of operation. There is one receiver
specification covering the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 50 kH z (Band A), one covering 1 50 kH z
to 30 MH z (Band B), one covering 30 MH z to 300 MH z (Band C), and one covering 300 MH z
to 1 000 M H z (Band D). Fundamental characteristics of a quasi-peak measuring instrument
are provided in Annex H.
Spectrum anal yzers and FFT-based m easuring instruments that meet the requirements of this
clause can be used for com pliance measurem ents. For emission m easurem ents, FFT-based
measuring instruments shall sample and evaluate the signal continuously during the
measurement tim e.
Sym metric input im pedance in the frequency range 9 kH z to 30 MH z: to permit sym m etrical
measurem ents a balanced input transformer is used. The preferred input impedance for the
frequency range 9 kH z to 1 50 kH z is 600 Ω . This symm etric input im pedance may be
incorporated either in the relevant symm etrical artificial network necessary to couple to the
receiver or optionally in the m easuring receiver.
4. 4 Response to pulses
4. 4.1 Amplitu de rel ationsh ip (absolute calibration)
Referring to Table 1 , the response of the measuring receiver to pulses of impulse area of
a) µ Vs (m icrovolt second) e. m.f. at 50 Ω source impedance, having a uniform spectrum up to
at least b) MH z, repeated at a frequency of c) H z shall, for all frequencies of tuning, be equal
to the response to an unmodulated sine-wave signal at the tuned frequency having an e. m. f.
of rms value 2 m V [66 dB( µ V)].
When external pream plifiers are used, refer to Annex J for applicable requirements.
The source im pedances of the pulse generator and the signal generator shall both be the
sam e. A tolerance of ± 1 , 5 dB shall be perm itted on the sine-wave voltage level.
Frequ en cy range a) µ Vs b) M Hz c) Hz
9 kHz to 1 50 kH z 1 3, 5 0, 1 5 25
0, 1 5 MH z to 30 MH z 0, 31 6 30 1 00
30 MH z to 300 MH z 0, 044 300 1 00
300 MH z to 1 000 M Hz 0, 044 1 000 1 00
NOTE Annexes B an d C d escribe m ethods for d eterm inin g the output characteristics of a pulse g en erator for use
in testing th e requi rem ents of this subclause.
As an alternative the response of the measuring receiver to repeated pulses shall be such
that for a constant voltage setting of the pulse generator of e. g. 50 dB( µ V) at repetition
frequencies of 25 H z (Band A) and 1 00 H z (Bands B, C and D), the relationship between
receiver indication and repetition frequency is in accordance with Figures 1 , 2, 3 and 4 under
opposite sign conditions.
20
10
–1 0
1 10 25 1 00
Pulse repetition frequency (Hz)
IEC
Figu re 1 – Pul se respon se cu rve (Band A)
– 18 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
22, 5 ±2
Relative input in decibels for constant output
24
Asym ptote
22
20, 5 ±2
20
Absolute cali bration
18
E0
16
14 C.I.S.P.R.
Pul se g en erator C receiver
12 R
E0 RC = 0, 31 6 µ Vs 1
1 0 ±1 , 5 Freq . = 1 00 im p. /s
10
2 R
8 Sin e-wave gen erator α
6, 5 ±1 E = 66 d B ( µ V) eff.
6 U = 60 dB ( µ V) eff. R
U
E
4 α1 = α2 ±1 ,5 dB
2
0
0
–2
–4 –4, 5 ±1
–6
–8
1 1 01 1 02 1 03 1 04
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
Figu re 2 – Pu lse respon se cu rve (Band B)
Relative input in decibels for constant output
31 , 5 Asym ptote
U = 60 d B ( µ V) eff.
α1 = α2 ±1 ,5 dB
5
–5
–1 0
–1 5
1 1 01 1 02 1 03 1 04
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
E0
C.I.S.P.R.
30 Pulse generator receiver
C
E0 RC = IS µVs R
1 5, 5 µ Vs 1
Band A R
2
20 Quasi-peak detector α
Sine-wave generator
recei vers E = 66 dB ( µV) eff. R
U
E
U = 60 dB (µV) eff.
α1 = α 2
2, 8 µ Vs
10
Band B
Quasi-peak detector Averag e detector
0 recei vers recei vers
0 31 6 µ Vs
–1 0 0, 28 µ Vs
– 19 –
–20 Band C/D
Quasi-peak detector
recei vers 0 044 µ Vs
–30
–40
–50
1 10 1 00 1 000 1 0 000 1 00 000
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
NOTE ‘I S’ is the abbreviation used for A i mp in previous editions
The response curve for a particular m easuring receiver shall lie between the lim its defined in
the appropriate figure and quantified in Table 2. For spectrum an al yzers without preselection,
the requirem ents in Table 2 for pulse repetition frequencies less than 20 H z are not
applicable. The use of such instruments for com pliance testing is conditional. I f such
spectrum anal yzers are used for measurements, the user shall verify and document that the
equipment under test does not emit broadband signals of pulse repetition frequencies of
20 H z or lower. A determination of the suitability of a spectrum anal yzer for testing shall be
made by perform ing the procedure documented in Annex B of CI SPR 1 6-2-1 : 201 4, Annex B of
CI SPR 1 6-2-2: 201 0, or Annex B of CI SPR 1 6-2-3: 201 0.
The pulse response is restricted due to overload at the input to the receiver at frequencies
above 300 MH z. The values marked with an asterisk (*) in Table 2 are optional and are not
essential.
4.5 Selectivity
4.5.1 Overall selectivity (passband)
The curve representing the overall selectivity of the m easuring receiver shall lie within the
lim its shown in Figure 5, 6 or 7.
Selectivity shall be described by the variation wi th frequency of the am plitude of the input
sine-wave voltage that produces a constant indication on the measuring receiver.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 21 –
NOTE For the m easurem ent of eq uipm ent that requi res hig her selecti vity at the transition between 1 30 kH z an d
1 50 kH z (e. g. m ains sign alli ng equi pm ent as defin ed in EN 50065-1 ), a hi gh -pass filter can be added i n front of the
m easuring recei ver to achi eve the com bined sel ectivity of CI SPR m easuring recei ver and hi g h-pass filter as shown
in Tabl e 3.
The measuring receiver in conjunction with the high-pass filter should m eet the requirements
of this standard.
220 Hz/ 20 dB
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max Bw
Min Bw
8
3
45 Hz/ 1 ,5 dB
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max. bandwidth
8 Min. bandwidth
–4 kHz/6 dB 5 kHz/6 dB
3
2 kHz/
1 ,5 dB
–1 ,5 dB
–2
–1 0 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
–∆f kHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max. bandwidth
Min. bandwidth
8
–50 kHz/6 dB 70 kHz/6 dB
3
20 kHz/1 ,5 dB
–1 ,5 dB
–2
–1 40 –1 20 –1 00 –80 –60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 1 00 1 20 1 40
–∆f kHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
Figu re 7 – Li mits of overall selectivity –
Pass band (see 4. 5.1 , 5.6, 6.6, 7.6) Ban ds (C an d D)
1 1
(nfL ± fi ) and ( f0 ) (6)
m k
where
m, n, k are integers;
NOTE Where m ore than on e interm edi ate frequency is used, the freq uencies fL an d fi can refer to each of the
local oscillator and i nterm ediate frequencies used. I n ad dition, spuri ous responses can occur when no i nput signal
is appl ied to th e m easuri ng receiver; for exam ple, when harm onics of th e local oscill ators differ i n frequ ency by one
of the interm ediate frequ encies. The requ irem ents of this subclause therefore cannot appl y in these latter cases.
The effect of th ese spurious responses is dealt with in 4. 7. Exam ples of sources of spuri ous signals incl ude l ocal
oscillators (or thei r harm onics), internal clocks, com puter boards, and thei r m ixi ng products with the input sign al
into the recei ver.
Arrange the apparatus as shown in Figure 8. The pulse generator has a spectrum sub-
stantially uniform up to frequency 3) but at least 1 0 dB down at frequency 4) of the
– 24 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
frequencies given in Table 4. The band-stop filter has an attenuation at the test frequency of
at least 40 dB. I ts bandwidth, B 6 , relative to the m axim um attenuation of the filter shall lie
between the frequencies 1 ) and 2) given in Table 4.
Pulse generator 2
a b α
Receiver tuned to f
IEC
NOTE Followin g the discussion in 4. 6, the m easuri ng recei ver responses are:
α 1 a = α 2a
α 1 b = α 1 a – 40 dB
α 2b = α 2a – 36 dB
Connect the sine-wave generator output direct to the measuring receiver input and adj ust for
a convenient reading. Substitute the pulse generator for the sine-wave generator and adj ust
for the same reading. The pulse repetition frequency shall be 1 00 H z for Band A and 1 000 H z
for the other bands.
With the pulse generator connected as described above, switching the filter into circuit shall
introduce attenuation of not less than 36 dB for m easuring receivers, and of not less than
20 dB for spectrum anal yzers without preselection.
4.7 Limitation of receiver n oise and internally gen erated spu rious sign als
4.7. 1 Ran dom noise
Background noise shall not introduce an error in excess of 1 dB.
NOTE The point wh ere the backgrou nd n oise causes an error of 1 dB can be fou nd by applyi ng a sign al, S, such
that the m eter i ndicati on is m uch larger (e. g. 40 dB) th an the n oise level N. By reducin g the sign al level S, the
m eter indication wil l reach a point, S1 , where ( S1 + N) deviates by 1 dB from the linear ch aracteristic.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 25 –
The screening of the receiver shall be such that when it is imm ersed in an am bient
electrom agnetic field of 3 V/m (unm odulated) at an y frequency in the range 9 kH z to
1 000 MH z, an error of not greater than 1 dB is produced at the maximum and m inimum of the
CI SPR indication range as specified by the m anufacturer of the receiver. I n cases where a
measuring receiver is not im mune to the requirement of 3 V/m, the field strength and
frequency at which the error exceeds 1 dB shall be stated by the m anufacturer. The test shall
be performed as described below.
The receiver is placed inside a screened enclosure. An input signal is applied to the receiver
via a 2 m long well-screened cable (e.g. semi-rigid), through a feedthrough in the enclosure
wall, to a signal generator placed outside the enclosure. The level of the input signal shall be
at the maximum and the m inim um of the CI SPR indication range as specified by the
manufacturer of the receiver. All other coaxial term inals of the receiver shall be terminated in
their characteristic im pedance.
Onl y essential leads (e. g. mains and input cables) for the normal use of the m easuring
receiver in its m inim um configuration (excluding options such as headphones) shall be
connected during the test. The leads shall have the lengths and be arranged as in typical use.
The strength of the ambient field in the vicinity of the m easuring receiver shall be measured
by a field strength m onitor.
The receiver m eter indication in the presence of the am bient electrom agnetic field shall differ
by not more than 1 dB from the meter indication when the field is absent.
Before perform ing radiated and conducted em ission measurements, it is essential that the
noise contributions of the test equipm ent do not affect the m easured results (e. g. com puter
control).
5 Measuring receivers with peak detector for the frequency range 9 kHz to
1 8 GHz
5.1 General
This clause specifies requirem ents for measuring receivers em ploying a peak detector when
used for the m easurement of im pulsive or pulse-m odulated disturbance.
Spectrum anal yzers and FFT-based measuring instruments that m eet the requirements of this
clause can be used for com pliance measurements. For emission measurements, FFT-based
m easuring instrum ents shall sample and evaluate the signal continuousl y during the
m easurem ent tim e.
I f the test receiver has a peak-hold capability, the hold time shall be adjustable to values
between 30 ms and 3 s.
NOTE For receivers that use peak hol d (an d forced discharge after th e hol d tim e) or dig ital peak d etection
techniq ues, the requi rem ent on the charge/disch arge tim e constants ratio is not rel evant. A m axim um -hold function
of the displ ay can be used for signals with tim e-varyin g am plitudes.
I f a spectrum anal yzer is used for peak measurem ents, the video bandwidth ( B vi deo ) shall be
set to a value greater than or equal to the resolution bandwidth ( B resol ). For peak
m easurements, the result can be read from the spectrum analyzer display with the detector
operating either in the linear or logarithmic mode.
signal generator shall be the sam e. The pulses shall have a uniform spectrum according to
Table 2. A tolerance of ± 1 , 5 dB is perm itted in the sine-wave voltage level, and this is a
requirem ent for all pulse repetition frequencies for which no overlapping pulses occur at the
output of the I F amplifier.
NOTE 1 Annexes B and C describe m ethods for determ ining the output characteristics of pulse gen erators for use
in testing for the requi rem ents of this subclause.
NOTE 2 At a repetition rate of 25 Hz for Band A an d 1 00 Hz for the oth er bands, the relationsh ip between th e
indicati ons of a peak m easuri ng receiver and a quasi -peak m easuring recei ver with th e preferred band wi dth are
given in Tabl e 7.
Above 1 GH z, the required impulse area is defined using a pulse-modulated carrier at the
frequency of test, since pulse generators with a uniform spectrum up to 1 8 GH z are not
feasible. See E. 6.
5.6 Selectivity
Since the bandwidth requirem ents stated in 5. 3. 1 allow variations from the band widths shown
in Figures 5, 6 and 7, these selectivity curves appl y to peak m easuring receivers in regard to
shape onl y, and the frequency axis shall be scaled accordingl y. For example, B 6 /2
corresponds to 1 00 H z in Figure 5.
The curve representing the overall selectivity of the m easuring receiver reference bandwidth
for Band E shall lie within the limits of Figure 9.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 29 –
1 ,35 MHz/20 dB
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
3 0,25/3
–1 dB
–2
–1 ,4 –1 ,2 –1 –0,8 –0,6 –0,4 –0,2 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1 ,2 1 ,4
–∆f MHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
NOTE 1 The lim its for the i m pulse band width cann ot be shown i n the di ag ram , as the rel ated filter attenuati on
depends on the type of th e fil ter. Th erefore bou nds for the 6-dB an d the 9-dB bandwidth s have been gi ven for
ori entati on.
NOTE 2 Th e lim its for th e overall selecti vity have been d eri ved from equipm ent bei ng in use at th e tim e of
introduction of the sel ectivity requi rem ent.
For the frequency range below 1 GH z, the requirem ents stated in 4. 6, 4.7 and 4. 8 appl y.
Subclauses 4. 7 and 4.8. 2 apply also for Band E.
Requirem ents for screening effectiveness, that is, the im munity to high am bient radiated
disturbances, are under consideration.
6 M easuri ng recei vers with average d etector for the frequency ran ge 9 kH z to
1 8 GH z
6. 1 Gen eral
Average m easuring receivers are generally not used for the m easurement of im pulsive
disturbance. This type of receiver has a detector designed to indicate the average value of the
envelope of the signal passed through the pre-detector stages. The average detector is used
to measure narrowband signals to overcom e problem s associated with either m odul ation
content or the presence of broadband noise.
– 30 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Spectrum anal yzers and FFT-based measuring instruments that m eet the requirements of this
clause can be used for com pliance m easurements. For emission m easurements, FFT-based
measuring instrum ents shall sam ple and evaluate the signal continuousl y during the
measurem ent tim e.
Table 8 – Bandwidth requirements for measu ring receivers with average detector
Frequen cy range Bandwidth B 6 Reference BW
9 kHz to 1 50 kH z (Band A) 1 00 Hz to 300 Hz a 200 Hz ( B 6 )
1 50 kH z to 30 M H z (Band B) 8 kHz to 1 0 kH z a 9 kHz ( B 6 )
30 MH z to 1 000 MH z (Bands C an d D) 1 00 kH z to 500 kH z a 1 20 kH z ( B 6 )
1 GH z to 1 8 GH z (Band E) 300 kH z to 2 MHz a 1 M Hz b ( B i mp )
a The subj ect of band width is discussed in E. 1 . I f a bandwi dth oth er th an th e reference BW is used, this
ban dwi dth shal l be stated when the distu rbance l evel is reported.
b The band width selected shall be defi ned as in Table 6.
The receiver shall not overload for pulse rates equal to or greater than 25 H z for Band A,
500 H z for Band B, and 5 000 H z for Bands C and D.
NOTE With this type of recei ver, in gen eral, it is not possible to provide a sufficient overload factor to prevent
non -lin ear operation of the receiver at very l ow pulse rates (the response to a sin gle pulse i s not defin ed ).
NOTE 1 At repetiti on frequencies of 25 Hz, 1 00 H z, 500 H z, 1 000 H z and 5 000 Hz, the relationship between th e
indicati ons of an averag e an d a q uasi-peak m easuri ng receiver of th e sam e ban d wi dth, assum ing adequ ate
overl oad factors an d a constan t output level, is given i n Tabl e 9.
Above 1 GH z (Band E), two modes of the average (weighting) detector are defined − linear
and logarithm ic:
For the linear average detector, the response of the measuring receiver to pulses of repetition
rate n H z and impulse area of 1 , 4/ n mVs e.m .f. at 50 Ω source im pedance shall be equal to
the response of an unmodulated sine-wave signal at the tuned frequency having an e.m. f. of
rm s value of 2 m V [66 dB( µ V)]. The pulse shall be defined as a pulse-modulated carrier. The
value of n shall be 50 000 H z. A tolerance of ± 1 , 5 dB is perm itted on the sine-wave voltage
level.
For the logarithm ic average detector, the response of the measuring receiver to pulses of
repetition rate 333 kH z (inverse of period 3 µ s) and im pulse area of 6, 7 nVs e. m. f. at 50 Ω
source im pedance shall be equal to the response of an unmodulated sine-wave signal at the
tuned frequency having an e. m. f. with rm s value of 2 m V [66 dB( µ V)]. A tolerance of ± 4 dB is
allowed on the sine-wave voltage level (the 1 0 % tolerance of the bandwidth causes a
possible variation of approxim atel y ± 2, 5 dB).
Average detection can be achieved with spectrum anal yzers operated with a video bandwidth
B vi d eo << B resol in order to achieve proper averaging based on the repetition frequency of the
m easured signal. For m easurements based on a reduction of the video bandwidth, ensure the
scanning tim e is sufficientl y long to allow the video filter to respond correctly.
NOTE 2 For average (weig hted) m easurem ents in the li near m ode, th e result will correspond to th e average l evel
of the m easured sig nal. I f the l ogarithm ic m ode is used, th e result wi ll correspond to th e average of th e l og arithm ic
val ues of the m easu red sign al. Th us, for a sq uare-wave signal taking altern ativel y th e val ues 20 dB( µ V) and
60 dB( µ V), the level obtain ed in the logarithm ic m ode is 40 dB( µ V), wh ereas in the li near m ode, the level of
54, 1 dB( µV) represents th e tru e averag e value of the sig nal.
– 32 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
NOTE 1 The th eoretical pulse response curves of q uasi-peak and average d etector receivers, com bined on an
absolute scale, are shown in Figu re 4. Th e response to repeated pulses of th e m easurin g receiver eq uipped with a
logarithm ic average detector (above 1 GHz) is infl uenced by th e n oise level between the pulses. Usin g the
following values:
L l og Av is the level in dicated by the l og arithm ic average d etector;
TP is the pulse duration;
LP is the pulse l evel in dB( µV);
TN is the du ration of the noise l evel;
LN is noise level i n dB( µ V);
then th e followin g approxim ate relati onshi p appli es:
T L +T L
LlogAv = P P N N (7)
TP + TN
EXAMPLE I f th e pulse level L P is 85 dB( µV) and the noise level L N is 8 dB( µ V), TP = 1 / B i mp = 1 µ s,
the pu lse rate n is 1 00 000 Hz, then TN ≈ 9 µ s. From this equ ation, L l og Av = 1 5, 7 dB( µV). I n reality, L l og Av is hi gher
because TP is hi gh er, because the pu lse signal at the I F outpu t does not d rop to n oise level i mm ediately after 1 µ s.
NOTE 2 A tolerance is u nd er consideration.
Meter A
Envel ope Simulating Micro-
detector network processor
D
IEC
For Band E, the meter tim e constant for the linear average detector is 1 00 m s. For the
logarithmic average detector, the requirement is under consideration.
I t is deduced from the above requirement that an average m easuring receiver shall yield the
maxim um reading listed in Table 1 0 for a radio frequency sine-wave input signal modulated
with repeated rectangular pulses having the duration and period indicated in the table. A
tolerance of ± 1 , 0 dB is allowed for this requirement.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 33 –
4,0 V
SEL>>
0V
V (video)
4,0 V
0V
0 1 ,0 2,0 3,0 4,0
V (AV) Time s IEC
NOTE 1 The response shown is caused by an interm ittent narrowban d sig nal with a d urati on of 0, 3 s and a
repetition freq uency of 1 Hz, when a tim e constant of 1 00 m s is used. I f th e tim e constant i s 1 60 m s, the peaks at
the output of th e m eter-sim ulating network will be lower.
NOTE 2 Th e response to interm ittent narrowband disturbances can also be d efin ed for the l ogarithm ic averag e
detector operatin g with a certain vid eo band width, for exam ple, 1 0 H z, and the m axim um hold function of the
spectrum display.
6.6 Selectivity
For receivers with a bandwidth of 200 H z (for the frequency range 9 kH z to 1 50 kH z) or a
bandwidth of 9 kH z (for frequency range 0, 1 5 MH z to 30 MH z) the overall selectivity shall be
within the lim its shown in Figure 5 and 6, respectivel y. For receivers wi th a band width of
1 20 kH z (for the frequency range 30 MH z to 1 000 MH z), the overall selectivity shall be within
the limits shown in Figure 7. For receivers having other bandwidths, Fi gures 5, 6 and 7
describe the shape only and the frequency axis shall be scaled according l y. The curve
representing the overall selecti vity of the measuring receiver reference bandwidth for Band E
shall lie within the limits of Figure 9.
NOTE For the m easurem ent of eq uipm ent that requi res hig her selecti vity at the transition between 1 30 kH z an d
1 50 kH z (for exam ple, m ains signal ing eq uipm ent as d efined i n EN 50065-1 [1 8] 2 ), a hig h-pass filter m ay be ad ded
in front of th e m easuri ng recei ver to achieve the foll owin g com bined sel ectivity of CI SPR m easuring receiver an d
high -pass filter:
Frequen cy Relative attenu ation
kHz dB
1 50 ≤1
1 46 ≤6
1 45 ≥6
1 40 ≥ 34
1 30 ≥ 81
The measuring receiver in conjunction with the high-pass filter should m eet the requirem ents
of this standard.
Spectrum anal yzers and FFT-based m easuring instrum ents that meet the requirem ents of this
clause can be used for com pliance measurem ents. For em ission measurements, FFT-based
m easuring instrum ents shall sam ple and evaluate the signal continuousl y during the
m easurement tim e.
Sym metric input impedance in the frequency range 9 kH z to 30 MH z: to permit symm etrical
measurem ents, a balanced input transformer is used. The preferred input impedance for the
______________
2 Figu res in squ are brackets refer to the Bibliograph y.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 35 –
Table 1 2 – Bandwidth requ irements for measuring receivers with rms-average detector
Frequen cy range Bandwidth
9 kHz to 1 50 kH z (Band A) 200 Hz ( B 6 )
1 50 kH z to 30 M H z (Band B) 9 kHz ( B 6 )
30 MH z to 1 000 MH z (Bands C an d D) 1 20 kH z ( B 6 )
1 GH z to 1 8 GH z (Band E) 1 M Hz ( B i mp )
NOTE The chosen value in band E is defined as the impulse band width of the m easu rin g
recei ver with a tolerance of ± 1 0 %.
NOTE 1 “Corner freq uency” i s the pulse repetition freq uency above which the rm s-averag e detector behaves like
an rm s detector and below whi ch the rm s-average detector h as the slope of a lin ear averag e detector.
The minim um pulse repetition rate without overload shall conform to the values given in
Table 1 3.
NOTE 2 With this type of d etector it will n ot, in gen eral, be possible to provid e sufficient overload factor to
prevent n on -lin ear operation of the instrum ent at very l ow pul se repetition rates for short pul ses in Ban ds C/D an d
E (the response to a short sing le pulse is onl y theoreticall y defined i n these ban ds).
NOTE 3 Ann ex A describes the calcul ation for the overl oad factor for th e rm s detector. Annex B descri bes th e
determ ination of the pulse gen erator spectrum . Annex C describes th e accurate m easurem ent of th e output l evels
of nan osecon d pu lse generators.
NOTE 4 For Ban d E, the test can be m ade with a pulse-m odulated sin e-wave sig nal, with an occupied band width
of e. g. 2 MH z. E. 6 gi ves the specification of an applicable test signal.
7. 5 Response to pulses
7. 5.1 Con struction d etai ls
The detector function can be represented by an rms detector that continuousl y determines
rm s values during periods of tim e equal to the reciprocal of the corner frequency fc . These
rm s values are then passed through a second order low-pass filter that corresponds to the
criticall y dam ped indication that is specified for the quasi-peak detector, the time constant of
which is defined up to 1 GH z. For Band E, the time constant is 1 00 ms. I n case of variation
with tim e, the m aximum output of the low-pass filter is the measurement result.
NOTE Annexes B, C and E describe m ethods for determ ining th e output characteristics of pulse gen erators for
use in testin g the req uirem ents of this clause.
NOTE Annex A describes the calculati on for th e pulse response of the rm s detector. At a repetition freq uency of
25 H z and 1 00 H z (i. e. the qu asi-peak detector reference pul se repetiti on frequency), respectivel y, the relati onshi p
between the in dications of an rm s-average and a qu asi-peak m easuring recei ver of th e same band width is gi ven in
Table 1 4.
When external preamplifiers are used, refer to Annex J for applicable requirem ents.
Below the corner frequency fc the relationship shall be in accordance with the following rule:
The response curve for a particular receiver shall lie between the lim its in Table 1 5.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 37 –
I t is deduced from the above requirement that an rm s-average m easuring receiver shall yield
the m aximum reading listed in Table 9 for a radio frequency sine-wave input signal m odulated
with repeated rectangular pulses having the duration and period indicated in Table 1 6. A
tolerance of ± 1 , 0 dB is allowed for this requirem ent.
7.6 Selectivity
The selectivity curves for the rm s-average weighting receiver shall be equal to those of
Figures 5, 6 and 7, for Bands A, B, C and D. For the Band E receiver, the selectivity curve is
given in Figure 9.
The requirem ents of 4. 5.2, 4. 5. 3 and 4. 5. 4 apply. For Band E receivers, requirements are
under consideration.
– 38 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Requirem ents for screening effectiveness, i. e. the immunity to high am bient radiated
disturbances, are under consideration.
8 Measuring receivers for the frequency range 1 GHz to 1 8 GHz with amplitude
probability distribution (APD) measuring function
APD of disturbance is defined as the cumulative distribution of the “probability of tim e that the
amplitude of disturbance exceeds a specified level”.
APD can be measured at the output of the envelope detector or the succeeding circuits of an
RF measuring receiver or a spectrum anal yzer. The amplitude of disturbance should be
expressed in term s of the corresponding field strength or voltage at the receiver input.
Usuall y, an APD m easurement is carried out at a fixed frequency.
The APD m easuring function will be an additional function of the m easuring apparatus and
may be attached to, or incorporated in the measuring instrument.
The APD m easuring function can be implem ented using the following m ethods. One approach
uses com parators and counters (Figure G. 1 ). The equipm ent determines the probabilities of
exceeding a set of pre-assigned am plitude (i. e. voltage) levels. The number of levels equals
the number of comparators. Another possible m ethod involves the use of an analog-to-digital
converter, a logic circuit, and memory (Figure G. 2). The equipm ent can also provide the APD
figure for a set of pre-assigned amplitude levels. The number of levels depends on the
resolution of the analog-to-digital converter (e. g. 256 levels for an 8-bit converter).
APD measurem ents using the aforem entioned function are applicable to products or product
families if their potential to cause interference to digital comm unication systems is to be
determ ined (see 4. 7 of CI SPR 1 6-3: 201 0/CI SPR 1 6-3: 201 0/AM D1 : 201 2, for background
m aterial on amplitude probability distribution, APD, specifications).
The following specifications apply to the APD m easuring function. A rationale for these
specifications is provided in Annex G.
• Specifications
a) The d ynamic range of the amplitude shall be greater than 60 dB.
b) The am plitude accuracy, including threshold level setting error, shall be better than
± 2, 7 dB.
c) The maxim um measurable tim e of a disturbance shall be longer than or equal to 2 min.
The intermittent m easurement can be used if the dead tim e is less than 1 % of the total
measurem ent tim e.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 39 –
9. 1 Gen eral
Disturbance anal yzers are used for the autom atic assessm ent of amplitude, rate and duration
of discontinuous disturbances (clicks).
The tim e param eters are determined from the signal that exceeds the I F reference level of the
measuring receiver.
NOTE 1 Defi nition an d assessm ent of clicks are in com plian ce with CI SPR 1 4-1 .
NOTE 2 Cu rrent anal yzers are desig ned for use with a quasi-peak m easurin g recei ver of the type that works with
a lim ited internal si gnal l evel. As a result, such analyzers m ay not i nterface correctl y with al l recei vers.
B
Analogue of C.I.S.P.R. Indicator
detector and motor time Timing circuit
for more than two clicks
constants in any 2 s interval
Calibration
circuit
– 41 –
C
Shaping Duration of each disturbance
Timing circuit other than clicks (durations
network are additive if the counter
is not reset)
Supply Artificial
voltage mains
network
Clock
D
Apparatus Number of operations
under test on apparatus under test
IEC
Test Evaluation by
No. Test signal the analyzer
1 0,1 1 ms/1 dB
1 click
9,5 ms/1 dB
−1 s +1 s
2 1 click
Background: noise or CISPR pulses, 200 Hz: −2,5 dB (QP)
1 90 ms/1 dB
3 −1 s +1 s 1 click
Background: noise or CISPR pulses, 200 Hz: –2,5 dB (QP)
Other than click
1 333 ms/1 dB
4
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
6 1 80 ms Other than click
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
1 30 ms 1 click
7
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
8 21 0 ms 2 clicks
30 ms/25 dB
1 click
10 265 ms
30 ms/−2,5 dB
1 90 ms/25 dB
Band B: 1 034 ms/Band C: under consideration
11 2 clicks
30 ms/–2,5 dB/2 dB IF
IEC
Figu re 1 3 – A graph ical presentation of test signals u sed i n th e test of the an alyzer for
the performance ch eck ag ain st th e d efinition of a cli ck according to Table 1 4
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 43 –
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
2a 1 9, 5 1 click
2, 2 s
0 04 08 12 16 2 22
3a 1 1 90 1 click
2, 2 s
0 04 08 12 16 2 22
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 18 2
– 44 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Table 1 7 (2 of 4)
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
6 5 5 30 30 1 80 Other than
click (240 m s)
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
7 5 5 30 30 1 30 1 click
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10
8 5 5 30 30 21 0 2 clicks
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 45 –
Table 1 7 (3 of 4)
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
1s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 18 2
12 25 –2, 5 c 1 90 30 1 1 66 e 1 click
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 18 2
– 46 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Table 1 7 (4 of 4)
a To be perform ed with backgroun d n oise consisting of 200 Hz CI SPR pu lses at a level 2, 5 dB bel ow the
quasi -peak threshol d level. These pulses should be present comm encing at least 1 s before the test pulse
and l asting u ntil at l east 1 s after the test pulse.
Observati ons :
1 ) The graphical representation i s done with peak m easurem en ts of a very short hold tim e ( < 1 m s) of the
test receiver which show the 200-H z pulse. When the pulse-m odulated sine wave arri ves, the 200-H z-
pulse is no lon ger visibl e (as seen in the g raph for test no. 3) but still present du rin g the event of the
click disturbance
2) The very n arrow responses at the origi n in th e graphs are du e to a firm ware im perfection.
b The 1 , 333 s im pulse checks the th reshold of the analyzer for im pulses, which are onl y 1 dB above the
quasi -peak threshol d level.
c These l ower l evels shal l be set such that the i nterm ediate frequ ency threshol d is exceeded but th e q uasi-
peak th reshold is not exceeded
d I f these two pulses are m easured as separate distu rbances, only one click will be registered.
e The correspon dent valu es for the frequ ency rang e above 30 MH z are u nd er considerati on and will be
revised after fu rth er in vestigati ons.
f The rise tim es of the pul ses shall not be long er than 40 µ s.
9. 3 Test method for th e validation of the performan ce check for th e click analyzer
9. 3.1 Basic requ irements
The disturbance anal yzer is connected to the quasi-peak m easuring receiver and tuned to a
convenient frequency.
A CW signal and a pulsed CW signal both at the tuned frequency of the receiver are required.
A signal generated by CI SPR pulse generator, as defined in Annex B, with a 200 H z PRF
covering the receiver bandwidth at the tuned frequency is also required for test num bers 2
and 3.
The pulsed CW signal source shall provide two independently variable pulses. The rise tim e
of the pulses shall not be longer than 40 µ s. The pulse duration shall be variable between
1 1 0 µ s and 1 ,3 s and the am plitudes variable over a 44 dB range. An y background noise of
the pulsed CW signal source shall be at least 20 dB below the reference level used in step a)
in the test m easured on the receiver’s quasi-peak meter.
The test method is identical to the one descri bed in 9. 3.1 a). The param eters of the signal are
given in Table F.1 .
– 48 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Annex A
(normative)
Determination of response to repeated pulses of quasi-peak
and rms-average measuring receivers
(See 3.6, 4.4.2, 7.3.2 and 7.5.1 )
A. 1 General
This annex sets out the data for the num erical calculation, and the procedure for establishing
the curve of response to repeated pulses. The assumptions inherent in the method are also
stated. The calculation is divided into three successive stages.
NOTE The text on the rm s detector in this an nex deal s with the rm s m easuring receiver i n theory and applies to
the rm s-average m easu rin g receiver above th e corner frequ en cy fc as defin ed i n Cl ause 7.
The pulse response of these stages is, in general, determ ined solely by the I F stages that
define the overall selectivity of the receiver.
I t is common practice to consider that this selectivity can be obtained by an assem bl y of two
criticall y-coupled tuned transformers arranged in cascade so as to produce the desired
passband at the –6 dB points. An y other equivalent arrangem ent can be reduced to the above
for purposes of calculation. The practical symm etry of this passband perm its the use of the
equivalent low-pass filter for calculating the envelope of the pulse response. The error
resulting from this approxim ation is negligible.
where
The envelope of the response of two criticall y-coupled tuned transform ers to an im pulse area
υt is, from the previous equation:
The corresponding selectivity curve of the equivalent low-pass filter may be written, for t << 1 / ω0 :
2ω02
F( f ) = G × (A. 3)
[(ω0 + jω )2 + ω02 ]2
where ω = 2 π f .
2 × 4 ( 2 − 1 )ω 0 (A. 4)
B3 =
= 0,361ω 0
π
2 × ω0 (A. 5)
B6 = = 0, 450ω 0
π
The effective bandwidth of a receiver, com prising an idealized rectangular filter giving the
sam e rms value of response as an actual receiver, is equal to the power bandwidth ∆ f defined
as:
1
F 2 ( f )df
+∞
∆ f =
∫ (A. 6)
F02 −∞
where
F( f) is the selectivity curve;
f = ∫ F 2 ( f )df (A. 7)
+∞
∆
−∞
∞
2ω 02
∆ f = ∫ 2
df (A. 8)
24
0
[(ω 0 + jω )2 + ω0 ]
thus:
B 3 = 0, 963 ∆ f (A. 1 0)
A. 3. 1 Gen eral
The calculation is made on the assum ption that the connection of the detector circuits to th e
output of the last I F stages does not affect either the am plitude or the shape of the signal
therefrom . I n other words, the output im pedance of this stage is regarded as negligible
compared with the input im pedance of the detector.
An y detector may be reduced to the form (actual or equivalent) of a non-linear element (for
example a diode) in association with a resistance (total forward resistance S) and followed by
a circuit consisting of a capacitance C in shunt with a discharge resistance R .
– 50 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
The electrical charge time constant TC is related to the product S × C, while the electrical
discharge time constant TD is given by the product R × C.
The relationship between TC and the product S × C will be established by obtaining, in a tim e
t = TC , an indicated voltage of 0, 63 times the final stead y value when a constant am plitude RF
signal is suddenl y applied.
The voltage U across the capacitor is related to the amplitude A of the RF signal applied to
the detector by the equation:
dU A (sin θ − θ cos θ )
+ UI( RC ) = (A. 1 1 )
dt π ×S×C
This case of repeated pulses can be solved practicall y only by arbitraril y assuming a l evel for
the output voltage of the detector at the start of each pulse, by determining the increm ent ∆ U
of this voltage caused by the pulse, and then finding the spacing which shall exist between
two successive pulses in order to repeat the assumed initial conditions.
− t / TD
d 2α 2 dα 1
+ α = 1
dt 2
+
T dt TM2
TM2
(A. 1 2)
M
where
The solution of the problem is relativel y sim ple for the two extremes of the response curve; on
the one hand, for pulses sufficiently separated for the starting point to be zero and thus
known, and on the other, for pulses having a sufficientl y high repetition rate for the inertia of
the instrument to prevent it following the fluctuations faithfull y. For the interm ediate cases, the
calculation becomes more com plicated. At the start of each pulse, the instrum ent deflection is
varying and it is necessary to find a solution that takes account of the initial position and
velocity.
1 /2
+∞ A 2 (t)
(A. 1 3)
Urms = n∫ dt
0 2
The output m ay also be deduced from the frequency response curve as:
1 /2
+∞ 2υτ × F 2 ( f ) (A. 1 4)
Urms = n∫ df
−∞ 2
This gives:
1 /2
F 2 ( f ) df (A. 1 5)
+∞
Urms = 2 × υτ × n ∫
−∞
Urms = 2 × υτ × n × ∆ f (A. 1 6)
From Equation (A. 1 6), the am plitude relationship may be deduced by taking:
Urm s = 2 m V, when n = 1 00 H z
– 52 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
thus:
1 00 2
υt = µVs (A. 1 7)
∆f
1 39
υt = µVs (A. 1 8)
B3
Urms = (υt ) × (2 n ∆f )1 /2
A ( t) peak = 0, 944 × υt × ω 0
A( t ) peak 1/2
B
= 1, 28 3 (A. 1 9)
2 × Urms n
The am plitude relationship for the rm s meter that states the value of pulse ( υt ) rm s for the case
of 1 00 H z, which is equivalent to a sine-wave signal of 2 m V, is from Equation (A. 1 8):
1 39
(υt ) rms = µVs
B3
For the selectivity characteristic quoted in Equation (A. 3), this corresponds to:
1 55
(υt ) rms = µVs
B6
For the quasi-peak receiver, the value of pulse ( υt ) qp , which is equivalent to a sine-wave
signal of 2 mV, is as follows:
Thus for m easuring receivers having band-pass characteristics according to Equation (A. 3)
and a bandwidth at 6 dB equal to the nom inal bandwidths prescribed in Clauses 4, 5, 6 and 7
the following relationships for ( υt ) rm s /( υt ) qp exist:
(υt ) rms
= 1 4,3 dB
(υt ) qp
(υt ) rms
= 20,1 dB
(υt ) qp
These relationships are valid for a pulse repetition frequency of 1 00 H z. At other repetition
frequencies, it is necessary to use the corresponding pulse response curves.
– 54 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Annex B
(normative)
Determination of pulse generator spectrum
(See 4.4, 5.5, 6.5, 7. 5)
B. 1 . 1 Gen eral
For checking compliance with the requirem ents of this standard, a pulse generator is needed.
Compliance with the requirements of 4. 4, 4. 6, 5. 5, 6.5 and 7.5 m ay be tested using the pulse
generator technique.
For each frequency band of the m easuring receiver under test, the generator used shall be
capable of producing pulses with the impulse area specified and over the range of repetition
frequencies given in Table B. 1 . The impulse area should be known within ± 0, 5 dB and the
repetition frequency to within about 1 %.
The spectrum should be substantiall y constant up to the upper lim it of the frequency band of
the receiver under test. The spectrum m ay be regarded as satisfactoril y uniform if, within this
band, the variation of the spectrum amplitude is not greater than 2 dB relative to its value for
the lower frequencies within the band. The im pulse area at the measurement frequency shall
be known to within ± 0,5 dB.
For checking compliance with the requirements of 4.6, the spectrum above the upper limit of
the frequency band shall be lim ited (1 0 dB down at twice the upper frequency). This is
necessary to standardize the severity of the test since the inter-modulation products of all
com ponents of the spectrum will contribute to the response.
Methods for the accurate determ ination of the absolute value of the spectrum amplitude of
pulses are given in Annex C.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 55 –
For measurement of the variation of the spectrum am plitude with frequency, the following
method may be used.
E
St ( f ) = 0
B6
The m easurem ent is repeated for various test frequencies in the band under consideration.
The spectrum of the pulse generator is given by the curve relating St ( f) to the measurem ent
frequency.
The receiver used should be linear for the peak levels of the signals used.
The suppression of parasitic responses, in particular the im age frequency and I F responses,
should be at least 40 dB.
Annex C
(normative)
Accurate measurements of the output of
nanosecond pulse generators
(See 4.4, 5.5, 6.5, 7. 5)
The total area under the envelope A t, f of the output from the band-pass filter (taking into
( )
account the sign of different parts of it) is measured, so as to evaluate the integral in the
equation:
(C. 1 )
+∞
2( Aimp ) = S( f ) = ∫ A ( t, f )dt
−∞
where
I n a variation of this method for pulses of duration much shorter than the period of the
frequency ( f), the impulse area can be measured directl y as an integrated area by m eans of a
suitable oscilloscope (for example, for nanosecond pulses, a sam pling oscilloscope is
required), the integration taking into account the sign of different parts of the area.
When the pulse repetition frequency F exceeds the values of the bandwidth of the measuring
receiver, the latter may select one line from the pulse spectrum. I n this case, the im pulse area
may be determ ined as follows:
V V 2 (C. 2)
Aimp = K =
2F 2F
The pulse generator may then be used to calibrate the pulse response characteristics of a
measuring receiver in which the bandwidth is sufficientl y wide to accept m an y harmonic
com ponents (approximatel y 1 0 or more within the 6 dB bandwidth).
C. 1 .5 En ergy meth od
Another method compares the power produced by a therm al source (resistor) with that
produced by the pulse generator. H owever, the accuracy obtained with this method is some-
what less than with the three m ethods m entioned above. This method may be useful at
frequencies of the order of 1 000 MH z.
C. 2. 1 To determine compliance with 4. 4. 1 , 5.5, 6. 5. 2 and 7.5. 2, the im pulse area shall be
known with an error not greater than ± 0,5 dB.
C. 2. 2 The pulse repetition frequency shall be known with an error not greater than 1 %.
C. 2. 3 For determining compliance with 4. 4. 2, 5.5, 6. 5. 4 and 7. 5. 3, the impulse area shall not
depend on their repetition frequency.
Annex D
(normative)
Influence of the quasi-peak measuring receiver
characteristics on its pulse response
(See 4.4.2)
The level of the pulse response curve for high repetition frequencies depends essentiall y on
the m agnitude of the bandwidth. On the other hand, for low repetition frequencies, the time
constants play the m ore important role. N o tolerance has been stated for these tim e
constants, but it is suggested for guidance that a value of 20 % is considered reasonable.
I t is also at very low repetition frequencies that the effect of lack of overload factors will be
m ost noticeable. The values required for the overload factors are those necessary for the
accurate m easurem ent of an isolated pulse using the bandwidth and the time constants
prescribed.
Examination of the pulse response-curve at the two ends of the range of the indicating
instrum ent provides a check on possible non-linear behaviour of the detector. The most
critical repetition frequencies in this respect are most probabl y in the neighbourhood of 20 H z
to 1 00 H z.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 59 –
Annex E
(normative)
Response of average and peak measuring receivers
(See 6.3.1 )
I t is shown in [1 9] and [20] that the area under the envelope of the impulse response curve of
a narrowband circuit having a symm etrical frequency characteristic is independent of the
bandwidth, and is given by:
(E. 1 )
+∞
∫−A∞ ( t ) dt = 2υτG0
where υ and t are the am plitude and duration of a rectangular pulse for which B im p t << 1 and
G0 is the gain of the circuit at the centre frequency.
This theorem is valid only in the case of a non-oscillating envelope. The oscillatory envelope
is characteristic of double-tuned circuits, and unless a phase sensitive detector is used, it may
be necessary to com pensate by calibration the error introduced by the oscillatory response. I n
the case of critical coupling, the second peak of the envelope is about 8,3 % of the first one.
NOTE The response of th e pre-detector stages as defi ned in A. 2 is oscillatory. Therefore, the cali bration error
introduced by the oscill atory response is com pensated with a biased tolerance of + 2, 5 dB/–0, 5 dB in 6. 5. 2.
As long as pulses do not overlap in the output of the I F am plifier, the average value is
proportional to the pulse repetition rate, n .
I n view of Equation (E.1 ), it is not considered meaningful to define an effective bandwidth for
an average measuring receiver.
For calculation of overload factor and for use in connection with peak measuring receivers, it
is useful to define a quantity known as the effective im pulse bandwidth of the pre-detector
circuit as follows:
A( t ) max
Bimp = (E. 2)
2 G0
where A ( t) m ax is the peak envelope output of the intermediate-frequency stages with a unit
im pulse applied.
0,944
= 1, 05 B6 or 1 ,31 B3 (E. 3)
Bimp
2 0
= ω
For other types of tuned circuits, the ratio of B imp to B 6 may be estim ated from Figure E.1 if
the ratio of B 20 to B 3 is known, where B 20 is the bandwidth at 20 dB.
1 , 20
1 ,1 5
∆ f6 d B
∆ fimp
1 ,1 0
1 , 05
Dou ble tu ned stages critical coupli ng
1 , 00
0, 95
1 2 3 4 5
B 20
Shape factor
B3
IEC
Figu re E.1 – Correction factor for estim atin g th e ratio B i mp / B 6 for oth er tun ed circu its
1, 4
υt = mVs (E. 4)
n
Therefore, from A. 5 the ratio of ( υt ) ave to ( υt ) qp to produce the sam e indication will be:
for the frequency range 0, 1 5 MH z to 30 MH z:
(υt )ave
= 32 , 9 dB
(υt )qp
(υt )ave
= 50 ,1 dB
(υt )qp
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 61 –
The above assumes adequate overload factor at the repetition rate in question, and that the
bandwidths in use correspond respectivel y to those in Clause 4. At a repetition rate of
1 000 H z, the corresponding ratios will be 1 7, 4 dB and 38, 1 dB.
Where a direct-reading m eter is used in the receiver, the requirement for tim e constants can
be determined from the curve in Figure E. 2, which shows the percentage of the reading
referred to the true peak in function of a parameter and which includes the time constants
ratio, the bandwidth B 6 and the pulse repetition rate. I n using this curve, it should be noted
that:
RC 1 TC
= 4 (E. 5)
RD TD
where TC and TD are respectively the charge and discharge tim e constants.
For exam ple, if it is desired to have the receiver read at least 90 % of true peak at a repetition
rate of 1 H z, it would be necessary to have a discharge-tim e constant to charge tim e constant
ratio of:
1 , 25 × 1 0 6 in the frequency range 0, 1 5 MH z to 30 MH z;
1 , 67 × 1 0 7 in the frequency range 30 MH z to 1 000 MH z.
1, 4
mVs (with B im p in H z) (E. 6)
Bimp
From the 6 dB bandwidths specified in Table H .1 , the B im p values are obtained as 1 , 05 B 6 (see
E. 2). These values and the corresponding A im p values required for a peak m eter are shown in
Table E. 1 .
Therefore, using the values given as a) in Table 1 for A im p, qp , the ratio of A i m p, qp to A im p, peak
to produce the sam e indication is:
– 62 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
πR B
α =( c 6 )
RDN
R C = Ch argin g resistance ( Ω )
R D = Discharg e resistance ( Ω )
B 6 = 6 dB band wi dth (Hz)
1 00
N = Pulse repetition frequ ency (PPS)
P = Meter readin g as a percentage of true peak
80
60
40
20
0
1 0 -3 1 0 -2 1 0 -1 1 10
α
IEC
Pulse generators with a uniform spectrum up to 1 8 GH z are not feasible. To test the response
of m easuring receivers above 1 GH z to pulses and to verify the amplitude relationship of
various types of m easuring receivers, it is practical to use a pulse-m odulated carrier tuned to
the receive frequency. The pulse width shall be less than or equal to (1 /3 B im p ). The accuracy
of the im pulse width is im portant for the precise generation of a certain impulse area as
required in the relevant subclause. I n addition to a m easurem ent of the pulse duration using
an oscilloscope, the pulse duration of a rectangular pulse can be verified by the distance
between the m inim a on the spectrum display (see Figure E. 3 for a sam ple waveform ).
For the m easuring receiver with a peak detector with a bandwidth B im p of 1 MH z, an impulse
area (e.m. f. ) of 1 , 4/ B im p m Vs is required, that is, 1 , 4 nVs for a response equal to that of an
unm odulated sine-wave signal tuned to the receive frequency having an e.m .f. with rms value
of 2 m V [66 dB( µ V)]. A pulse-m odulated carrier having the required impulse area can be
generated with the various pulse widths as shown in Table E. 2.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 63 –
For a m easuring receiver with a linear average detector, the impulse area (e.m .f. ) equal to an
unm odulated sine-wave signal at the receive frequency having an e.m .f. with rm s value of
2 m V [66 dB( µ V)] shall be 1 , 4/ n m Vs ( n being the pulse repetition rate). For n = 50 000, the
im pulse area is 28 nVs, that is, 26 dB higher than for the peak measuring receiver with a B im p
of 1 MH z.
For a measuring receiver with an rms detector, the im pulse area (e. m .f. ) equal to an
unm odulated sine-wave signal at the receive frequency having an e.m .f. with rm s value of
2 mV [66 dB( µ V)] shall be 44( B 3 -1 /2 ) µ Vs for pulse repetition rate of 1 kH z. For an im pulse
bandwidth B im p of 1 MH z, the corresponding B 3 is 700 kH z. Therefore, the required impulse
area is 52, 6 nVs, that is, 31 , 5 dB higher than for the peak m easuring receiver with a B im p of
1 MH z.
50 PRN
40
30
20
10
–1 0
Center 1 28 MHz 5 MHz Span 50 MHz
IEC
U
Bimp = p (E. 7)
D
The pulse spectral density D will frequentl y not be available as a precise reference quantity.
I n order to reduce the uncertainty of the im pulse bandwidth m easurem ent, Methods 1 and 2
are using two measurem ents. U nder certain circumstances, the selectivity curve of a
measuring receiver can also be used to calculate B im p (as described in method 3), since B im p
is the “voltage bandwidth” of the measuring receiver (not to be confused with the power
bandwidth or equivalent noise bandwidth, which determines the rms value of Gaussian noise
when using the rms detector of the m easuring receiver). B im p is determined by the selectivity
curve of the I F filter, the (possibl y non-linear) phase response of the filter and the video
bandwidth of the receiver. I t is wider than B 6 , but there is no general factor for the relationship
between B im p and B 6 or B 3 of the receiver.
t T0
Voltage
U1
Time
Figu re E.4 – Pu lse-mod ulated RF si gnal appl ied to a measu ring receiver
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 65 –
fp >> Bimp
U2 = U1 × t × fp
Voltage
Frequency
f0 – 1 f0 f0 + 1
t t
2 1
t t
IEC
fp >> Bimp
Voltage
f0 – 1 f0 f0 + 1 Frequency
t t
2 1
t t
U1
Carrier signal
U2 = U1 × t × Bimp
Voltage
Frequency
IEC
With the first m easurement, the rms amplitude U2 can be expected as U2 = U1 × t × fp1 . Low
m easurement uncertainty can be achieved by a high signal-to-noise ratio. But care shall be
taken to avoid overload. With the second m easurement, the maxim um response of the rms
value of the peak to the transient can be expected as Up = U1 × t × B im p . I f the product U1 × t
is perfectl y equal in both m easurements, then B im p can be calculated from the two
measurem ent results as shown in Figure E. 7 using Equation (E.2):
U
Bimp = fp1 × p (E. 8)
U2
– 66 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Receiver response
U2 U2 = U1 × t × fp1
Up = U1 × t × Bimp
Up
Up Bimp = fp1 ×
U2
This m ethod determines the pulse spectral density D using the equation D = Uk / fp , where Uk
is the measured voltage of one spectral line (i. e. , the carrier frequency, if the signal is a
pulse-modulated carrier, or the center line at the receive frequency, at which B im p is to be
measured) and fp is the prf. Again, fp shall be m uch higher than the narrow bandwidth and
m uch lower than the B im p to be m easured, i. e. B n arrow « fp « B im p . Exam ple settings could be
B narrow = 9 kH z, fp = 1 00 kH z for B im p = 1 MH z. The m ethod requires a comparison of the
responses of the narrowband filter and of the filter to be m easured by appl ying an
unm odulated sinewave signal to both filters and deriving a correction factor c for the
calculation of D ( c = U2 / U1 , with U2 being the value for the wide filter and U1 being the valu e
for the narrow filter). Therefore D = c × Uk/fp . When D is determined, Up is measured with th e
peak detector and B im p can be calculated using Equation (E. 2).
I n this case, the im pulse bandwidth of a m easuring receiver is defined as the area of the
norm alized linear selectivity function U( f), with 1 / Um ax as the normalization factor:
1 +∞
Bimp =
Umax ∫
U ( f )df
−∞
(E. 9)
Measuring receivers with high-resolution digital frequency displays can be tuned in N steps of
∆ f to measure the selectivity function U( f ). Measurem ents between the 60 dB points with 1 00
n
steps ( N = 1 01 ) are usuall y sufficient for a correct bandwidth m easurement. Analogous, a
swept receiver can be set up such that its start and stop frequencies coincide with the 60 dB
points of the filter curve and a sweep is taken to obtain the amplitude values. The test signal
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 67 –
will be a CW signal to trace out the filter shape of the filter under investigation. I n this case,
the impulse bandwidth can be m easured and calculated using
N
1 ∆f
[U( fn ) + U( fn +1 )] ×
Umax ∑
Bimp = (E. 1 0)
n =1 2
1 MHz
1 ,2
1 ,0
0,8
MHz
0,6 1 MHz
0,4
0,2
0
–3 000 –1 500 0 1 500 3 000
kHz IEC
Annex F
(normative)
Performance check of the exceptions from the definitions
of a click according to 4.2.3 of CISPR 1 4-1 : 2005
For the application of the exceptions given in CI SPR 1 4-1 , the disturbance analyzer shall
provide the following additional inform ation (refer to Table F.1 for test details):
a) the number of clicks of duration equal to or less than 1 0 ms;
b) the number of clicks of duration greater than 1 0 ms but equal to or less than 20 m s;
c) the number of clicks of duration greater than 20 ms but equal to or less than 200 ms;
d) the duration of each registered disturbance the am plitude of which exceeds the QP level
lim it for continuous disturbance;
e) an indication that the appliance failed the test, if it is clear that it produces disturbances
other than clicks not corresponding to the definition of a click and to which none of the
exceptions can be applied;
f) the tim e interval from the start of the test to the occurrence of disturbances; m entioned
under e);
g) the total duration of disturbances other than clicks the QP level lim it of which exceeds the
lim it for continuous disturbance;
h) the click rate.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 69 –
500 m s
2 1 9, 5 1 click
≤1 0 m s
500 m s
3 1 1 0, 5 1 click
> 1 0 m s,
≤ 20 m s
500 m s
– 70 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Table F.1 (2 of 5)
500 m s
5 1 21 1 click
> 20 m s
500 m s
6 1 1 90 1 click
> 20 m s
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
7 5 5 21 0 21 0 1 50 IF
onl y once per
program cycle
or per
m inim um
observation
tim e: counted
as
1 click > 20 m s
(See E2 and
Note 1 of this
table, 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
1 s
900 1 00
600 m s rule)
OTHERWISE
Conti nu ous distu rbance (570 m s)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 71 –
Table F.1 (3 of 5)
630 m s > 1 s
600 m s)
9 5 5 1 90 1 90 1 90 IF
the final click
rate is less than
5:
2 clicks > 20 ms
(See E4 and
Note 1 of this
table;
refri gerator rule;
also see N ote 2 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
of this tabl e)
1 s
OTHERWISE IF
onl y once per program cycle or once du ri ng the
m inim um observati on tim e:
counted as 1 click > 20 m s
(see E2 and Note 1 of this tabl e)
OTHERWISE
Fail: contin uous disturbance (570 m s)
10 5 5 50 50 1 85 IF
the final click
rate is less than
5:
2 clicks > 20 ms
(See E4 and
Note 1 of this
table; also see
Note 2 of this
table) 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
1 s
– 72 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Table F.1 (4 of 5)
Table F.1 (5 of 5)
Test Evaluation by
No Test signal the analyzer
1 click >20 ms
6 1 90 ms/1 dB
1 click ≤ 600 ms
21 0 ms/5 dB 21 0 ms/5 dB
7 1 50 ms (DUT programme-controlled)
Continuous
8 220 ms/5 dB 220 ms/5 dB
1 90 ms ≥ 600 ms
1 click ≤ 600 ms
1 90 ms/5 dB 1 90 ms/5 dB (counted as 2 clicks
9 1 90 ms refrigerator rule)
for N <5 - 2 clicks
for N ≥5 - continuous, or
10 50 ms/5 dB 50 ms/5 dB 1 click ≤600 ms
1 85 ms for programme controlled DUT
IEC
Figu re F.1 – A graph ical presentation of the test sign al s used for
the performance ch eck of th e an alyzer with the addition al requirements
according to Table F. 1
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 75 –
Annex G
(informative)
Rationale for the specifications of the APD measuring function
The specifications are based on the following definitions and considerations:
a) Dynamic range of the amplitude
The d ynamic range of the amplitude is defined as the range necessary to obtain the APD.
The upper limit of the d ynamic range shall be greater than the peak level of disturbance to
be m easured and the lower limit shall be lower than the level of disturbance limit specified
by the product com mittees.
According to CI SPR 1 1 , the peak limit for group 2, class B, for I SM equipm ent is set at
1 1 0 dB( µ V/m), and the weighted limit is specified as 60 dB( µ V/m). Therefore, a d ynamic
range of greater than 60 dB is proposed, with a 1 0 dB m argin.
b) Sampling rate
I deall y, the APD of disturbances is m easured using the equivalent bandwidth of the radio
service to be protected. H owever, the spectrum anal yzer’s resolution bandwidth is
specified as 1 MH z for the frequency range above 1 GH z. The sampling rate shall
therefore be greater than 1 0 million samples per second.
c) M aximu m measurable time
CI SPR 1 1 specifies the maximum hold time as a 2 m in period for peak m easurements of
microwave cooking appliances above 1 GH z. Therefore, the measurable tim e for an APD
measurem ent shall be 2 m in minimum . Because the size of the counter or m em ory is
limited, continuous m easurem ents may be difficult for long m easurem ent periods.
Therefore, interm ittent measurem ents are allowed under the condition that the dead tim e
is less than 1 % of the total measurem ent tim e.
d) M inimum measurable probability
About 1 00 occurrences m ay be necessary to obtain a meaningful result. Therefore, the
minimum m easurable probability is calculated as follows:
assum ing 2 m in for the m easuring time and a 1 0-m illion-sam ples-per-second sam pling
rate, the probability is determ ined as:
1 00/(1 20 × 1 0 × 1 0 6 ) ± 1 0 –7
e) Display of APD measurement data
The amplitude resolution for the display of APD results depends on the d yn amic range and
the resolution of the A/D converter. For example, the resolution of the display com es to
less than 0, 25 dB ( ± 60 dB/256) when an 8-bit A/D converter is applied to a d ynamic range
of 60 dB.
Figures G. 1 and G.2 show block diagram s of im plementations of the APD m easurem ent
function.
I nput
Pre-assigned
l evel N o. 1
Pre-assigned
level N o. 2
Pre-assigned
level No. n
IEC
Fi gu re G . 1 – Block d i ag ram of APD m easu rem en t ci rcu i t with ou t A/D con verter
+1 increm ent
APD( i )
IEC
Figu re G .2 – Bl ock d i ag ram of APD m easu rem en t ci rcu it with A/D con verter
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 77 –
1 00
1 0 –4
1 0 –6
EUT: OFF
(receiver noise)
1 0 –8
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Am plitude dB( µV/m )
IEC
Annex H
(informative)
Characteristics of a quasi-peak measuring receiver
Table H .1 provides specifications of a quasi-peak measuring receiver. These specifications
describe the overall characteristics of such an instrum ent and do not describe the
specification of individual components and subassem blies of the instrum ent. The responses to
pulses as specified in 4. 4 are calculated on the basis of the measuring receivers having the
following fundam ental characteristics.
Frequ en cy band
Characteri sti cs Band A Band B Bands C and D
9 kHz to 1 50 kH z 0, 1 5 M H z to 30 M H z 30 MHz to 1 000 MHz
Band width at the –6 dB points, 0, 20 9 1 20
B 6 in kHz
Detector electrical charg e tim e 45 1 1
constant, in m s
Detector electrical discharg e ti m e 500 1 60 550
constant, in m s
Mech anical tim e constant of cri tically 1 60 1 60 1 00
dam ped in dicating instrum ent, in m s
Overload factor of circuits precedin g 24 30 43, 5
the detector, in dB
Overload factor of the d. c. am plifier
between detector and in dicatin g 6 12 6
instrum ent, in dB
NOTE 1 The d efiniti on of m echanical tim e constant (see 3. 8) assum es that the indicati ng instrum ent is linear,
i. e. eq ual i ncrem ents of cu rrent produce equ al increm ents of deflection. An i ndicati ng instrum ent h avi ng a
different rel ation between cu rrent and defl ection can be used provi ded that the i nstru m ent satisfies the
requirem ents of this subclause. I n an electronic instrum ent, the m echanical tim e-constant can be sim ulated by a
circuit.
NOTE 2 No tol erance is gi ven for the electrical an d m echanical tim e constants. The actual valu es used in a
specific recei ver are determ ined by th e d esign to m eet the req uirem ents in 4. 4.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 79 –
Annex I
(informative)
Example of EMI receiver and swept spectrum anal yzer architecture
This annex provides a brief description of the main differences between “EMI receivers” and
“swept spectrum anal yzers”, as far as this standard is concerned. Figure I . 1 illustrates an
example of the architecture of both types of instrum ents. The parts shaded in grey are
typicall y im plemented in test instrumentation to achieve compliance with specifications called
out in this standard.
NOTE Additional background inform ation is currentl y in preparati on for CI SPR 1 6-3.
Loudspeaker
Envelope
Attenuator Preselection Preamplifier Mixer IF bandwiths detector Detectors
Quasi-peak/
RF average
IF
e.g. 1 0 Hz-3 MHz
LO
Sweep Display
generator IEC
Figu re I.1 – Example block diagram of EM I receiver con si sti ng of swept spectru m
an al yzer with add ed preselector, preamplifi er and qu asi-peak/average detector
The main differences between the two instrum ent types are described below.
a) Swept spectrum anal yzers are scanning instruments, which tune their local oscillator (LO)
frequency continuously to cover the selected frequency range of interest. Some EMI
receivers perform a stepped sweep, i. e. the instrument is tuned to fixed frequencies, in
defined frequency step sizes, to cover the frequency range of interest. The amplitude at
each tuning frequency is measured and retained for further processing or display.
b) Most swept spectrum analyzers do not have preselection (i. e. filtering at the input) built
into the instrum ent before the first frequency conversion stage. This usuall y results in an
inadequate d ynam ic range for m easurem ents of low repetition frequency pulses with
quasi-peak detection and thus may lead to erroneous measurement results under these
circumstances.
c) Swept spectrum anal yzers with preselection are comm erciall y available. This type of
instrum ents m ay m eet all requirem ents called out in this standard and, in case of full
compliance with this standard, can be used without an y restrictions to perform em ission
measurem ents in accordance with CI SPR 1 6-2 series.
– 80 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Annex J
(normative)
Requirements when using an external
preamplifier with a measuring receiver
J.1 General
Therefore the operator of a measuring system that includes an external preamplifier shall
determ ine the limitations of the system and shall apply linearity checks for the test system .
Automated measurem ent results with external preamplifiers need to be verified using a final
m anual linearity check. The information given in this annex provides guidance for the user of
em ission measurem ent system s.
I nternall y, measuring receivers are designed to achieve optimum sensitivity while avoiding
overload. Built-in preselection in the m easuring receiver avoids overload by impulsive signals.
I n spite of preselection, measuring receivers usuall y have no linearity reserve for quasi -peak
measurem ents of a single pulse above the specified indication range. M issing preselection in
measuring receivers causes problems with quasi-peak detection of impulsive signals with low
PRF.
The use of an external broadband preamplifier shall be considered onl y after all other
possible measures for improving the system sensitivity have been exhausted, e. g. using
measuring receivers with bu ilt-in preamplifiers, using antennas of sufficient gain, or using low
loss connecting cables. An external pream plifier need onl y be added when the disturbance
limit and all of the em issions expected and emissions to be measured are very close to the
system noise level, e.g. for com pliance with Class 5 radiated disturbance limits of CI SPR 25
[1 4]. I f high em ission signals or high am bients are expected, external preamplifiers are not
recom mended.
From experience, external preamplifiers are not needed for radiated disturbance
measurem ents to Class B lim its of CI SPR 1 1 , CI SPR 22 [1 3] and CI SPR 32 [1 5], either at 3 m
or at 1 0 m m easurement distance, when measuring receivers with built-in preamplifiers
including preselection and low-loss antenna cables are used. The sam e situation applies for
radiated disturbance m easurements to CI SPR 1 4-1 , CI SPR 1 5 [1 ], and the generic emission
standards, as well as for disturbance power m easurements.
External preamplifiers are not recom mended for conducted disturbance m easurem ents below
30 MH z; their use m ay cause harm onics in the presence of high-level disturbance at
frequencies below 1 50 kH z, where m an y emission standards do not specify disturbance limits.
I f an external pream plifier is added for im proved sensitivity, the following needs to be
considered:
a) pream plifiers have a wide bandwidth, i. e. they are susceptible to overload by im pulsive
signals and high level narrowband signals;
– 82 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
b) pream plifiers may produce interm odulation products and harmonics; this is especiall y
important when measurements are m ade on an OATS and/or in the presence of radio
transmission equipment;
c) pream plifiers increase the signal level at the receiver input and thus may overload the
receiver input stages, a condition which cannot be avoided entirel y by the receiver’s built-
in preselection;
d) the gain in sensitivity wil l be less than the gain in signal level, thus lim iting the d ynam ic
range of the pream plifier/receiver combination;
NOTE 1 Th e g ain in sensitivity is u nderstood as th e differen ce between th e n oise fig ure wi thout pream plifier
and th e system noise figu re with pream plifier.
e) for maxim um sensitivity in the frequency range above 1 GH z, the pream plifier is
m ounted/connected directl y to the m easurement antenna;
f) use of an external preamplifier requires that an accurate gain versus frequency
characterization be accounted for in the measurement result;
g) the uncertainty of the gain as a function of temperature and aging, as well as the
additional m ismatch uncertainty between the pream plifier output port and the receiver
input port, shall be included in the uncertainty budget for the m easurem ent; the input
im pedance shall, as far as possible, compl y wi th the requirements for the measuring
receiver and shall be included in the uncertainty budget;
h) for CI SPR Band E, a system consisting of an external pream plifier and a m easuring
receiver shall be designed such that it cannot be overloaded by signals of lower frequency
bands, and/or by an y signal whose out-of-band or spurious signals are to be m easured;
e. g. the I SM signal of a m icrowave oven shall not drive the system into overload.
The gain in sensitivity is determined using the following quantities and equations:
Pie
F= and, (J.1 )
kT0 B
Po
for an amplifier, F = (J. 2)
gkT0 B
where
F is the noise factor, with 1 0 lg F = noise figure (often denoted by the sym bol NF);
Pie is the equivalent noise input power;
Po is the noise output power;
g is calculated from the gain, G = 1 0 lg g, respectively g = 1 0 G/1 0 ;
k is Boltzm ann’s constant = 1 , 38 × 1 0 –23 Ws/K and kT0 = 4 × 1 0 –21 W/Hz;
T0 is the absolute reference room temperature (293 K);
B is the noise bandwidth (e.g. of the measuring receiver).
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 83 –
Preamplifier Receiver
F1 , g1 F2
ac1 ac2
IEC
F2 − 1
1 0 lg Ftot = ac1 + 1 0 lg F1 + (J.3)
g1
where Ftot is the noise factor of the system at the input cable with a c1 .
I f a c2 ≠ 0 dB, then the preamplifier gain factor g1 in Equation (J .3) has to be replaced by
1 0 (G 1 – a c2 )/1 0 . Cable attenuation a c1 = 0 dB is achieved by m ounting and/or connecting the
preamplifier directl y to the antenna. I f a c1 ≠ 0 dB, then the cable attenuation a c1 adds to the
system noise figure as shown by Equation (J . 3).
NOTE 2 The noise fi gure 1 0 l g F2 of a m easuri ng recei ver can be d eterm ined from the in dicated n oise level usin g
1 0 lg F2 = VN av + 67 – 1 0 lg B N – w N av
where
VN av is the recei ver noise floor with linear average d etection, in dB( µV);
BN is the noise ban d wi dth of th e measuring recei ver, in Hz;
w N av is the noise wei ghtin g factor for l inear averag e detection, in d B.
EXAMPLE I f VN av = –1 0, 7 dB( µ V), B N = 85 kHz (for B 6 = 1 20 kH z), an d w N av = − 1 dB, then the n oise fi gure
1 0 lg F2 = 8 dB.
The quantity w Nav is the difference between the indications of the linear average detector and
the r. m.s. detector for Gaussian noise [21 ]; values for quasi-peak detection w Nq p are
approximatel y 4 dB for Band B, and 6 dB for Bands C/D; for peak detection w Npk is up to
1 2 dB, depending on measurem ent tim e.
The noise bandwidth B N is close to the 3 dB bandwidth B 3 of the m easuring receiver. A rough
approxim ation is given by B N = 1 ,1 B 3 . See [21 ] for details about specific filter
im plementations.
Considering a given pream plifier noise figure of 3 dB, it will be acceptable to achieve a
system noise figure 1 0 lg Ftot = 4 dB, corresponding to a noise factor of 2, 51 . This requires
that ( F2 – 1 )/g1 = 0, 51 , or g1 = ( F2 –1 )/0, 51 .
• For receivers with a built-in pream plifier, the resulting gain is g1 = 1 0, 39, or G1 = 1 0,2 dB.
– 84 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
• For receivers without a built-in preamplifier, the resulting gain is g1 = 60, or G 1 = 1 7, 8 dB.
For a receiver without a built-in pream plifier, as described above, an external pream plifier with
a noise figure of 3 dB and a gain of 1 0 dB will give a system noise figure of 7 dB.
From the preceding exam ples, it can be seen that an improvement in sensitivity of 4 dB
requires a signal gain of around 1 0 dB for a receiver with a built-in pream plifier. For a receiver
without a built-in preamplifier, an improvement in sensitivity of 1 1 dB requires a signal gain of
alm ost 1 8 dB, and an improvem ent of 8 dB requires a signal gain of 1 0 dB. I t is evident that a
system noise figure of 3,5 dB cannot easil y be achieved with a pream plifier noise figure of
3 dB, because an excessive preamplifier gain would be necessary. Refer to Table J.1 for
exam ple noise figures.
Because it will severel y limit the system’s linearity perform ance, it is not advisable to use
preamplifiers with a gain of 30 dB or more.
An exam ple screenshot of the transfer function of an amplifier is shown in Figure J . 2. The
response of such an am plifier using a sinusoidal signal in tim e dom ain and frequency domain
is shown in Figure J . 3. The numbers on the axes in Figures J. 2, J. 3 and J. 4 are generic in
nature (quantization values) and do not represent specific units.
Figure J. 3 shows that the sinusoidal signal is distorted in time domain, which is due to the
nonlinear effects of the preamplifier. The frequency domain display shows that the level is
decreased at 1 00 MH z, and that further harmonics exist. A corresponding simulation for a
broadband pulse is shown in Figure J. 4.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 85 –
1 000
800
600
1 40
1 40
1 000
1 000
1 20
1 20
Relative level (dB)
500
Quantized values
500
1 00
1 00
Relative Level in dB
Quantized Values
00 8080
-500
-500 6060
4040
-1 000
-1 000
2020
11 50
50 200
200 250
250
Sample n
300
3 00 350
3 50 400
400
1100
00 200
200 3 00
300 400
400 500
500 600
600 700
700
Frequency / MHz
Sample n Frequency (MHz)
IEC IEC
Green = n orm ali zed i nput sign al; red = output sign al
1 400
1 400
9090
1 200
1 200
8080
1 000
1 000
7070
Quantized values
800800
Relative Level in dB
6060
600600
5050
400400
4040
200200
00 303 0
-200
-200
2020
4 4980
980 44985
985 44990
990 44995
995 55000
000 55005
005 5501
Sample n
0100 5501015 5 5020
5 020 5025
5 025 00 500
500 1 1000
000
11 500
Frequency 500
/ MHz 22000
000 22500
500
Sample n Frequency (MHz)
IEC IEC
Green = n orm ali zed i nput sign al; red = output sign al
Comparing Figures J. 3 and J . 4, it can be seen that the saturation level in the time domain is
exactl y the same. H owever in the frequency dom ain the effects of saturation of the external
preamplifier are different. For the impulsive signal, the amplitude level is decreased,
invalidating the measurem ent result. For sinusoidal signals, the am plitude of the fundamental
is decreased, while further harm onics are generated by the nonlinear effect of the external
preamplifier; the measurem ent result is also invalidated.
The perform ance of the system , i. e. system noise level and overload capability, will depend
on the characteristics of both the preamplifier and the m easuring receiver. For narrowband
signals, generall y the 1 dB compression point of the preamplifier output exceeds the 1 dB
com pression point of the m easuring receiver input. Preselection of the m easuring receiver will
im prove system linearity for the measurem ent of broadband impulsive signals. Therefore, two
types of systems are taken into consideration: system s with, and without, preselection at the
measuring receiver input.
A broadband overload detector, which is effective at the input of some measuring receivers
without preselection, is used to detect signal levels at the 1 dB com pression point of the first
mixer, to alert the user of linearity problem s. The overload detector can also be used as an
indicator to assure valid m easurem ent results. Similar overload detection is recommended for
wideband FFT based measuring system s to avoid over-range of the wideband A/D converter
(see J. 4).
Further precautions for measurements include a prediction of the available overload factor for
the measurem ent of impulsive disturbances. Apart from gain versus frequency and noise
figure, the 1 dB compression point of the preamplifier and the com plete system , consisting of
pream plifier and m easuring receiver, shall be specified. For CI SPR Bands C/D, the
relationship between the 1 dB compression point for sine wave signals and the peak value of
the broadband CI SPR pulse signal with a bandwidth of 2 GH z gives a bandwidth factor Fbw of
85 dB [ Fbw = 20 lg(2 000/0, 1 2)]. Figures J. 5 and J. 6 show the deviations from linearity of a
preamplifier with a 1 dB compression point of 1 1 2 dB( µ V), for an unmodulated sine wave and
im pulsive signals.
-2,50
deviation
Deviation
-3,00
-3,50
-4,00
-4,50
-5,00
-5,50
1 00 1 02 1 04 1 06 1 08 110 112 114 116 118 1 20
Input
Inputlevel / dB (μ V)
Level/dB(uV)
IEC
Figu re J.5 – Deviation from linear gain for an u nmodu lated sine wave (example)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 87 –
0
-0,5
-1
-1 ,5
-2
/ dB
Deviation/dB
-2,5 Deviation for pos. pulse
NOTE Using Fbw = 85 dB, the peak val ue of the positi ve pu lse sign al with a PRF of 1 00 Hz is at arou nd
37 dB( µ V) + 1 2 dB + 85 dB = 1 34 dB( µ V), i. e. arou nd 22 dB above the 1 dB com pressi on point of Fig ure J . 5.
1 2 dB is the quasi peak weighti ng factor, i. e. the difference between peak and qu asi peak for a PRF of 1 00 H z.
Figu re J.6 – Devi ati on from l in ear g ain for a broadban d impu l sive sign al
as measured with the quasi-peak detector (exampl e)
The flatness of the deviation curve for positive pulses in Figure J. 6 is m isleading, because the
amplifier nonlinearity is masked by the amplifier’s own intermodulation products. This effect
can be demonstrated using a band-stop filter with a notch depth of greater than 40 dB (band-
stop filter as specified in 4. 6) at the input of the pream plifier. For an acceptable operation
(error contribution less than 1 dB by intermodulation), the notch depth shall remain at least
20 dB during the interm odulation test. The value of 20 dB is obtained with quasi-peak
m easurements at a PRF of 1 00 H z; the PRF of 1 00 H z is a comprom ise.
I deall y the 20 dB notch depth would be needed for quasi-peak measurem ents at all PRFs.
This is shown in Figure J .7 for the preamplifier used above with 1 0 dB gain, where the 20 dB
depth is retained as long as the peak level of the input signal is less than 37 dB( µ V), and the
peak level of the output signal is less than 46 dB( µ V) (blue curve). For a PRF of 1 00 H z, a
peak level of 37 dB( µ V) corresponds to a quasi-peak level of 25 dB( µ V). Thus while the 1 dB
com pression point for the broadband im pulsive signal in Figure J. 6 “positive pulse” looks like
being at 37 dB( µ V) quasi-peak, the pream plifier is alread y overloaded. The input signal
should be at least 1 2 dB lower, i. e. at 25 dB( µ V) quasi-peak, to avoid excessive
intermodulation.
I n Figure J. 6 the “positive pulse” also shows that a simple overload test with a switchable
1 0 dB attenuator at the preamplifier input may not properl y indicate the overload in case of
impulsive signals, because the output level can still follow the input level, while the
pream plifier input signal is up to 20 dB above the 1 dB com pression point. The sim ple test
may work for sine wave signals. A better characterization of the system with respect to
im pulsive signals is obtained using the band-stop filter interm odulation test. I f the band-stop
filter intermodulation test is not available, the 1 dB com pression point of the pream plifier,
referred to its input, should be used to characterize the system .
NOTE The ban d-stop filter in term odulati on test is inten ded to characteri ze the system , e. g. done by th e system
provi der. I t woul d be im practical to use a ban d-stop filter test in each EMC test lab du rin g an em ission test.
Note that during the band-stop filter intermodulation test, it shall be assured that the
measuring receiver used as an indicator at the output of the preamplifier is not overloaded.
Figure J. 8 shows that the notch depth result from a CI SPR interm odulation test of a
measuring receiver with preselection still exceeds 30 dB with an input signal (quasi peak) of
55 dB( µ V), which corresponds to an input level (quasi peak) of 45 dB( µ V) to a 1 0 dB
preamplifier. Using a m easuring receiver with built-in broadband pream plifer may not show
– 88 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
the linearity of the external pream plifier correctl y, due to overload of the measuring receiver,
as shown in Figure J. 9 and J. 1 0, whereas with preselection the output will be linear.
90
1 PK
VIEW 80
2 PK
VIEW 70
3 PK
CLRWR 60
50
6DB
40 DC
30
1
20
10
90
1 PK
VIEW 80
2 PK
CLRWR 70
60
50
6DB
40 DC
30
20
10
Figure J.8 – Band-stop filter test result with the measuring receiver at 81 8 M Hz
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 89 –
IEC
Figu re J. 9 – Band-stop filter test resu lts for th e same 1 0 dB preampl ifi er bu t a differen t
receiver with presel ecti on (black) an d without preselection (blu e)
IEC
NOTE A 1 5 dB atten uator between extern al pream plifier an d recei ver was used to avoid overl oad of the recei ver
without preselecti on; however the recei ver’s noise l evel then h ides the n otch.
When an external broadband pream plifier is used with a m easuring receiver, the user cannot
expect proper weighting of broadband impulsive signals by such a m easuring system using
average, rm s-average and quasi-peak detection at low pulse repetition frequencies.
Therefore, the user shall determ ine the operating range between noise level and the 1 dB
compression point for broadband im pulsive signals for the peak detector of the measurement
– 90 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
system . This determ ination allows a prediction of the lowest PRF for proper weighting of
broadband impulsive signals using each individual detector.
Figure J .1 1 shows the weighting functions of the detectors specified in CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 for
CI SPR Bands C/D, and an example ‘N oise’ line to illustrate the operating range between
noise level and 1 dB com pression point. I n the exam ple, the peak detector noise level is
1 5 dB below the 1 dB compression point. For the quasi-peak detector, the noise level is
approxim atel y 5 dB lower, i. e. the operating range is approximatel y 5 dB wider. For the rms-
average and average detectors, the noise level is approxim ately 1 0 dB lower, which increases
the operating range to about 25 dB in the exam ple.
To draw the noise line shown in Figure J .1 1 , the peak level Vp is used from the band-stop
filter test in Figure J. 7 and the average detector noise level VNav determ ined. The difference
Vp – VN av m arks the crossing of the “N oise” line with the “Average” line. For the 1 0 dB
pream plifier above, Vp = 37 dB( µ V), VN av = –1 4 dB( µ V) for a noise figure of 4 dB and Vp – VNav
= 51 dB. The noise line in Figure J. 1 1 is drawn from an exam ple where Vp – VN av = 27 dB.
-20
Noise
-30
Quasi-Peak
-40
-50
Average
RMS-AV
-60
fp /Hz
-70
1 10 1 00 1 000 1 0 000 1 00 000 1 000 000
IEC
Figure J.1 1 – Weighting functions of the variou s CISPR detectors with a noise curve to
illustrate the remaining operating ranges for broadband impulsive signals (example)
From Figure J . 1 1 , the critical PRF can be seen at which the impulsive signal level, with peak
level at the 1 dB compression point, is equal to the noise level. H owever for an accurate
m easurem ent, the signal level needs to be approxim atel y 6 dB above the noise level (the
actual value depends on the PRF). As a consequence, in this exam ple quasi-peak
m easurem ents can be carried out above a PRF of about 60 H z. For the rm s-average and
average detectors, the critical PRFs are near 1 kH z and 1 0 kH z, respectivel y. For practical
m easurem ents, a linearity check is recomm ended using the weighting factor at the critical
PRF. For this exam ple, the linearity check is as follows:
a) For the quasi-peak measurement: the critical PRF of 60 H z is exceeded if the difference
between peak and quasi-peak values is less than 1 5 dB.
b) For the rm s-average and average measurem ents: the critical PRFs of 1 kH z and 1 0 kH z
are exceeded if the difference between peak and rm s-average or average detector results
are less than 20 dB.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 91 –
However, if the m easurements are made close to the noise level, the differences might be
reduced by the noise level, which will give the im pression of PRFs higher than actual.
Detecting whether the pream plifier is in the linear range during the measurement can be
perform ed for sinusoidal as well as im pulsive signals, by taking the maximum of the
preamplifier output signal then comparing it with a given threshold level corresponding to the
1 dB compression point. The maxim um (positive) and m inim um (negative) voltage of the
signal in the tim e domain shall be sam pled continuousl y during the m easurem ent time, and
com pared to that threshold level. The 1 dB compression point is defined for a sinusoidal
signal yielding an output 1 dB lower than expected, as shown in Figure J. 5.
During a measurem ent, a measuring apparatus that digitizes the signal of the output of the
external preamplifier can be used to detect whether an over-range has occurred. For the
preceding example, a threshold level of a norm alized value in Figure J . 2 ‘I nput’ of about 900
would be appropriate to avoid nonlinear effects. The threshold level should be identified by
the system m anufacturer depending on the application. For example, the measurement of
harm onics of intentional radiators requires a better linearity (lower threshold) than the
measurem ent of im pulsive disturbance. A measuring apparatus that digitizes the input signal
shall fulfil the following requirem ents, to allow a correct decision:
a) continuous (gapless) acquisition during the m easurement tim e;
b) selectable threshold level;
c) broadband acquisition of the entire m easurem ent band, e. g. up to 1 GH z.
Typical instruments that fulfil such requirem ents include broadband FFT-based measurement
instruments with over-range detection, as described in CI SPR TR 1 6-3, and oscilloscopes in
single-shot trigger m ode. Over-range detection is used to avoid exceeding the operating
range of the wideband A/D converter.
– 92 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Annex K
(normative)
Calibration requirements for measuring receivers
K.1 General
When perform ing EMI measurem ents it is essential to use measuring equipm ent that meets
the specifications called out in this standard such that the expected measurem ent
instrumentation uncertainty for conducted and radiated disturbance measurem ents as well as
disturbance power measurements can be achieved. I n addition, the results of these
m easurements shall be traceable (see 3. 1 7) to national or internationall y accepted standards.
These requirements can be met by selecting measuring equipm ent that is correctl y calibrated.
The calibration requirements described in this annex are onl y applicable to the test
instrumentation (i.e. EMI receivers and spectrum anal ysers) covered in this standard.
The EM C test laboratory is responsible for the selection and use of adequate m easuring
equipment as well as the purchase of accredited (or otherwise deem ed appropriate)
calibration services. A clear understanding of the calibration requirements related to
m easuring equipm ent is essential to determ ine the necessary specifics of calibration service
in the purchasing process and to review the obtained service upon receipt of th e equipment
back from the calibration laboratory, before it is placed back into service at the test
laboratory.
The calibration process itself does not necessarily require the instrum ent under calibration to
be adj usted. However, adjustm ents may be required if the calibration process determ ines that
the instrument does not meet the manufacturer’s specifications. The goal of the instrum ent
calibration process is the determination of com pliance of a m easuring receiver under
calibration with its published specifications in a traceable manner (see 3. 1 7).
“Verification” should not be confused with “intermediate checks” (also called confidence
checks); the latter consists of a set of operations aimed at providing evidence of the proper
functioning of a test instrum ent. An intermediate check of a measuring receiver can differ
considerabl y from the calibration process because the purpose of these two activities is
entirel y different.
Calibration of a m easuring receiver requires a specific process that defines the various
measurem ents to determine if the receiver m eets its specifications. I n general, this calibration
process has also been used by the receiver m anufacturer to establish the receiver
specifications. Therefore, onl y the manufacturer’s calibration process or verification process
in accordance with this standard shall be applied by a calibration laboratory or test laboratory
perform ing its own calibrations to determine whether the receiver m eets its specifications at
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 93 –
the time of calibration or the requirem ents called out in this standard. This requirement
applies to m easuring receivers onl y.
The calibration process for measuring receivers also defines the following essential
parameters that shall be used for proper calibration:
a) the specific set-up of the receiver under calibration for each m easurem ent in the
calibration process (e. g. in the case of an EMI receiver or spectrum analyzer the tuning
frequency, attenuator setting, resolution bandwidth setting, and other param eters, for each
m easurement to be performed);
b) the required test set-up for the measurem ent of a specific parameter (e. g. the use of
power splitters for ratio measurem ents and an y other required m easuring equipm ent);
c) the required accuracy of measuring equipment used to perform the measurements of the
calibration process (e. g. required am plitude accuracy and frequency accuracy);
d) the actual number of measurements to be perform ed and their sequence. For m an y types
of measuring receiver this sequence is mandatory and cannot be changed because the
m easurements of som e param eters require the m easurements of previous calibration
parameters to be completed. I n addition, it is possible that the interpretation of a test
result for a calibration param eter is dependent on the test result of a previous
m easurement in the calibration sequence;
e) the required environmental conditions (e. g. required ambient temperature and relative
humidity), if deemed necessary by the manufacturer.
Onl y if the manufacturer’s calibration process is used can the results of the calibration
m easurements be com pared to the published specifications. Consequentl y, the calibration
laboratory or the test laboratory perform ing its own calibrations (also called internal
calibrations) should use the m anufacturer’s calibration process for a specific measuring
receiver. I f an alternative process is used, it shall be verifiabl y validated and it shall be stated
in the calibration certificate that this process deviates from th e calibration process defined by
the manufacturer.
This standard specifies measuring receiver requirem ents using a “black box” approach. This
means that the instrum ent shall show a specific response when a defined signal is applied to
its input. Therefore, the dem onstration of com pliance of m easuring receivers with
specifications defined in this standard can be provided through the manufacturer’s calibration
process or the procedures and m easuring equipment defined in this stand ard.
The param eters summarized in Table K. 1 are onl y applicable to the frequency ranges covered
by the instrum ent under verification and its im plemented detector functions. Specifics
described in the referenced subclauses appl y in their entirety as well as the stated tolerances.
I t is to be noted that the requirem ents called out in this standard constitute a subset of all the
specifications the receiver manufacturer publishes. I n addition, some requirements in this
standard may be stated in a way that differs from the m anufacturer’s specifications (e. g. CW
frequency accuracy in this standard versus a combination of absolute am plitude accuracy at a
reference frequency and frequency response).
I f evidence of com pliance with the requirem ents presented in this standard cannot be directl y
provided through the manufacturer’s calibration process, due to differences in the form of the
stated specifications, the verification of these requirem ents shall be requested by the test
laboratory in addition to the actual receiver calibration based on the m anufacturer’s calibration
process.
specifications. The application of measurem ent uncertainty to a m easurement result can lead
to one of the four cases described as follows and depicted in Figure K. 1 :
a) the m easurem ent result is within the specified lim it range by a m argin larger than the
expanded uncertainty value applicable to the calibration measurem ent;
b) the measurement result is within the specified limit range by a m argin less than the
expanded uncertainty value applicable to the calibration measurem ent;
c) the m easurem ent result is outside of the specified limit range by a margin less than the
expanded uncertainty value applicable to the calibration m easurement; or
d) the m easurem ent result is outside of the specified lim it range by a margin larger than the
expanded uncertainty value applicable to the calibration measurem ent, and the
specification is not met.
Upper lim it
Measurem ent
result
Expand ed
uncertainty rang e
Lower lim it
a) specification is m et;
b) and c) the result is inconclusive, a definitive com pliance statem ent is not possible;
Bibliography
[1 ] CI SPR 1 5, Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of
electrical lighting and similar equipment
[3] CI SPR 1 6-1 -3: 2004, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 1 -3: Radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus – A ncillary equipment – Disturbance power
[5] CI SPR 1 6-1 -5: 201 4, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 1 -5: Radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus – A ntenna calibration sites and reference test sites for 5 MHz to 1 8 GHz
[6] CI SPR 1 6-2 (all parts), Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods
[7] CI SPR 1 6-2-4: 2003, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 2-4: Methods of measurement of disturbances an d
immunity – Immunity measurements
[8] CI SPR 1 6-4 (all parts), Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods
[9] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-1 : 2009, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-1 : Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Uncertainties in standardized EMC tests (onl y available in English)
[1 1 ] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-3: 2004, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-3: Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Statistical considerations in the determination of EMC compliance of mass-produced
products
[1 2] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-4: 2007, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-4: Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Statistics of complaints and a model for the calculation of limits for the protection of
radio services
[1 4] CI SPR 25, Vehicles, boats and internal combustion engines – Radio disturbance
characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement for the protection of on-board
receivers
[21 ] SABAROFF, S., Impulse excitation of a cascade of series tuned circuits, Proceedings of
the I RE, Decem ber 1 944, vol. 32, p. 758-760 (onl y available in English)
____________
– 98 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
SOMMAIRE
AVANT-PROPOS . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 1 04
I NTRODUCTI ON .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 1 06
1 Dom aine d’application .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 1 07
2 Références norm atives . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... . 1 07
3 Term es et définitions . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 1 08
4 Récepteurs de mesure de quasi-crête pour la plage de fréquences de 9 kH z à
1 000 MH z .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... . 1 1 2
4. 1 Généralités .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 1 2
4. 2 I mpédance d'entrée .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 1 3
4. 3 Précision de la tension sinusoïdale ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... .. 1 1 3
4. 4 Réponses aux im pulsions . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 1 3
4. 4. 1 Réponse en am plitude (étalonnage absolu) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . 1 1 3
4. 4. 2 Variations en fonction de la fréquence de répétition (étalonnage relatif) .. ... . 1 1 3
4. 5 Sélectivité .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 1 9
4. 5. 1 Sélectivité globale (bande passante) . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... 1 1 9
4. 5. 2 Taux de rejet à la fréquence intermédiaire . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... 1 20
4. 5. 3 Taux de rejet à la fréquence conj uguée .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... 1 20
4. 5. 4 Autres réponses parasites . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 22
4. 6 Lim itation des effets d'interm odulation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. 1 23
4. 7 Lim itation du bruit du récepteur et des signaux parasites internes .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 24
4. 7. 1 Bruit aléatoire .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . . 1 24
4. 7. 2 Onde entretenue . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 24
4. 8 Efficacité d'écran . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 24
4. 8. 1 Généralités . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... ... 1 24
4. 8. 2 Lim itation des émissions radioélectriques produites par le récepteur de
m esure .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 25
4. 9 Moyens de branchem ent à un anal yseur de perturbations discontinues .. ... ... ... ... 1 25
5 Récepteurs de mesure avec détecteur de crête pour la plage de fréquences
com prises entre 9 kH z et 1 8 GH z . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 25
5. 1 Généralités .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 25
5. 2 I mpédance d'entrée .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 25
5. 3 Caractéristiques fondam entales .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 26
5. 3. 1 Largeur de bande .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 26
5. 3. 2 Rapport des constantes de temps de charge et de décharge . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 26
5. 3. 3 Réserve de linéarité. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 27
5. 4 Précision de la tension sinusoïdale ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... .. 1 27
5. 5 Réponses aux im pulsions . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 27
5. 6 Sélectivité .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 28
5. 7 Effets d'interm odulation, bruit du récepteur et blindage . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 28
6 Récepteurs de mesure avec détecteur de valeur moyenne pour la plage de
fréquences com prises entre 9 kH z et 1 8 GH z .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... .. 1 29
6. 1 Généralités .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 29
6. 2 I mpédance d'entrée .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 29
6. 3 Caractéristiques fondam entales .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 29
6. 3. 1 Largeur de bande .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 29
6. 3. 2 Réserve de linéarité. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 30
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 99 –
6. 4 Précision de la tension sinusoïdale ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... .. 1 30
6. 5 Réponses aux im pulsions . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 30
6. 5. 1 Généralités . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... ... 1 30
6. 5. 2 Réponse en amplitude .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 30
6. 5. 3 Variation avec la fréquence de répétition ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... 1 31
6. 5. 4 Réponse aux perturbations à bande étroite interm ittentes, instables et
dérivantes... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... ... 1 32
6. 6 Sélectivité .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 33
6. 7 Effets d'interm odulation, bruit du récepteur et blindage . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 34
7 Récepteurs de mesure avec détecteur de valeur moyenne efficace pour la plage
de fréquences com prises entre 9 kH z et 1 8 GH z . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... 1 34
7. 1 Généralités .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 34
7. 2 I mpédance d'entrée .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 34
7. 3 Caractéristiques fondam entales .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 35
7. 3. 1 Largeur de bande .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 35
7. 3. 2 Réserve de linéarité. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 35
7. 4 Précision de la tension sinusoïdale ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... .. 1 36
7. 5 Réponses aux im pulsions . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 36
7. 5. 1 Détails de construction . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 36
7. 5. 2 Réponse en amplitude .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 36
7. 5. 3 Variation avec la fréquence de répétition ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... 1 37
7. 5. 4 Réponse aux perturbations à bande étroite interm ittentes, instables et
dérivantes... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... ... 1 38
7. 6 Sélectivité .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 38
7. 7 Effets d'interm odulation, bruit du récepteur et blindage . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 38
8 Récepteurs de mesure pour la plage de fréquences com prises entre 1 GH z et
1 8 GH z avec fonction de mesure de la distribution de probabilité des amplitudes
(DPA) . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... ... . 1 39
9 Anal yseurs de perturbations . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 40
9. 1 Généralités .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 40
9. 2 Caractéristiques fondam entales .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 40
9. 3 Méthode d'essai pour la validation de la vérification des caractéristiques de
l'anal yseur de claquement . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 49
9. 3. 1 Exigences fondam entales .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 1 49
9. 3. 2 Exigences supplém entaires .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 50
Annexe A (normative) Détermination de la réponse aux im pulsions répétées des
récepteurs de m esure de quasi-crête et de valeur m oyenne efficace (voir 3. 6, 4. 4. 2,
7. 3. 2 et 7. 5. 1 ) ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... 1 51
A. 1 Généralités .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 51
A. 2 Réponse des étages précédant le détecteur .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... 1 51
A. 3 Réponse du voltm ètre détecteur de quasi-crête aux signaux en sortie de
l'étage précédent . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 52
A. 3.1 Généralités . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... ... 1 52
A. 3.2 Réponse de l'appareil indicateur au signal issu du détecteur . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 53
A. 4 Réponse d'un détecteur de valeur efficace à la tension de sortie des étages
précédents . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. 1 54
A. 4.1 Relation entre tension de sortie et réponse en amplitude .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 54
A. 4.2 Calcul de la réserve de linéarité ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... .. 1 55
A. 5 Correspondance entre les indications d'un indicateur de valeur efficace et
celles d'un indicateur de quasi-crête ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... 1 55
– 1 00 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Annexe K (norm ative) Exigences d’étalonnage des récepteurs de mesure .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 99
K. 1 Généralités .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 99
K. 2 Étalonnage et vérification... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 1 99
K. 3 Spécificités de l’étalonnage et de la vérification .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... . 1 99
K. 4 Spécificités du récepteur de m esure ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... .. 200
K. 5 Étalonnage partiel des récepteurs de mesure .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . . 201
K. 6 Détermination de la conform ité d'un récepteur de mesure aux spécifications
applicables .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 201
Bibliographie ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. 204
Figure 1 – Courbe de réponse aux impulsions (Bande A) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . 1 1 4
Figure 2 – Courbe de réponse aux impulsions (Bande B) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . 1 1 5
Figure 3 – Courbe de réponse aux impulsions (Bandes C et D) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 1 6
Figure 4 – Courbe de réponse théorique aux impulsions de récepteurs à détecteur de
quasi-crête et de valeur moyenne (voir 6. 5. 4) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 1 8
Figure 5 – Lim ites de la sélectivité globale – Bande passante (voir 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7.6)
(Bande A) ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 21
Figure 6 – Lim ites de la sélectivité globale – Bande passante (voir 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7.6)
(Bande B) ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 21
Figure 7 – Lim ites de la sélectivité globale – Bande passante (voir 4. 5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7.6)
(Bandes C et D) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... . 1 22
Figure 8 – Schém a pour l'essai des effets d'intermodulation . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 23
Figure 9 – Lim ites pour la sélectivité globale – Bande passante (Bande E) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 28
Figure 1 0 – Schéma fonctionnel d'un détecteur de valeur moyenne ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 32
Figure 1 1 – Capture d'écran m ontrant la réponse du réseau de sim ulation de l'appareil
de mesure à un signal à bande étroite intermittent ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 33
Figure 1 2 – Exem ple d'un anal yseur des perturbations . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 43
Figure 1 3 – Présentation graphique des signaux d'essai utilisés pour la vérification des
perform ances de l'anal yseur par rapport à la définition d'un claquement conformém ent
au Tableau 1 4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 45
Figure E. 1 – Facteur de correction d'estim ation du rapport B im p /B 6 dans le cas de
circuits accordés d'autres types ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 63
Figure E. 2 – Coefficient de rectification des im pulsions P .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. 1 65
Figure E. 3 – Exem ple (capture d'écran de spectre) de signal à m odulation d'impulsion
avec une largeur d'impulsion de 200 ns . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 67
Figure E. 4 – Signal RF à m odulation d'impulsion appliqué à un récepteur de mesure .. ... ... . 1 68
Figure E. 5 – Filtrage avec une B imp nettement inférieure à la PRF .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 68
Figure E. 6 – Filtrage avec une B imp nettement plus large que la PRF .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 69
Figure E. 7 – Calcul de la largeur de bande d'impulsion . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... . 1 70
Figure E. 8 – Exem ple de fonction de sélectivité linéaire normalisée ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 71
Figure F. 1 – Présentation graphique des signaux d'essai utilisés pour le contrôle des
perform ances de l'anal yseur avec exigences com plém entaires conform ément au
Tableau F. 1 . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... .. 1 79
Figure G. 1 – Schém a fonctionnel du circuit de m esure de DPA sans convertisseur A/N . ... .. 1 81
Figure G. 2 – Schém a fonctionnel du circuit de m esure de DPA avec convertisseur A/N . ... .. 1 81
Figure G. 3 – Exemple d'affichage de m esure de DPA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... . 1 82
– 1 02 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Tableau 1 3 – Fréquence m inimale de répétition d'impulsion sans surcharge ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 36
Tableau 1 4 – Réponse im pulsionnelle relative des récepteurs de mesure en valeur
moyenne efficace et en quasi-crête .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 37
Tableau 1 5 – Réponse impulsionnelle des récepteurs de m esure en valeur moyenne
efficace . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 37
Tableau 1 6 – Valeur m aximale des récepteurs de valeur m oyenne efficace pour une
entrée sinusoïdale à modulation d'im pulsion com parée à la réponse à une onde
sinusoïdale continue de mêm e am plitude . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 1 38
Tableau 1 7 – Essais de performance de l'anal yseur de perturbations – Signaux
d'essais utilisés pour la vérification par rapport à la définition d'un claquem ent (1 de 4) ... .. 1 46
Tableau B. 1 – Caractéristiques du générateur d'impulsions .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 57
Tableau E. 1 – Valeurs de B im p et A imp pour un récepteur de mesure de crête . ... ... ... ... .. ... . 1 65
Tableau E. 2 – N iveau de porteuse pour un signal m odulé en impulsion de 1 , 4 nVs ... ... ... ... . 1 66
Tableau F.1 – Signaux d'essai de l'anal yseur de perturbations a (1 de 6) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 73
Tableau H. 1 – Caractéristiques des récepteurs de m esure de quasi-crête . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 83
Tableau J. 1 – Exem ples de données de préam plificateur et de récepteur de m esure et
facteurs de bruit du systèm e obtenus .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 89
Tableau K. 1 – Récapitulatif des param ètres de vérification ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 201
– 1 04 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
___________
La Norm e internationale CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 a été établie par le sous-com ité A du CI SPR: Mesures
des perturbations radioélectriques et m éthodes statistiques.
Cette quatrième édition annule et remplace la troisièm e édition parue en 201 0, l'Am endement
1 : 201 0 et l'Amendem ent 2: 201 4. Cette édition constitue une révision technique.
La m odification technique majeure suivante par rapport à l'édition précédente porte sur l'ajout
d'une nouvelle Annexe norm ative relative aux exigences d'étalonnage des récepteurs de
mesure.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 05 –
Elle a le statut de publication fondamentale en CEM en accord avec le Guide 1 07 de l'I EC,
Compatibilité électromagnétique – Guide pour la rédaction des publications sur la
compatibilité électromagnétique .
Le rapport de vote indiqué dans le tableau ci-dessus donne toute inform ation sur le vote ayant
abouti à l'approbation de cette norme.
Cette publication a été rédigée selon les Directives I SO/I EC, Partie 2.
Une liste de toutes les parties de la série CI SPR 1 6, publiées sous le titre général
Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et
de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques , peut être consultée sur le site web de l'I EC.
Le com ité a décidé que le contenu de cette publication ne sera pas m odifié avant la date de
stabilité indiquée sur le site web de l’I EC sous "http: //webstore. iec.ch" dans les données
relatives à la publication recherchée. A cette date, la publication sera
• reconduite,
• supprimée,
• remplacée par une édition révisée, ou
• amendée.
I NTRODUCTI ON
La série CI SPR 1 6, publiée sous le titre général Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils
de mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations
radioélectriques com prend les norm es et les rapports suivants:
• CI SPR 1 6-1 – six parties traitant des spécifications des appareils de m esure;
• CI SPR 1 6-2 – cinq parties traitant des méthodes de m esure;
• CI SPR 1 6-3 – une seule publication contenant différents rapports techniques (TR)
avec des informations sur le contexte de la CI SPR et sur les perturbations
radioélectriques en général;
• CI SPR 1 6-4 – cinq parties traitant des incertitudes, des statistiques et de la
m odélisation des limites.
La CI SPR 1 6-1 est constituée des cinq parties suivantes, publiées sous le titre général
Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et
de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques – Appareils de mesure des perturbations
radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques:
– Partie 1 -1 : Appareils de m esure
– Partie 1 -2: M atériels auxiliaires – Perturbations conduites
– Partie 1 -3: M atériels auxiliaires – Puissance perturbatrice
– Partie 1 -4: Matériels auxiliaires – Perturbations rayonnées
– Partie 1 -5: Em placements d'étalonnage d'antenne et em placements d'essai de référence
pour la plage comprise entre 5 MH z et 1 8 GH z
– Partie 1 -6: Étalonnage des antennes CEM
La Commission Electrotechnique I nternationale (I EC) attire l'attention sur le fait qu'il est
déclaré que la conform ité avec les dispositions du présent document peut impliquer
l'utilisation d'un brevet intéressant le récepteur de m esure avec détecteur de valeur moyenne
efficace (brevet DE 1 01 26830) traité à l'Article 7.
L'I EC ne prend pas position quant à la preuve, à la validité et à la portée de ces droits de
propriété.
Le détenteur de ces droits de propriété a donné l'assurance à l'I EC qu'il consent à négocier
des licences avec des dem andeurs du m onde entier, soit sans frais soit à des termes et
conditions raisonnables et non discrim inatoires. À ce propos, la déclaration du détenteur des
droits de propriété est enregistrée à l'I EC. Des informations peuvent être demandées à:
L'attention est d'autre part attirée sur le fait que certains des élém ents du présent document
peuvent faire l'objet de droits de propriété autres que ceux qui ont été m entionnés ci -dessus.
L'I EC ne saurait être tenue pour responsable de l'identification de ces droits de propriété en
tout ou partie.
L'I SO (www. iso.org/patents) et l'I EC (http: //patents. iec.ch) maintiennent des bases de
données, consultables en ligne, des droits de propriété pertinents à leurs normes. Les
utilisateurs sont encouragés à consulter ces bases de données pour obtenir l'inform ation la
plus récente concernant les droits de propriété.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 07 –
1 Domaine d’application
La présente partie de la CI SPR 1 6 spécifie les caractéristiques et les performances des
appareils de m esure des champs radioélectriques dans la plage de fréquences de 9 kH z à
1 8 GH z. Des exigences pour les appareils spécialisés de m esure de perturbations non
continues sont également spécifiées.
NOTE Conform ém ent au Guide 1 07 de l'I EC, la CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 est un e norm e CEM fondam entale destinée à être
utilisée par l es com ités de produits de l'I EC. Comm e indiq ué dans le Guid e 1 07, les com ités de produits ont la
responsabi lité d e déterm iner l'applicabi lité de cette n orm e CEM. Le CI SPR et ses sou s-com ités sont prêts à
coopérer avec les com ités de prod uits à l’évaluati on de la val eu r d es essais d’im m unité particu liers pou r l eu rs
produits.
Des lignes directrices supplém entaires concernant l'utilisation des anal yseurs de spectre et
des récepteurs à balayage peuvent être trouvées dans l'Annexe B de l'une quelconque des
norm es suivantes: CI SPR 1 6-2-1 : 201 4, CI SPR 1 6-2-2: 201 0 ou CI SPR 1 6-2-3: 201 0.
2 Références normatives
Les documents suivants sont cités en référence de manière normative, en intégralité ou en
partie, dans le présent document et sont indispensables pour son application. Pour les
références datées, seule l’édition citée s’applique. Pour les références non datées, la
dernière édition du docum ent de référence s’applique (y compris les éventuels
amendem ents).
CI SPR 1 6-2-2: 201 0, Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des
perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques – Partie 2-2:
Méthodes de mesure des perturbations et de l'immunité – Mesure de la puissance
perturbatrice
CI SPR TR 1 6-3:201 0,
Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus
and methods – Part 3: CISPR technical reports (disponible en anglais seulem ent)
CI SPR TR 1 6-3: 201 0/AMD1 : 201 2
CI SPR TR 1 6-3: 201 0/AM D2:201 5
3 Termes et définitions
Pour les besoins du présent document les termes et définitions donnés dans l'I EC 60050-1 61 ,
ainsi que les suivants s'appliquent.
3.1
largeur de bande
Bn
largeur de la courbe de sélectivité globale du récepteur entre deux points situés à un
affaiblissem ent déterminé en dessous de la réponse en m ilieu de bande
Note 1 à l'article: n est l'affai blissem ent exprim é en dB.
3.2
plage de lecture du CISPR
plage spécifiée par le fabricant, donnant les indications maximale et m inim ale de l'appareil de
mesure, dans laquelle le récepteur de m esure satisfait aux exigences de la présente partie de
la CI SPR 1 6
3.3
constante de temps à la charge électrique
TC
durée nécessaire, après l'application instantanée d'une tension sinusoïdale constante à
l'étage précédant immédiatem ent l'entrée du détecteur, pour que la tension de sortie du
détecteur atteigne 63 % de sa valeur finale
Note 1 à l 'articl e: Cette constante de tem ps est déterm inée de l a façon sui vante: u n sig nal sinusoïd al, d'am plitude
constante et dont la fréquence est égal e à la fréq uence central e de l'am plificateu r à fréqu ence interm édiai re, est
appl iqu é à l'entrée de l'étag e précédant imm édiatem ent le d étecteu r. L'in dication D , d'un i nstrum ent sans inerti e
(par exem ple, un oscill oscope) branché à u ne borne du circu it am plificateur à cou rant conti nu d e façon à n e pas
affecter le com portem ent du d étecteur, est notée.
Le ni veau du sign al est choi si de tell e façon q ue la réponse des étages concern és reste dans la pl ag e de
fonction nem ent linéaire. Un train de sig nau x sinusoïdau x d e m êm e niveau est ensuite appliqu é, dont l'enveloppe
est rectan gul aire et dont la du rée est lim itée de sorte qu e l'i ndication correspon dante soit de 0, 63 D . La du rée d e
ce signal est égal e au tem ps d e charge d u détecteu r.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 09 –
3.4
con stante d e temps à la déch arge él ectriq ue
TD
durée nécessaire, après la coupure instantanée d'une tension sinusoïdale constante
appliquée à l'étage précédant immédiatem ent l'entrée du détecteur, pour que l'indication à la
sortie du détecteur tombe à 37 % de sa valeur initiale
Note 1 à l'article: La m éthod e de m esure est analog ue à cell e de l a constante d e tem ps à l a charge, m ais au li eu
d'appliq uer un sign al pendant un e du rée lim itée, l e si gnal est interrom pu pen dant u ne d urée défi nie. Le tem ps
nécessaire pour que l a d évi ati on tom be à 0, 37 D est la constante d e tem ps à la déch arge d u détecteur.
3. 5
ai re d e l'impu lsion
A im p
aire englobée par la tension en fonction du tem ps d'une im pulsion, définie par l'intégrale:
+∞
A im p = ∫ V( t ) dt (1 )
−∞
Note 1 à l'article: L'ai re d e l'im pulsion, parfois appelée "ten ue au x on des de choc", s'exprim e en général en µ Vs
ou dB( µ Vs).
Note 2 à l'articl e: La d en sité spectrale ( D ) est liée à l'aire d'im pulsion et s'exprim e en µ V/MH z
ou dB( µ V/MH z ) . Pou r les im pulsions rectan gul aires de larg eu r T au x fréqu ences f < < 1 / T, la relati on D ( µ V/MH z) =
2 × 1 0 6 A i mp ( µVs) s'appli qu e.
3. 6
band e passante en impulsion
B im p
A( t ) max
Bimp = (2)
2G0 × Aimp
où
3. 7
récepteu r de mesu re
appareil de mesure, par exemple un voltm ètre accordable, un récepteur de perturbation
électrom agnétique (EMI ), un anal yseur de spectre ou un appareil de mesure à FFT avec ou
sans présélection qui satisfait aux exigences des parties applicables de la présente norm e
Note 1 à l'article: Voi r l’Ann exe I pour plus d’i nform ations.
– 110 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
3. 8
con stante d e temps mécanique d'u n appareil i ndi cateu r réglé à l'amortissement cri tiqu e
TM
TM = TL (4)
2π
Note 1 à l'article: Pou r un i nstrum ent rég lé à l'am ortissem ent critiqu e, l'éq uati on d e m ouvem ent du systèm e peut
être écrite d e la façon sui vante:
2
TM2 d α2 + 2TM dα + α = ki (5)
dt dt
où
α est la déviati on;
i est le courant traversant l'instrum ent; et
k est une constante.
I l peut être déduit de cette relation qu e cette constante d e tem ps est aussi égale à la durée de l'im pulsion
rectan gul aire (d'am plitude con stante) q ui produ it une déviati on ég ale à 35 % de la déviati on stabilisée produite par
un cou rant contin u de m êm e am plitude qu e celle de l'im pulsi on rectang ul aire.
Note 2 à l'article: Les m éthodes de m esure et d e régl age sont déd uites d e l'une d es m éthodes suivantes:
a) la période d'oscillation libre ayant été rég lée à 2 π TM , l'am ortissem ent est ajouté de façon à avoir α T = 0, 35 α max
b) lorsq ue l a période de l'oscillati on n e peut pas être m esurée, l 'am ortissem ent est réglé de façon à être j uste en
dessous de l a valeur criti que, afin qu e le dépassem ent ne soit pas supéri eur à 5 % et qu e le m om ent d'inertie
du m ouvem ent soit tel q ue α T = 0, 35 α ma x.
3. 9
réserve de lin éarité
rapport du niveau correspondant à la plage de fonctionnem ent linéaire pratique d'un circuit
(ou d'un groupe de circuits) et du niveau correspondant à la déviation pleine échelle de
l'appareil indicateur
Note 1 à l'articl e: Le niveau m axim al pou r lequ el la réponse stabilisée d'un ci rcuit (ou d'u n groupe de circu its) ne
s'écarte pas d e pl us de 1 dB d e la li néarité id éal e d éfinit l a pl age de fonction nem ent li néaire prati qu e d u circuit (ou
du g roupe de circuits).
3. 1 0
ten sion symétriqu e
tension de perturbation radioélectrique apparaissant entre les deux fils dans un circuit
bifilaire, tel qu'une alim entation m onophasée. Cette tension est parfois appelée tension de
mode différentiel. Si Va est la tension vectorielle entre une des bornes d'alim entation et la
terre et Vb la tension vectorielle entre l'autre borne d'alim entation et la terre, la tension
symétrique est la différence vectorielle ( Va -Vb )
3.1 1
pondération (d'une perturbation par im pulsion, par exemple)
conversion (la plupart du temps réd uction) qui dépend de la fréquence de répétition
d'im pulsions (PRF) d'un niveau de tension d'impulsion détecté en crête en une indication qui
correspond à l'effet d'interférence sur la réception radio
Note 1 à l'article: Pou r l e récepteur an alogiq ue, l a g ên e psych oph ysiq ue de l'interférence est un e g rand eur
subjective (sonore ou visu ell e, gén éralem ent pas u n certain n om bre d'i ncom préh ensions d'u n texte parlé).
Note 2 à l'article: Pour le récepteu r num ériq ue, l'effet d'i nterférence est une gran deu r objecti ve q ui peut être
défini e soit par le taux d'erreu r critique su r les bits (BER) ou la probabilité d'erreu r critiqu e sur les bits (BEP) pou r
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 111 –
lesquels une correction d'erreur parfaite peut encore apparaître, soit par u n autre param ètre objectif et
reproductibl e.
3. 1 1 . 1
mesu re d e pertu rbation pondérée
mesure de perturbation utilisant un détecteur de pondération
3. 1 1 . 2
caractéristiqu e de pondération
le niveau de tension de crête en fonction de la PRF pour un effet constant sur un système de
radiocommunication spécifique, c'est-à-dire que la perturbation est pondérée par le système
de radiocommunication lui-mêm e
3. 1 1 . 3
détecteu r de pond ération
détecteur qui offre une fonction de pondération acceptée
3. 1 1 . 4
facteu r d e pondération
valeur de la fonction de pondération par rapport à une PRF de référence ou par rapport à la
valeur de crête
Note 1 à l'article: Le facteu r de pondérati on est exprim é en d B.
3. 1 1 . 5
fonction de pondération
cou rbe de pon dérati on
relation entre le niveau de tension d'entrée de crête et la PRF pour l'indication de niveau
constant d'un récepteur de mesure avec un détecteur de pondération, c'est-à-dire la courbe
de réponse d'un récepteur de mesure à des im pulsions répétées
3. 1 2
mesu re du temps
Tm
temps effectif, cohérent pour un résultat de mesure à une fréquence donnée (dans certains
domaines, appelé temps de m aintien)
– pour le détecteur crête, le tem ps effectif pour détecter le niveau maximum de l’enveloppe
du signal
– pour le détecteur quasi-crête, le temps effectif pour m esurer le m axim um de l’enveloppe
pondérée
– pour le détecteur m oyen, le tem ps effectif pour m oyenner l’enveloppe du signal
– pour le détecteur de valeur efficace, le tem ps effectif pour déterm iner la valeur efficace de
l’enveloppe du signal
3.1 3
étalon nage
opération qui, dans des conditions spécifiées, établit en une prem ière étape une relation entre
les valeurs et les incertitudes de m esure associées qui sont fournies par des étalons et les
indications correspondantes avec les incertitudes associées, puis utilise en une seconde
étape cette information pour établir une relation perm ettant d’obtenir un résultat de mesure à
partir d’une indication
Note 1 à l'articl e: Un étalonn age peut être exprim é sous la form e d’un énoncé, d’u ne fonction d’ étalonnage, d’un
diag ram m e d’étal on nag e, d’u ne courbe d'étalonn age ou d ’une table d’ étalonn age. Dan s certai ns cas, il peut
consister en une correction ad ditive ou m ultiplicati ve de l’i ndi cation avec u ne incertitu de d e m esure associée.
Note 2 à l'articl e: I l con vient de n e pas confond re l’étalon n age avec l’ ajustag e d ’un systèm e de m esure, sou vent
appelé im proprem ent "auto-étalonn ag e", ni avec la vérification de l'étalonn age.
Note 3 à l'article: La seul e prem ière étape d ans la défin ition est souvent perçue com m e étant l’étalon nage.
– 112 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
3. 1 4
vérifi cation
fourniture de preuves tangibles qu’une entité donnée satisfait à des exigences spécifiées
EXEMPLE Vérifi er si les fon ctions d’u n appareil de m esure ou d’u n m atériel au xili ai re, tel qu’ un d ispositif
d’absorpti on en m ode comm un (CMAD, Com m on Mod e Absorption Device), satisfont au x spécifications én oncées,
telles qu e celles d on nées d ans une fiche techni que.
[SOU RCE: I SO/I EC Guide 99: 2007, 2. 44, modifiée – aj out d'un exemple] [1 7]
3.1 5
aju stag e (d’u n système de mesu re)
ensem ble d'opérations réalisées sur un système de m esure pour qu’il fournisse des
indications prescrites correspondant à des valeurs données des grandeurs à mesurer
Note 1 à l'articl e: Di vers types d’ajustage d'un systèm e de m esure sont le régl age d e zéro, le régl ag e de
décalage, l e régl age d ’étendu e (appel é aussi régl age de gain ).
Note 2 à l'article: I l convi ent de n e pas de confon dre l’aj ustage d'u n systèm e de m esure avec son étalonn ag e, qui
est un préal abl e à l’ ajustage.
Note 3 à l'article: Après u n ajustag e d’ un systèm e de m esure, l e systèm e doit en g énéral être de n ouveau
étalonné.
3. 1 6
correcti on
compensation d’un effet systématique connu
Note 1 à l'article: Voi r l’I SO/I EC Guid e 98-3: 2008, 3. 2. 3 [1 6] pou r un e explicati on du concept d’effet systém atiqu e.
Note 2 à l'article: La m odifi cation peut prend re différentes form es, telles que l ’ad diti on d’ un e valeur ou la
m ultiplication par un facteu r, ou peut se déd uire d'une tabl e.
3. 1 7
traçabilité (m étrologiqu e)
propriété d'un résultat de m esure selon laquelle ce résultat peut être relié à une référence par
l’intermédiaire d’une chaîne ininterrompue et docum entée d'étalonnages dont chacun
contribue à l'incertitude de m esure
4. 1 Gén éralités
Les spécifications du récepteur dépendent de la fréquence d'utilisation. I l existe une
spécification de récepteur couvrant la plage de fréquences de 9 kH z à 1 50 kH z (Bande A),
une couvrant la gamm e de 1 50 kH z à 30 MH z (Bande B), une couvrant la gamm e de 30 MH z
à 300 MH z (Bande C), et une couvrant la gamme de 300 MH z à 1 000 MH z (Bande D). Les
caractéristiques fondamentales d'un appareil de mesure de quasi-crête sont données à
l'Annexe H.
_____________
1 Les chiffres entre crochets ren voi ent à l a Bibl i ographie.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 113 –
Les anal yseurs de spectre et les appareils de mesure à FFT qui satisfont aux exigences du
présent article peuvent être utilisés pour les mesures de conform ité. Pour les mesures
d'ém issions, les appareils de m esure à FFT doivent échantillonner et évaluer le signal de
manière continue au cours de la période de mesure.
Si des préam plificateurs externes sont utilisés, voir l'Annexe J pour les exigences applicables.
NOTE Les Annexes B et C décri vent les m éthodes pour la d éterm ination des caractéri stiques d e sortie d'u n
gén érateu r d'im pulsions destin é à être utilisé dans l es essais des exigences du présent paragraphe.
En alternative, la réponse du récepteur de mesure à des im pulsions répétées doit être telle
que, pour un réglage de tension constant des fréquences du générateur d’im pulsions de
50 dB( µ V), par exem ple, aux fréquences de répétition de 25 H z (Bande A) et de 1 00 H z
(Bandes B, C et D), la relation entre l’indication et la fréquence de répétition du récepteur soit
conforme à la Figure 1 , à la Figure 2, à la Figure 3 et à la Figure 4 dans des conditions de
signe opposé.
Pour toutes les m esures, un rapport signal sur bruit suffisant est exigé. L’utilisation d’un
atténuateur de 1 0 dB en sortie du générateur d’impulsions est recom mandée.
Relative input in decibels for constant output
20
10
–1 0
1 10 25 1 00
Pulse repetition frequency (Hz)
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Relati ve input in d ecibels for constant output Entrée rel ative en décibels pou r la sorti e constante
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z) Fréq uence de répétition d'im pu lsion (Hz)
Figu re 1 – Cou rbe de réponse au x i mpu lsion s (Ban de A)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 115 –
22, 5 ±2
Relative input in decibels for constant output
24
Asym ptote
22
20, 5 ±2
20
Absolute cali bration
18
E0
16
14 C.I.S.P.R.
Pul se g en erator C receiver
12 R
E0 RC = 0, 31 6 µ Vs 1
1 0 ±1 , 5 Freq . = 1 00 im p. /s
10
2 R
8 Sin e-wave gen erator α
6, 5 ±1 E = 66 d B ( µ V) eff.
6 U = 60 dB ( µ V) eff. R
U
E
4 α1 = α2 ±1 ,5 dB
2
0
0
–2
–4 –4, 5 ±1
–6
–8
1 1 01 1 02 1 03 1 04
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Relati ve input in d ecibels for constant output Entrée rel ative en décibels pou r la sorti e constante
Absolute cali bration Étal onnag e absolu
Pulse generator Générateu r d'im pulsions
CI SPR recei ver Récepteu r CI SPR
Sine-wave gen erator Générateu r d'ond e sinusoïd ale
Pulse repetition frequ ency Fréq uence de répétition d'im pu lsion
Asym ptote Asym ptote
Figu re 2 – Cou rbe de réponse au x i mpu lsion s (Ban de B)
– 116 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Relative input in decibels for constant output
31 , 5 Asym ptote
U
U = 60 d B ( µ V) eff.
α1 = α2 ±1 ,5 dB
5
–5
–1 0
–1 5
1 1 01 1 02 1 03 1 04
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Relati ve input in d ecibels for constant output Entrée rel ative en décibels pou r la sorti e constante
Absolute cali bration Étal onnag e absolu
Pulse generator Générateu r d'im pulsions
CI SPR recei ver Récepteu r CI SPR
Sine-wave gen erator Générateu r d'ond e sinusoïd ale
Pulse repetition frequ ency Fréq uence de répétition d'im pu lsion
Asym ptote Asym ptote
Figu re 3 – Cou rbe d e réponse au x impu lsion s (Ban des C et D)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
I S, impulse area i n dB ( µ Vs) for constant receiver indication
40
E0
C.I.S.P.R.
30 Pulse generator receiver
E0 RC = IS µVs C R
1 5, 5 µ Vs 1
Band A R
2
20 Quasi-peak detector α
Sine-wave generator
recei vers E = 66 dB ( µV) eff. R
U
E
U = 60 dB (µV) eff. α1 = α 2
2, 8 µ Vs
10
Band B
Quasi-peak detector Averag e detector
0 recei vers recei vers
0 31 6 µ Vs
–1 0 0, 28 µ Vs
– 117 –
–20 Band C/D
Quasi-peak detector
recei vers 0 044 µ Vs
–30
–40
–50
1 10 1 00 1 000 1 0 000 1 00 000
Pulse repetition frequ ency (H z)
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
I S, im pulse area in dB ( µVs) for constant recei ver I S, aire d'im pulsion en dB ( µ Vs) pour i ndicati on d e
indicati on récepteu r constante
Band A Bande A
Quasi-peak detector receivers Récepteurs à détecteur de q uasi-crête
Band B Bande B
Quasi-peak detector receivers Récepteurs à détecteur de q uasi-crête
Averag e detector recei vers Récepteu rs à détecteur de val eur m oyenn e
Band C/D Bande C/D
Quasi-peak detector receivers Récepteu rs à détecteur de q uasi-crête
Pulse generator Générateu r d'im pulsions
Sine-wave gen erator Générateu r d'onde sinusoïd ale
CI SPR recei ver Récepteu r CI SPR
Pulse repetition frequ ency Fréq uence de répétition d'im pu lsion
– 118 –
NOTE "I S" est l'abréviation utilisée pou r A i mp dans l es éditions antérieures
Figu re 4 – Cou rbe de réponse th éoriq ue aux impulsions de récepteu rs à d étecteur de quasi-crête et de val eu r moyen ne (voir 6.5.4)
La courbe de réponse d'un récepteur de m esure particulier doit être com prise dans les lim ites
définies dans la figure appropriée et quantifiée au Tableau 2. Pour les anal yseurs de spectre
sans présélection, les exigences du Tableau 2 pour les fréquences de répétition d'im pulsions
inférieures à 20 H z ne sont pas applicables. L'utilisation de tels appareils pour les essais de
conformité est soum ise à des conditions. Si de tels anal yseurs de spectres sont utilisés pour
les m esures, l'utilisateur doit vérifier et docum enter que l'équ ipement en essai n'ém et pas de
signaux à large bande à des fréquences de répétition d'impulsions de 20 H z ou moins. Une
déterm ination de l'adéquation d'un analyseur de spectre aux essais doit être réalisée en
appliquant la procédure donnée dans l'Annexe B de la CI SPR 1 6-2-1 :201 4, l'Annexe B de la
CI SPR 1 6-2-2: 201 0, ou l'Annexe B de la CI SPR 1 6-2-3:201 0.
4.5 Sélectivité
4.5.1 Sélectivité globale (bande passante)
La courbe représentant la sélectivité globale du récepteur de m esure doit être dans les lim ites
indiquées à la Figure 5, à la Figure 6 ou à la Figure 7.
– 1 20 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
NOTE Pour l a m esure des appareils exigeant u ne pl us grande sélecti vité à l a transition en tre 1 30 kHz et 1 50 kH z
(par exem ple pou r les appareils pour l a transm ission de signau x su r le réseau électriqu e tels que d éfinis d ans
l'EN 50065-1 ), un filtre passe-haut peut être ajouté avant le récepteu r de m esure pou r obtenir l a sélectivité
com binée du récepteu r de m esure CI SPR et du filtre passe-h aut comm e indiq ué au Tableau 3.
I l convient que le récepteur de m esure avec le filtre passe-haut satisfasse aux exigences de
la présente norm e.
220 Hz/ 20 dB
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max Bw
Min Bw
8
3
45 Hz/ 1 ,5 dB
An gl ai s Françai s
Relati ve input for constant output (dB) Entrée rel ative pour la sorti e constante (dB)
Max Bw Largeur d e band e m ax
Min Bw Largeur d e band e m ini
Hz off m id-ban d Désaccord (Hz)
Figu re 5 – Limites de la sélectivi té global e – Bande passante
(voir 4. 5.1 , 5.6, 6.6, 7.6) (Bande A)
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max. bandwidth
8 Min. bandwidth
–4 kHz/6 dB 5 kHz/6 dB
3
2 kHz/
1 ,5 dB
–1 ,5 dB
–2
–1 0 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
–∆f kHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Relati ve input for constant output (dB) Entrée rel ative pou r la sorti e constante (dB)
Max Ban d wi dth Largeur de band e m ax
Min Band width Largeur de band e m in
Hz off m id-ban d Désaccord (Hz)
Figu re 6 – Li mites d e l a sél ectivité gl obale –
Ban de passante (voi r 4.5. 1 , 5. 6, 6. 6, 7.6) (Ban de B)
– 1 22 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
Max. bandwidth
Min. bandwidth
8
–50 kHz/6 dB 70 kHz/6 dB
3
20 kHz/1 ,5 dB
–1 ,5 dB
–2
–1 40 –1 20 –1 00 –80 –60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 80 1 00 1 20 1 40
–∆f kHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Relati ve input for constant output (dB) Entrée rel ative pou r la sorti e constante (dB)
Max Ban d wi dth Largeur de band e m ax
Min Band width Largeur de band e m in
Hz off m id-ban d Désaccord (Hz)
Figu re 7 – Li mites d e l a sél ectivité gl obal e –
Ban de passante (voi r 4.5.1 , 5.6, 6. 6, 7.6) (Ban des C et D)
1 1
(nfL ± fi ) et ( f0 ) (6)
m k
où
NOTE Si plusieurs fréq uences interm édiaires sont utilisées, les fréquences fL et fi peuvent correspond re à
chacune des fréq uences de l'oscillateu r local et des fréqu ences interm édiai res utilisées. De plus, des réponses
parasites peuvent se prod ui re lorsqu ’aucu n sign al d'entrée n'est appliq ué au récepteur d e m esure; par exem ple,
quand l es harm oniqu es des oscillateurs l ocau x présentent un écart de fréquence égal à l'une des fréqu ences
interm édi aires. Les exi gences du présent parag raphe ne peu vent donc pas s'appl iqu er dan s ces derniers cas. Les
effets de ces réponses parasi tes sont traités en 4. 7. I l s'ag it par exem ple d e sources d e signau x parasites les
oscillateurs locaux (ou leu rs h arm oniq ues), l es horloges internes, les cartes él ectron iques d’ordin ateur ainsi q u e
les produits issus du m élange de ces sources avec le si gnal d’entrée dans le récepteur.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 23 –
Pulse generator 2
a b α
Receiver tuned to f
IEC
An glais Français
Sine-wave gen erator frequency f Fréq uence f du gén érateu r d'ondes sinusoïdal es
Filter, attenu ation 40 dB at f Filtre, affaiblissem ent de 40 dB à f
Pulse generator Générateu r d'im pulsions
Recei ver tun ed to f Récepteur accordé à f
NOTE Suite au d ébat en 4. 6, les réponses du récepteur de m esure sont:
α 1 a = α 2a
α 1 b = α 1 a – 40 dB
α 2b = α 2a – 36 dB
Le générateur d'impulsions étant branché com me indiqué ci-dessus, la m ise en circuit du filtre
doit introduire un affaiblissem ent au m oins égal à 36 dB pour les récepteurs de m esure et
d'au m oins 20 dB pour les anal yseurs de spectres sans présélection.
NOTE Le point auq uel le bru i t de fond prod uit une erreu r de 1 dB peut être déterm iné par l 'appl ication d'un sig nal
S de telle sorte q ue l'i ndicati on de l'appareil de m esure soit larg em ent supérieure (par exem ple 40 dB) au n iveau
de bruit N. En réduisant le ni veau du sig nal S l'appareil de m esure va attei ndre un point S1 , tel q ue ( S1 + N) d évie
,
Le blindage du récepteur doit être tel que, lorsque ce dernier se trouve dans un cham p
électrom agnétique ambiant de 3 V/m (non modulé) à n'importe quelle fréquence com prise
entre 9 kH z et 1 000 MH z, l'erreur entraînée ne doit pas dépasser 1 dB, au m axim um et au
minim um de la plage de lecture du CI SPR spécifiée par le fabricant du récepteur. Dans les
cas où le récepteur de m esure ne satisfait pas à l'exigence des 3 V/m , la valeur du cham p et
la fréquence auxquelles l'erreur dépasse 1 dB doivent être indiquées par le fabricant. L'essai
doit être effectué comme décrit ci-dessous.
Le récepteur est placé à l'intérieur d'une enceinte blindée. U n signal d'entrée est appliqué au
récepteur par l'intermédiaire d'un câble de 2 m de longueur bien blindé (par exemple câble
sem i-rigide) à travers un connecteur de traversée m onté sur la paroi de l'enveloppe et
raccordé à un générateur de signaux placé à l'extérieur de l'enveloppe. Le niveau du signal
d'entrée doit être réglé au maximum puis au minimum de la plage de lecture du CI SPR,
spécifiée par le fabricant du récepteur. Toutes les autres prises coaxiales du récepteur
doivent être chargées par leur impédance caractéristique.
Seuls les câbles essentiels (par exemple câbles d'alim entation et câbles d'entrée)
nécessaires à l'utilisation normale du récepteur de m esure dans sa configuration m inim ale (à
l'exclusion des options telles que casques d'écoute) doivent être connectés pendant l'essai.
Les câbles doivent avoir la longueur et la disposition correspondant à l'utilisation habituelle.
L'intensité du champ ambiant au voisinage du récepteur de m esure doit être mesurée par un
mesureur de champ.
Avant d'effectuer des mesures d'ém ission conduite ou rayonnée, il est essentiel de vérifier
que la contribution au bruit des appareils d'essai (par exemple commande de l'ordinateur)
n'affecte pas les résultats de m esure.
5. 1 Gén éralités
Le présent article définit les exigences applicables aux récepteurs de m esure utilisant un
détecteur de crête lorsqu'ils sont utilisés pour la m esure des perturbations de type impulsif ou
modulées en impulsion.
Les anal yseurs de spectre et les appareils de m esure à FFT qui satisfont aux exigences du
présent article peuvent être utilisés pour les m esures de conform ité. Pour les m esures
d'émissions, les appareils de m esure à FFT doivent échantillonner et évaluer le si gnal de
manière continue au cours de la période de mesure.
5. 2 Impédan ce d'entrée
L'accès d'entrée des récepteurs de mesure doit être asymétrique. Pour les réglages du
récepteur se situant dans la plage de lecture du CI SPR, l'im pédance d'entrée nominale doit
être de 50 Ω avec un ROS inférieur ou égal aux valeurs du Tableau 5.
– 1 26 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
NOTE Pou r les récepteurs q ui utilisent les techni ques d e m aintien de crête (et un e décharge forcée après le
tem ps de m aintien ) ou de détection num éri qu e d e crête, l'exi gence relati ve au rapport d es constantes d e tem ps à
la charge et à la déch arge n'est pas pertin ente. U ne foncti on d e m aintien de m axim um de l'affich ag e peut être
utilisée pou r les sign au x avec des am plitudes variables dans le tem ps.
Si un anal yseur de spectre est utilisé pour les m esures de crête, la bande vidéo ( B vid éo ) doit
être réglée sur une valeur supérieure ou égale à la bande de résolution ( B résol ). Pour les
mesures de crête, le résultat peut être lu sur l'afficheur de l'anal yseur de spectre, avec le
détecteur fonctionnant soit dans le m ode linéaire, soit dans le mode logarithmique.
NOTE 1 Les Ann exes B et C d écri vent l es m éthodes d e déterm ination d es caractéri stiques d e sorti e d es
gén érateu rs d'im pulsions d estinés à être utilisés pou r le contrôle d es exi gences du présent paragraphe.
NOTE 2 À une cad ence d e répétition de 25 Hz pour la band e A et de 1 00 H z pour les autres band es, les relati ons
entre les indicati ons d'u n récepteu r de m esure d e crête et celles d'u n récepteur d e m esure de qu asi-crête avec l a
largeu r d e bande préférenti elle sont don nées au Tableau 7.
Au-dessus de 1 GH z, l'aire de l'impulsion exigée est définie à l'aide d'une porteuse m odulée
en impulsion à la fréquence d'essai, étant donné que les générateurs d'impulsions ayant un
spectre uniform e jusqu'à 1 8 GH z ne sont pas réalisables. Voir E. 6.
5.6 Sélectivité
Comm e les exigences de largeur de bande décrites en 5. 3. 1 perm ettent de s'écarter des
largeurs de bande données à la Figure 5, à la Figure 6 et à la Figure 7, les courbes de
sélectivité s'appliquent aux récepteurs de m esure de crête en termes de forme seulement, et
l'axe des fréquences doit être mis à l'échelle en conséquence. Par exemple, B 6 /2 correspond
à 1 00 H z dans la Figure 5.
1 ,35 MHz/20 dB
18
Relative input for constant output (dB)
13
3 0,25/3
–1 dB
–2
–1 ,4 –1 ,2 –1 –0,8 –0,6 –0,4 –0,2 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1 ,2 1 ,4
–∆f MHz off mid-band + ∆f
IEC
An glais Français
Relati ve input for constant output (dB) Entrée rel ative pou r la sorti e constante (dB)
Max Ban d wi dth Largeur de band e m ax
Min Band width Largeur de band e m in
Hz off m id-ban d Désaccord (Hz)
NOTE 1 Les lim ites pou r l a largeur de bande d'im pulsion ne peu vent pas être représentées sur l e diagramm e car
l'attén uation de filtre correspondante dépend du type du filtre. En conséq uence, les l im ites pour l es larg eu rs d e
ban de à 6 dB et à 9 dB ont été don nées pou r illustration.
NOTE 2 Les l im ites pou r l a sélectivité gl obale ont été d éd uites d e cell es d e l'éq uipem ent utilisé au m om ent de
l'introduction d e l'exig ence su r la sélectivité.
6. 1 Gén éralités
Les récepteurs de m esure de valeur m oyenne ne sont généralem ent pas utilisés pour la
mesure des perturbations par impulsion. Ce type de récepteur a un détecteur conçu pour
indiquer la valeur moyenne de l'enveloppe du signal traversant les étages en am ont du
détecteur. Le détecteur de valeur m oyenne est utilisé pour la m esure de signaux à bande
étroite afin de s'affranchir des problèmes associés soit à la modulation, soit à la présence de
bruit à large bande.
Les anal yseurs de spectre et les appareils de m esure à FFT qui satisfont aux exigences du
présent article peuvent être utilisés pour les m esures de conform ité. Pour les m esures
d'émissions, les appareils de m esure à FFT doivent échantillonner et évaluer le signal de
manière continue au cours de la période de mesure.
6. 2 Impédan ce d'entrée
L'accès d'entrée du récepteur de m esure doit être asym étrique. Pour les réglages du
récepteur de com mande se situant dans la plage de lecture du CI SPR, l'im pédance d'entrée
nom inale doit être de 50 Ω avec un ROS ne dépassant pas les valeurs indiquées au
Tableau 5.
I m pédance d'entrée sym étrique (équilibrée) dans la plage de fréquences comprises entre
9 kH z et 1 50 kH z: utiliser un transform ateur d'entrée équilibré pour les mesures sym étriques
(c'est-à-dire non raccordées à la terre). (L'impédance d'entrée préférentielle est de 600 Ω
dans la plage de fréquences com prises entre 9 kH z et 1 50 kH z). L'impédance d'entrée
sym étrique peut être incorporée soit dans le réseau fictif sym étrique exigé pour le couplage
avec le récepteur, soit dans le récepteur de mesure lui-mêm e.
6. 3 Caractéristiqu es fondamentales
6. 3. 1 Larg eu r de band e
Les largeurs de bande doivent être comprises dans les valeurs m ontrées au Tableau 8.
– 1 30 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Le récepteur ne doit pas être en surcharge pour des cadences d'im pulsions supérieures ou
égales à 25 H z pour la bande A, 500 H z pour la bande B et 5 000 H z pour les bandes C et D.
NOTE En g én éral, avec ce type d e récepteur, un e réserve de l inéarité suffisante n e peu t pas être fou rnie pou r
em pêcher u n fonction nem ent n on lin éai re du récepteu r à des cadences d'im pulsions très basses (la réponse à un e
im pulsion uni qu e n'est pas défi nie).
NOTE 1 Au x fréquences de répétition d e 25 Hz, 1 00 H z, 500 Hz, 1 000 H z et 5 000 H z, la rel ation entre l es
indicati ons d'un récepteu r de m esure de val eu r m oyen ne et celle d'un récepteu r de m esure de quasi -crête d e
m êm e larg eu r d e ban de, en supposant des facteurs de su rcharge adéquats et u n n iveau de sortie constant, est
don née au Tableau 9.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 31 –
Pour le détecteur de valeur m oyenne logarithm ique, la réponse du récepteur de mesure à des
impulsions de fréquence de répétition 333 kH z (inverse de la période de 3 µ s) d'aire
d'im pulsion égale à 6, 7 nVs f. é. m. sous une im pédance de source de 50 Ω , doit être égale à
la réponse à un signal sinusoïdal non m odulé à la fréquence d'accord ayant une f. é.m. de
2 mV en valeur efficace [66 dB( µ V )] . U ne tolérance de ± 4 dB est autorisée sur le niveau d e
tension sinusoïdale (la tolérance de 1 0 % de la largeur de bande provoque une variation
possible d'environ ± 2, 5 dB).
NOTE 2 Pou r l es m esures (pond érées) m oyenn es en m ode linéaire, le résultat correspond ra au ni veau m oyen d u
signal m esuré. Si u n affichage logarithm ique est utilisé, le résul tat correspond ra à l a m oyenne des valeurs
logarithm iqu es du sign al m esuré. En conséq uence, pou r u n signal d'onde carrée de valeu rs successives de
20 dB( µ V) et 60 dB( µ V), l e ni veau obten u en m ode logarith m ique est d e 40 dB( µV), alors qu'en m ode li néaire, l e
niveau 54, 1 dB( µ V) représente la val eu r m oyen ne réelle du si gnal.
Une tolérance de + 3 dB à –1 dB est autorisée dans la plage de fréquences com prise entre la
plus faible fréquence de répétition utilisable et une fréquence égale à B 3 /2, tel que déterm iné
à partir des considérations de surcharge.
NOTE 1 Les cou rbes de réponse théori que au x im pulsions des récepteurs à d étecteu r d e quasi -crête et de val eur
m oyenn e, com binées sur un e échelle absol ue, sont donn ées en Figu re 4. La réponse d u récepteu r de m esure
équi pé d'un détecteur d e val eur m oyenne logarithm ique à des im pulsions répétées (au -dessus de 1 GH z) est
influencée par le ni veau de bruit entre l es im pulsions. Avec les valeurs sui vantes:
L l og Av est le niveau ind iqu é par l e détecteur de valeur m oyenn e logarithm ique;
TP est l a du rée de l'im pulsion;
LP est le niveau d'im pulsion en dB( µ V);
TN est la du rée du ni veau de bruit;
LN est le niveau de bruit en dB( µ V);
la relation approxim ative sui vante s'appliq ue al ors:
T L +T L
LlogAv = P P N N (7)
TP + TN
EXEMPLE: Si l e ni veau d'i m pulsion L P est de 85 dB( µ V) et l e ni veau de bruit L N est de 8 dB( µ V),
TP = 1 / B i mp = 1 µ s, l e tau x d'i m pulsion n est de 1 00 000 Hz, alors TN ≈ 9 µ s. À partir d e cette équ ation ,
L l og Av = 1 5, 7 dB( µ V). En réalité, L l og Av est plus élevé puisqu e TP est pl us élevée, parce qu e le signal d'im pul sion à
la sortie f. i. n e descend pas au niveau de bruit im m édiatem ent après 1 µ s.
NOTE 2 Un e tolérance est à l 'étud e.
Meter A
Envel ope Simulating Micro-
detector network processor
D
IEC
An glais Français
Envel ope detector Détecteur d'en vel oppe
Meter sim ulating network Réseau de sim ulation d e l'appareil de m esure
Micro-processor Microprocesseu r
Figure 1 0 – Schéma fonctionnel d'un détecteur de valeur moyenne
Tableau 1 0 – Valeurs maximales des récepteurs de mesure de valeur moyenne pour une
entrée sinusoïdale à modulation d'impulsion comparées à la réponse à une onde
sinusoïdale continu e de même amplitude
Impulsions rectangul aires périodiques Récepteur ban des A/B Récepteur ban des C/D
pour la modulation TM = 0, 1 6 s TM = 0, 1 s
Durée = TM
0, 353 (= –9, 0 dB) 0, 353 (= –9, 0 dB)
Période = 1 , 6 s
NOTE En Band e E, ceci s'appliq ue au détecteur de val eur m oyenn e lin éai re u niq uem ent.
4,0 V
SEL>>
0V
V (video)
4,0 V
0V
0 1 ,0 2,0 3,0 4,0
V (AV) Time s IEC
An glais Français
Tim e Tem ps
NOTE 1 La réponse représen tée est obtenu e par un sign al i nterm ittent à band e étroite d'u ne du rée de 0, 3 s et d e
1 Hz de fréquence d e répétition, lorsqu'u ne constante de tem ps de 1 00 m s est utilisée. Si la constante d e tem ps
est de 1 60 m s, les crêtes à la sortie d u réseau de sim ulation de l'appareil de m esure sont pl us faibles.
NOTE 2 La réponse au x perturbations interm ittentes à ban de étroite peut aussi être défi nie pou r l e détecteur de
val eu r m oyen ne logarithm ique fonctionn ant avec u ne certain e ban de vid éo, par exem ple, 1 0 Hz, et l a fonction d e
m aintien du m axim um de l'affichag e du spectre.
6.6 Sélectivité
Pour les récepteurs présentant une largeur de bande de 200 H z (pour la plage de fréquences
com prises entre 9 kH z et 1 50 kH z) ou une largeur de bande de 9 kH z (pour la plage d e
fréquences comprises entre 0,1 5 MH z et 30 MH z), la sélectivité globale doit être comprise
dans les lim ites données respectivement à la Figure 5 et à la Figure 6. Pour les récepteurs
présentant une largeur de bande de 1 20 kH z (pour la plage de fréquences comprises entre
30 MH z et 1 000 MH z), la sélectivité globale doit être com prise dans les lim ites données à la
Figure 7. Pour les récepteurs ayant d'autres largeurs de bande, la Figure 5, la Figure 6 et la
Figure 7 ne décrivent que la forme, et l'axe des fréquences doit être mis à l'échelle en
conséquence. La courbe représentant la sélectivité globale de la largeur de bande de
référence du récepteur de mesure pour la bande E doit se situer dans les limites de la
Figure 9.
– 1 34 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
NOTE Pou r la m esure des appareils exi geant un e plus gran de sélectivité à la transiti on en tre 1 30 kHz et 1 50 kH z
(pour les appareils pour la transm ission de signau x su r le réseau électrique tels qu e d éfi nis dans l'EN 50065-1
[1 8] 2 , par exem ple), u n filtre passe-haut peut être ajouté avant le récepteur de m esure pou r obten ir la sélectivité
com binée ci-après du récepteu r de m esure CI SPR et du fil tre passe-haut:
Fréqu en ce Atténu ati on rel ati ve
kHz dB
1 50 ≤1
1 46 ≤6
1 45 ≥6
1 40 ≥ 34
1 30 ≥ 81
I l convient que le récepteur de m esure avec le filtre passe-haut satisfasse aux exigences de
la présente norm e.
7. 1 Gén éralités
Les récepteurs de pondération de valeur moyenne efficace utilisent un détecteur de
pondération qui est une com binaison d'un détecteur de valeur efficace (pour les fréquences
de répétition d'impulsions supérieures à une fréquence de cassure fc ) et d'un détecteur de
valeur moyenne (pour les fréquences de répétition d'impulsions inférieures à la fréquence de
cassure fc ), ce qui permet d'obtenir une courbe de réponse impulsionnelle avec les
caractéristiques suivantes: 1 0 dB/décade au-delà de la fréquence de cassure et
20 dB/décade en deçà de la fréquence de cassure.
Les anal yseurs de spectre et les appareils de m esure à FFT qui satisfont aux exigences du
présent article peuvent être utilisés pour les mesures de conformité. Pour les m esures
d'ém issions, les appareils de mesure à FFT doivent échantillonner et évaluer le signal de
m anière continue au cours de la période de m esure.
7. 2 Impédan ce d'entrée
Le circuit d'entrée des récepteurs de m esure doit être asymétrique. Pour les réglages du
récepteur de comm ande se situant dans la plage de lecture du CI SPR, l'impédance d'entrée
nom inale doit être de 50 Ω avec un ROS ne dépassant pas les valeurs indiquées au
Tableau 1 1 .
_____________
2 Les chiffres entre crochets se réfèrent à l a bibliographi e.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 35 –
La fréquence m inim ale de répétition d'im pulsion sans surcharge doit être conforme aux
valeurs indiquées dans le Tableau 1 3.
– 1 36 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
NOTE 2 Avec ce type de d étecteur, u ne réserve d e linéari té suffisante ne peut général em ent pas être fournie
pou r em pêcher u n fonctionnem ent non lin éai re d e l'i nstru m ent à des cadences de répétition d'im pulsions très
faibles pou r les im pulsions courtes dans les bandes C/D et E (la réponse à un e im pulsion uniq ue d e courte du rée
est seulem ent théoriq uem ent d éfinie dans ces band es).
NOTE 3 L'An nexe A décrit l e calcul de l a réserve de lin éarité pou r le d étecteu r de valeur efficace. L'An nexe B
décrit la d éterm inati on du spectre du g énérateu r d'im pulsions. L'Annexe C d écrit la m esure précise des ni veau x de
sortie d es gén érateurs d'im pul sions de l'ord re de la nanosecond e.
NOTE 4 Pou r la band e E, l'essai peut être réalisé avec un signal sinusoïd al à m odulati on d'im pulsion, avec un e
largeu r d e bande occupée de par exem ple 2 M Hz. E. 6 fournit l a spécification d'un sign al d'essai appl icabl e.
NOTE Les Ann exes B, C et E décrivent d es m éthodes de d éterm inati on des caractéristiqu es de sorti e d es
gén érateu rs d'im pulsions d estinés à être utilisés pou r le contrôle d es exi gences du présent article.
NOTE L'Annexe A décrit le calcul du facteur d e réponse i m pulsionnel le d u détecteur d e valeur efficace. A une
fréq uence de répétiti on respectivem ent de 25 Hz et de 1 00 Hz (c'est-à-dire la fréqu ence d e répétition d'im pulsion
de référence de d étecteu r d e quasi -crête), l a relati on entre les ind ications d'u n récepteu r de m esure de val eu r
m oyenn e efficace et un récepteur d e m esure de valeur d e q u asi-crête d e l a m êm e largeu r d e band e est donn ée au
Tableau 1 4.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 37 –
Si des préam plificateurs externes sont utilisés, voir l'Annexe J pour les exigences applicables.
I l est déduit de l'exigence ci-dessus qu'un récepteur de m esure en valeur m oyenne efficace
doit donner la valeur lue maximale indiquée au Tableau 9 pour un signal d'entrée sinusoïdal à
radiofréquence avec des im pulsions rectangulaires répétées ayant la durée et la période
indiquées dans le Tableau 1 6. U ne tolérance de ± 1 , 0 dB est autorisée pour cette exigence.
7.6 Sélectivité
Les courbes de sélectivité du récepteur de pondération en valeur m oyen ne efficace doivent
être égales à celle de la Figure 5, de la Figure 6 et de la Figure 7 pour les bandes A, B, C
et D. Pour le récepteur de la bande E, la courbe de sélectivité est donnée à la Figure 9.
Les exigences d'efficacité d'écran, c'est-à-dire l'im munité aux perturbations rayonnées
ambiantes de valeur élevée, sont à l'étude.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 39 –
La DPA peut être m esurée à la sortie du détecteur d'enveloppe ou à la suite des circuits d'u n
récepteur de mesure RF ou d'un anal yseur de spectre. I l convient que l'amplitude de la
perturbation soit exprim ée par rapport à la valeur du champ ou à la tension à l'entrée du
récepteur. Généralem ent, une m esure de la DPA s'effectue à une fréquence fixe.
La fonction de mesure de la DPA est une fonction supplémentaire des appareils de m esure,
et peut être soit rattachée à, soit incorporée aux appareils de m esure.
La fonction de mesure de la DPA peut être m ise en œuvre en utilisant les m éthodes
suivantes. U ne approche utilise des com parateurs et des com pteurs (Figure G. 1 ). L'appareil
déterm ine les probabilités de dépasser un ensemble de niveaux d'amplitude préassignés (par
exemple en tension). Le nombre de niveaux est identique au nom bre de com parateurs. U ne
autre méthode possible im plique l'utilisation d'un convertisseur analogique-numérique, d'un
circuit logique et d'une mém oire (Figure G. 2). L'appareil peut aussi fournir le schéma de la
DPA pour un ensem ble de niveaux d'amplitude préassignés. Le nom bre de niveaux dépend
de la résolution du convertisseur analogique-num érique (par exemple 256 niveaux pour un
convertisseur 8 bits).
Les m esures de la DPA qui utilisent la fonction m entionnée ci-dessus sont applicables aux
produits ou fam illes de produits si leur potentiel à engendrer des perturbations aux systèm es
de comm unications num ériques doit être déterm iné (voir 4. 7 de la CI SPR 1 6-3: 201 0, CI SPR
1 6-3:201 0/AMD1 : 201 2, pour les éléments de contexte général sur les spécifications de
distribution de probabilité d'am plitude (DPA)).
9 Analyseurs de perturbations
9. 1 Gén éralités
Les anal yseurs de perturbations sont utilisés pour l'évaluation automatique de l'am plitude, du
taux de répétition et de la durée des perturbations discontinues (claquements).
Les paramètres de tem ps sont déterminés à partir du signal qui dépasse le niveau de
référence f.i. du récepteur de mesure.
NOTE 1 La défin ition et l'éval uation des claq uem ents sont conform es à la CI SPR 1 4-1 .
NOTE 2 Les analyseurs actuels sont conçus pour être utili sés avec un récepteu r d e m esure de quasi -crête q u i
fonction ne avec un ni veau de signal interne lim ité. Par conséquent, de tels analyseurs peuvent ne pas avoi r
l’interface correcte avec tous l es récepteu rs.
9. 2 Caractéristiqu es fondamentales
a) L'anal yseur doit être équipé d'une voie pour mesurer la durée et l'espacement des
perturbations discontinues; l'entrée de cette voie doit être connectée à la sortie f. i. du
récepteur de m esure. Pour ces m esures, seule la partie de la perturbation qui dépasse le
niveau de la référence f. i. du récepteur doit être prise en com pte. La précision des
mesures de durées doit être meilleure que ± 5 %.
NOTE 1 Le ni veau d e la référence f. i. est la val eu r correspondante à l a sorti e f. i. du récepteu r de m esure à
un signal sinusoïd al non m odulé, q ui donne u ne in dicati on de q uasi-crête égal e à la lim ite pour des
perturbations contin ues.
b) L'anal yseur doit être équipé d'une voie pour évaluer l'am plitude en quasi-crête d'une
perturbation.
c) L'am plitude de la voie quasi-crête doit être mesurée 250 ms après le dernier front
descendant de la voie f. i.
d) La com binaison des voies entre elles doit satisfaire à toutes les exigences de 4. 2.
e) L'anal yseur doit être capable d'indiquer les informations suivantes:
– le nombre de claquem ents de durée inférieure ou égale à 200 ms;
– la durée de l'essai en m inutes;
– le taux de répétition des claquements;
– l'incidence des perturbations autres que les claquem ents qui dépassent la limite en
quasi-crête des perturbations continues.
NOTE 2 Un exem ple d'analyseur de perturbati on est représenté sous la form e d'un schém a fonctionnel à la
Figu re 1 2.
f) Pour la validation des caractéristiques fondam entales, l'anal yseur doit satisfaire aux
vérifications des caractéristiques avec toutes les formes d'onde (impulsions d'essai) du
Tableau 1 4.
La Figure 1 3 représente sous forme graphique les form es d'onde énum érées dans le
Tableau 1 7.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 41 –
La Figure F. 1 représente sous forme graphique toutes les formes d'onde énum érées dans
le Tableau F. 1 pour la vérification des caractéristiques pour les exceptions aux définitions
d'un claquem ent conform ément à 4. 2. 3 de la CI SPR 1 4-1 :2005.
Counters
B
Analogue of C.I.S.P.R. Indicator
detector and motor time Timing circuit
for more than two clicks
constants in any 2 s interval
Calibration
– 1 42 –
circuit
C
Shaping Duration of each disturbance
Timing circuit other than clicks (durations
network are additive if the counter
is not reset)
Supply Artificial
mains
IEC
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
An gl ai s Françai s
CI SPR m easurin g apparatus Appareils d e m esure CI SPR
I nput Entrée
I nterm ediate frequency output Sortie à fréquence interm édiai re
Delay n etwork Lign e de retard
Click gate Tau x de répétition des claquem ents
Other i nterference gate Autre tau x d 'interférences
Logic and store Logi qu e et m ém oire
Tim ing circuit Circuit d'horloge
Cou nters Com pteurs
Num ber of isol ated clicks Nom bre d e claq uem ents distin cts
I ndicator for m ore than two clicks in any 2 s interval I ndicateur pou r pl us de d eu x claqu em ents par i ntervalle
de 2 s
Duration of each disturbance other th an clicks Durée de chaqu e pertu rbati on autre qu'un claqu em ent
– 1 43 –
(du rati ons are additi ve if th e counter is no reset) (les du rées s'ajoutent si le com pteu r n'est pas rem is à
zéro)
Clock Horlog e
Shapi ng n etwork Réseau de m ise en form e
Cali bration ci rcuit Circuit d'étal on nag e
Analogue of CI SPR detector and m otor tim e constants Équivalent du détecteur CI SPR au point de vu e des
constantes de tem ps
Artificial m ains network Réseau fictif d'alim entati on
Suppl y voltage Tension d'al im entation
Apparatus u nder test Appareil en essai
Num ber of operati ons on apparatus und er test Nom bre d'opérations su r l'appareil en essai
Figu re 1 2 – Exemple d'un an al yseu r des perturbati on s
– 1 44 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Test Evaluation by
No. Test signal the analyzer
1 0,1 1 ms/1 dB
1 click
9,5 ms/1 dB
−1 s +1 s
2 1 click
Background: noise or CISPR pulses, 200 Hz: −2,5 dB (QP)
1 90 ms/1 dB
3 −1 s +1 s 1 click
Background: noise or CISPR pulses, 200 Hz: –2,5 dB (QP)
Other than click
1 333 ms/1 dB
4
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
6 1 80 ms Other than click
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
1 30 ms
7 1 click
30 ms/5 dB 30 ms/5 dB
8 21 0 ms 2 clicks
30 ms/25 dB
1 click
10 265 ms
30 ms/−2,5 dB
1 90 ms/25 dB
Band B: 1 034 ms/Band C: under consideration
11 2 clicks
30 ms/–2,5 dB/2 dB IF
IEC
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 45 –
An gl ai s Françai s
Test No. Essai N°
Test signal Signal d'essai
Evalu ation by the anal yzer Évalu ation effectuée par l'anal yseu r
1 click 1 claqu em ent
Backgrou nd: n oise or CI SPR pulses Bruit de fond ou im pulsions CI SPR
Other than click Autre q ue claquem ent
2 clicks 2 claqu em ents
Min. 21 pulses/0, 1 1 m s / periodicity 1 0 m s/1 dB Min. 21 im pulsions/0, 1 1 m s/périodicité 1 0 m s/1 dB
Band B: 1 034 m s / Band C: un der considerati on Bande B: 1 034 m s/Bande C: à l'étud e
Band B: 1 1 66 m s / Band C: un der considerati on Bande B: 1 1 66 m s/Bande C: à l'étud e
Figu re 1 3 – Présentati on g raphi qu e des signau x d'essai uti li sés
pour l a vérification d es performan ces de l'analyseu r par rapport
à la d éfinition d'u n claq uement conformément au Tabl eau 1 4
– 1 46 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
2a 1 9, 5 1 claqu em ent
2, 2 s
0 04 08 12 16 2 22
3a 1 1 90 1 claqu em ent
2, 2 s
0 04 08 12 16 2 22
4 1 1 333 b Autre q ue
claquem ent
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 1 2 14 16 18 2
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 47 –
Tableau 1 7 ( 2 de 4 )
Paramètres du signal d'essai
1 2 3 4 5
Am plitu de en
quasi-crête d es Durée des
impulsions impulsions f
aju stées aju stées à la
individuellement Séparation
Essai N°
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
6 5 5 30 30 1 80 Autre q ue
claquem ent
(240 m s)
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
7 5 5 30 30 1 30 1 claqu em ent
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10
8 5 5 30 30 21 0 2 claqu em ents
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
– 1 48 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Tableau 1 7 ( 3 de 4 )
Paramètres du signal d'essai
1 2 3 4 5
Am plitu de en
quasi-crête d es Durée des
impulsions impulsions f
aju stées aju stées à la
individuellement Séparation
Essai N°
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
1s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 1 2 14 1 6 18 2
2s
0 02 04 06 08 1 1 2 14 1 6 18 2
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 49 –
Tableau 1 7 ( 4 de 4 )
a Doi vent être effectuées avec u n bruit de fond com posé d'im pulsions CI SPR à 200 Hz d'un n iveau d e 2, 5 dB
en d essous d u ni veau de seuil de qu asi-crête. I l convi ent q ue ces im pulsions soient présentes et
comm encent au m oins 1 s avant l'im pulsion d'essai et du rent jusqu'au m oins 1 s après l'im pulsion d 'essai.
Observati ons :
1 ) La représentation g raphi que est réalisée avec des m esures de crêtes d’ une très courte du rée de
m aintien ( < 1 m s) du récepteur d’ essai q ui m ontre l ’im pul sion à 200 Hz. Lorsque l'on d e sinusoïd ale
m odulée en im pulsion arrive, l'im pulsion à 200 H z n'est pl us visible (com m e cela est vi sible su r le
graph e pour l 'essai n°3) m ais est toujou rs présente pen dant l'événem ent d e claqu em ent perturbateu r.
2) Les réponses très étroites à l'origi ne des graph es sont dues à une im perfection d u logiciel.
b L'im pulsion de 1 , 333 s vérifie le seu il de l'anal yseu r pou r d es im pulsions qui sont seulem ent à 1 dB au -
dessus du ni veau de seui l de q uasi-crête.
c Ces ni veau x pl us faibl es doivent être régl és afin de d épasser le seuil en fréquence i nterm éd iaire m ais de n e
pas dépasser l e seuil de q uasi-crête.
d Si ces deu x im pulsions sont m esurées comm e des perturbations séparées, u n seul claquem ent est
enregistré.
e Les valeurs correspond antes pour la pl age d e fréq uences au -dessus de 30 M H z sont à l'étu de. Une révisi on
est prévue après d es exam ens com plém entaires.
f Les tem ps de m ontée des im pulsions n e doi vent pas d épasser 40 µs.
seuil dans la voie en fréquence interm édiaire. Les niveaux doivent correspondre aux
niveaux de référence RF et en fréquence interm édiaire respectifs établis dans l'alinéa
précédent.
9. 3.2 Exig en ces supplémentaires
La m éthode d'essai est identique à celle décrite en 9. 3. 1 a). Les param ètres du signal sont
donnés au Tableau F. 1 .
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 51 –
Annexe A
(normative)
Détermination de la réponse aux impulsions répétées
des récepteurs de mesure de quasi-crête et de valeur moyenne efficace
(voir 3.6, 4.4.2, 7.3.2 et 7.5.1 )
A. 1 Généralités
La présente Annexe est destinée à rappeler les données du calcul numérique, ainsi que la
marche à suivre lors de l'établissement de la courbe de réponse aux im pulsions répétées. Les
h ypothèses inhérentes à la méthode sont égalem ent précisées. Le calcul se subdivise en trois
étapes successives.
NOTE Le texte sur l e d étecteur de val eu r efficace de l a présente ann exe traite d u récepteur d e m esure de valeu r
efficace en théori e et s'appli q ue au récepteur de m esure d e val eu r m oyen ne efficace au-d elà d e la fréqu ence de
cassure fc comm e défini à l'Article 7.
La réponse im pulsionnelle de ces étages est en général pratiquem ent déterm inée par les
seuls étages à fréquence interm édiaire qui définissent la sélectivité globale du récepteur.
I l est d'usage de considérer que cette sélectivité peut être obtenue par un groupem ent de
deux transform ateurs accordés en couplage critique et placés en cascade de manière à
réaliser la bande passante désirée aux points à –6 dB. Tout autre schém a équivalent peut
être ramené au cas précédent pour le calcul. La symétrie pratique de cette bande passante
perm et d'utiliser le filtre passe-bas équivalent pour le calcul de l'enveloppe de la réponse
im pulsionnelle. L'erreur qui résulte de cette approxim ation est négligeable.
où
G est le gain global à la fréquence d'accord;
2ω02
F( f ) = G × (A. 3)
[(ω0 + jω )2 + ω02 ]2
où ω = 2 π f .
– 1 52 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
2 × 4 ( 2 − 1 )ω 0 (A. 4)
B3 =
= 0,361ω 0
π
2 × ω0 (A. 5)
B6 = = 0, 450ω 0
π
1
+∞
2 ( f )df
∆ f =
∫− ∞
F (A. 6)
F02
où
f = ∫ F 2 ( f )df (A. 7)
+∞
∆
−∞
∞
2ω 02
∆ f = ∫ 2
df (A. 8)
24
0
[(ω 0 + jω )2 +ω 0 ]
soit:
B 3 = 0, 963 ∆ f (A. 1 0)
A. 3. 1 Gén éralités
Le calcul est effectué dans l'h ypothèse où le raccordem ent des circuits de détection à la
sortie du dernier étage en fréquence intermédiaire n'affecte ni l'amplitude, ni la forme du
signal ém anant de ce dernier. Autrem ent dit, l'im pédance de sortie de cet étage est
considérée comm e négligeable vis-à-vis de l'im pédance d'entrée du détecteur.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 53 –
Tout détecteur peut se ram ener au schéma (réel ou équivalent) d'un élément non linéaire
(diode par exemple) associé à une résistance (résistance directe totale S), et suivi d'un circuit
com prenant un condensateur C en parallèle sur une résistance de décharge R .
La tension U aux bornes du condensateur est liée à l'am plitude A du signal RF appliqué au
détecteur, par l'équation:
dU A (sin θ − θ cos θ )
+ UI( RC ) = (A. 1 1 )
dt π ×S×C
où θ est l'angle de passage de l'onde ( U = A cos θ ).
Cette équation n'est pas directem ent intégrable. Une valeur du produit S × C, qui, pour les
constantes de temps choisies, satisfait aux conditions ci-dessus, est obtenue par des
méthodes d'approxim ation, par exem ple:
dans la bande A: TC = 45 m s
TD = 500 ms
2, 81 S × C = 1 ms
dans la bande B: TC = 1 ms
TD = 1 60 ms
3, 95 S × C = 1 ms
dans les bandes C et D: TC = 1 ms
TD = 550 ms
4, 07 S × C = 1 ms
En insérant la valeur ainsi obtenue dans l'Équation (A. 1 1 ), celle-ci peut être résolue pour une
impulsion isolée ou pour des impulsions répétées (touj ours par des méthodes
d'approxim ation) en introduisant à la place de l'amplitude constante A , la fonction A ( t) fournie
par les Équations (A.1 ) et (A. 2).
Ce cas d'impulsions répétées n e peut pratiquem ent se résoudre qu'en fixant arbitrairem ent un
niveau pour la tension de sortie du détecteur au début de chaque im pulsion, en déterminant
l'incrément ∆ U de cette tension occasionné par l'im pulsion et ensuite en trouvant
l'espacem ent qui doit nécessairement exister entre deux im pulsions successives afin d e
répéter les conditions initiales choisies.
où
α( t) est la déviation de l'appareil;
TD est la constante de tem ps à la décharge électrique du voltm ètre de quasi-crête;
TM
est la constante de tem ps mécanique de l'appareil indicateur réglé à l'amortissement
critique.
La solution du problème est relativement simple aux deux extrémités de la courbe de
réponse; d'une part pour les im pulsions suffisamm ent espacées pour que le point de départ
soit nul et donc connu et d'autre part pour les impulsions ayant une fréquence de répétition
suffisamm ent élevée pour que l'inertie de l'appareil l'em pêche de suivre fidèlem ent les
fluctuations du signal. Pour les cas interm édiaires, le calcul se com plique notablem ent. Au
début de chaque impulsion, la déviation de l'instrument varie, et une solution doit être trouvée
pour prendre en com pte la position initiale et la vitesse.
1 /2
+∞ A 2 (t)
(A. 1 3)
Urms = n∫ dt
0 2
Elle peut égalem ent être déduite de la courbe de réponse en fréquence, soit:
1 /2
+∞ 2υτ × F 2 ( f ) (A. 1 4)
Urms = n∫ df
−∞ 2
1 /2
F 2 ( f ) df (A. 1 5)
+∞
Urms = 2 × υτ × n ∫
−∞
Urms = 2 × υτ × n × ∆ f (A. 1 6)
Urm s = 2 m V, lorsque n = 1 00 H z
soit:
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 55 –
1 00 2
υt = µVs (A. 1 7)
∆f
1 39
υt = µVs (A. 1 8)
B3
Urms = (υt ) × (2 n ∆f )1 /2
A ( t) crête = 0, 944 × υt × ω 0
At B
1 /2
= (A. 1 9)
( )
crête
1, 2 8
3
2×U rms
n
1 39
(υt ) rms = µVs
B3
Pour la courbe de sélectivité représentée par l'Équation (A. 3), ce résultat correspond à:
1 55
(υt ) rms = µVs
B6
(υt ) rms
= 1 4,3 dB
(υt ) qp
(υt ) rms
= 20,1 dB
(υt ) qp
Annexe B
(normative)
Détermination du spectre du générateur d'impulsions
(voir 4.4, 5.5, 6.5, 7. 5)
Pour chaque bande de fréquences du récepteur de m esure en essai, le générateur utilisé doit
être capable de produire des im pulsions de l'aire spécifiée dans la gamme de fréquences de
répétition donnée au Tableau B. 1 . I l convient de connaître à l'aire d'im pulsion à ± 0,5 dB près
et la fréquence de répétition à 1 % près environ.
I l convient que le spectre soit pratiquem ent constant j usqu'à la lim ite supérieure de la bande
de fréquence du récepteur en essai. Le spectre peut être considéré suffisamm ent uniform e si,
dans cette bande, la variation d'amplitude du spectre n'est pas supérieure à 2 dB par rapport
à sa valeur aux fréquences plus basses de la bande. L'aire d'impulsion à la fréquence de
mesure doit être connue à ± 0,5 dB près .
Pour vérifier la conform ité aux exigences de 4. 6, le spectre au-delà de la limite supérieure de
la bande de fréquences doit être limité (1 0 dB d'affaiblissem ent à deux fois la fréquence
supérieure). Cela est nécessaire pour norm aliser la sévérité de l'essai du fait que les produits
d'intermodulation de toutes les composantes du spectre contribuent à la réponse.
Le générateur d'im pulsions est connecté à l'entrée d'un récepteur RF, suivi d'un oscilloscope
connecté de façon à visualiser l'im pulsion RF à la sortie du récepteur.
E
St ( f ) = 0
B6
Le spectre du générateur d'im pulsions est donné par la courbe liant St ( f) à la fréquence de
mesure.
I l convient que le récepteur utilisé soit linéaire pour les niveaux de crête des signaux utilisés.
Les m esures peuvent être effectuées avec un récepteur conforme à la présente spécification,
en utilisant l'indicateur de quasi-crête à la place de l'oscilloscope, à condition que la
fréquence de répétition des impulsions soit m aintenue constante pendant toute la série de
m esures.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 59 –
Annexe C
(normative)
Mesures précises à la sortie des générateurs
d'impulsions de l'ordre de la nanoseconde
(voir 4.4, 5.5, 6.5, 7. 5)
C. 1 . 1 Gén éralités
Les recherches théoriques et pratiques ont m ontré que, lorsqu'elles sont appliquées avec un
soin raisonnable, les m éthodes de mesure précises comprennent les méthodes citées de
C. 1 . 2 à C.1 .5.
(com pte tenu du signe de ses différentes parties) est mesurée de façon à évaluer l'intégrale
figurant dans l'équation:
(C. 1 )
+∞
2( Aimp ) = S( f ) = ∫ A ( t, f )dt
−∞
où
En variante à cette méthode pour des impulsions dont la durée est notablem ent inférieure à la
période correspondant à la fréquence ( f), l'aire de l'impulsion peut être mesurée directement
comm e aire intégrée au m oyen d'un oscilloscope adapté (par exem ple, pour des impulsions
de l'ordre de la nanoseconde, un oscilloscope à échantillonnage est exigé), l'intégration
tenant com pte du signe des différentes parties de l'aire.
Lorsque la fréquence de répétition d'im pulsion F est supérieure aux valeurs de la largeur de
bande du récepteur de mesure, ce dernier peut alors sélectionner une seule raie du spectre
des im pulsions. Dans ce cas, l'aire de l'im pulsion peut être déterm inée comme suit:
V V 2 (C. 2)
Aimp = K =
2F 2F
Le générateur d'im pulsions peut ensuite être utilisé pour étalonner la caractéristique de
réponse aux im pulsions d'un récepteur de mesure dans lequel la largeur de bande est
suffisamm ent large pour englober de nom breux harm oniques (au moins 1 0 dans la largeur de
bande à 6 dB).
C.2.2 La fréquence de répétition des im pulsions doit être connue avec une erreur ne
dépassant pas 1 %.
C.2.3 Pour déterm iner la conform ité avec 4. 4. 2, 5. 5, 6. 5. 4 et 7. 5.3, l'aire d'impulsion ne doit
pas dépendre de leur fréquence de répétition.
C.2.4 Pour déterm iner la conformité avec 4. 4, 5.5, 6. 5 et 7. 5, il convient que le spectre de
fréquence du générateur soit uniforme dans toute la bande passante du récepteur de m esure.
Cette exigence est considérée satisfaite dans les cas suivants:
a) si la variation du spectre de fréquence est sensiblem ent linéaire en fonction de la
fréquence dans toute la bande passante du récepteur et si les irrégularités de ce spectre
ne dépassent pas 0, 5 dB dans la bande du récepteur m esurée aux points à –6 dB;
b) si le spectre décroît régulièrement des deux côtés de la fréquence d'accord du récepteur,
et si la largeur du spectre à –6 dB est au m oins cinq fois plus grande que la bande
passante du récepteur à ce niveau.
Dans les deux cas, l'aire d'impulsion est supposée être égale à sa valeur à la fréquence
d'accord.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 61 –
Annexe D
(normative)
Influence des caractéristiques du récepteur de mesure
de quasi-crête sur sa réponse aux impulsions
(voir 4.4.2)
Le niveau de la courbe de réponse impulsionnelle pour des fréquences de répétition élevées
dépend essentiellement de la valeur de la bande passante. D'autre part, aux fréquences de
répétition basses, les constantes de temps jouent un rôle plus important. Aucune tolérance
n'a été précisée pour ces constantes de tem ps, mais, pour inform ation, une valeur de 20 %
est considérée raisonnable.
C'est égalem ent aux très basses fréquences de répétition que les effets du manque de
réserve de linéarité sont les plus visibles. Les valeurs exigées pour la réserve de linéarité
sont les valeurs nécessaires à une m esure précise d'une im pulsion isolée qui utilisent la
bande passante et les constantes de temps prescrites.
Annexe E
(normative)
Réponse des récepteurs de mesures de valeurs moyennes et de crête
(voir 6.3.1 )
I l a été montré en [1 9] et [20] que l'aire de l'enveloppe de la courbe réponse aux im pulsions
d'un circuit à bande étroite dont la courbe de sélectivité est symétrique est indépendante de
la largeur de bande et s'obtient par:
(E. 1 )
+∞
∫−A∞ ( t ) dt = 2υτG0
Ce théorèm e n'est valable que dans le cas où l'enveloppe ne comporte aucune oscillation.
Les oscillations de l'enveloppe sont caractéristiques des circuits à double accord et, à m oins
d'utiliser un détecteur sensible à la phase, il peut être nécessaire de com penser par un
étalonnage l'erreur introduite par les oscillations de la réponse. Dans le cas du couplage
critique, la seconde crête de l'enveloppe est de l'ordre de 8, 3 % de la prem ière.
NOTE La réponse des étages précéd ant le d étecteu r, tell e que d éfini e en A. 2, est de nature oscillatoi re. En
conséqu ence, l'erreur d'étal onnage i ntroduite par l a réponse oscillatoi re est com pensée par l a valeur de l a
tolérance non centrée d e + 2, 5 dB/–0, 5 dB de 6. 5. 2.
Au vu de l'Équation (E. 1 ), il apparaît sans intérêt de définir une bande passante effective
dans le cas d'un détecteur de valeur moyenne.
Pour le calcul de la réserve de linéarité et pour son em ploi avec les récepteurs de m esure de
crête, il est utile de définir la grandeur suivante, appelée bande passante effective en
impulsions des circuits précédant le détecteur:
A( t ) max
Bimp = (E. 2)
2 G0
où A ( t) m ax est l'enveloppe de crête du signal à la sortie des étages à fréquence interm édiaire
lorsqu'une impulsion unité est appliquée.
0 944
= 1 05 B6 ou 1 ,31 B3 (E. 3)
Bimp
,
2 0
= ω ,
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 63 –
où B 6 et B 3 sont définis en 3. 6.
Dans le cas de circuits accordés d'autres types, la valeur du rapport de B im p à B 6 peut être
estimée à l'aide de la Figure E.1 , à condition de connaître le rapport de B 20 à B 3 , où B 20 est la
largeur de bande à 20 dB.
1 , 20
1 ,1 5
∆ f6 d B
∆ fim p
1 ,1 0
1 , 05
Dou ble tu ned stages critical coupli ng
1 , 00
0, 95
1 2 3 4 5
B 20
Shape factor
B3
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Correction factor Facteur de correcti on
Singl e-tu ned stages Étages à circuits accordés simples
Dou ble tu ned staged critical coupli ng Étages à deu x ci rcuits accordés au coupl age critiq ue
Shape factor Facteur de form e
Figu re E.1 – Facteu r de correction d'estimation du rapport B i mp / B 6
dan s l e cas de circuits accord és d'au tres types
Dans le cas d'un récepteur de m esure de valeur m oyenne, pour une fréquence de répétition
de n H z, l'aire de l'impulsion exigée pour obtenir une réponse égale à la réponse à un signal
sinusoïdal non m odulé, à la fréquence d'accord et de valeur efficace 2 mV, produit par un
générateur de mêm e im pédance de sortie que le générateur d'impulsions, a pour expression:
1, 4
υt = mVs (E. 4)
n
(υt )
= 3 2, 9
moy
dB
υt
( )
qc
(υt )
= 5 0,1
moy
dB
υt
( )
qc
Si un indicateur à lecture directe est utilisé dans le récepteur, les exigences relatives aux
constantes de temps peuvent être déterm inées à l'aide de la courbe de la Figure E. 2; celle-ci
exprime le rapport (en %) de la lecture à la valeur réelle de la crête en fonction d'un
param ètre qui tient compte du rapport des constantes de temps, de la largeur de bande B 6 et
de la cadence de répétition des im pulsions. Pour utiliser cette courbe, il convient de noter la
relation:
RC 1 TC
= 4 (E. 5)
RD TD
Par exem ple, pour obtenir une lecture à au m oins 90 % de la crête réelle, avec une fréquence
de répétition de 1 H z, il est nécessaire d'avoir un rapport des constantes de temps à la
charge et à la décharge de:
1 , 25 × 1 0 6 dans la plage de fréquences comprises entre 0, 1 5 M H z et 30 MH z;
1 , 67 × 1 0 7 dans la plage de fréquences comprises entre 30 MH z et 1 000 MH z.
La valeur de l'aire de l'im pulsion, A im p , exigée pour obtenir une réponse du récepteur de
m esure de crête équivalente à la réponse à un signal sinusoïdal non modulé, à la fréquence
d'accord de valeur efficace 2 m V, est:
1, 4
mVs (avec B im p en H z) (E. 6)
Bimp
π R cB 6
α =( )
RDN
R C = Ch argin g resistance ( Ω )
R D = Discharg e resistance ( Ω )
80
60
40
20
0
1 0 -3 1 0 -2 1 0 -1 1 10
α
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
R C = Ch argin g resistance R C = Résistance de ch arge
D R = Discharge resistance D R = Résistance d e déch arge
B 6 = 6 dB band width B 6 = Largeur de ban de d e 6 dB
N = Pulse repetition frequency (PPS) N = Fréq uence de répétition des im pulsions (FRI )
P = Meter readin g as a percentage of true peak P = I ndicateur d e m esure en pourcentage d e la crête
réelle
Figu re E.2 – Coeffi cient de rectification d es impulsions P
– 1 66 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Pour le récepteur de m esure doté d'un détecteur de crête avec une largeur de bande B im p de
1 MH z, une aire d'im pulsion (f.é.m. ) de 1 , 4/ B im p mVs est exigée, c'est-à-dire 1 , 4 nVs pour une
réponse égale à celle d'un signal sinusoïdal non m odulé accordé sur la fréquence de
réception ayant une f. é. m. avec une valeur efficace de 2 mV [66 dB( µ V)]. Une porteuse
m odulée en impulsion ayant l'aire d'impulsion exigée peut être générée avec les diverses
largeurs d'impulsions représentées au Tableau E. 2.
Pour un récepteur de mesure doté d'un détecteur de valeur moyenne linéaire, l'aire
d'im pulsion (f. é. m. ) égale à un signal sinusoïdal non modulé à la fréquence de réception
ayant une f. é. m. avec une valeur efficace de 2 mV [66 dB( µ V)] doit être de 1 ,4/ n mVs ( n étant
la cadence de répétition d'impulsion). Pour n = 50 000, l'aire d'im pulsion est de 28 nVs, ce qui
signifie 26 dB de plus que pour le récepteur de mesure de crête avec une B im p de 1 MH z.
Pour un récepteur de mesure doté d'un d étecteur de valeur efficace, l'aire d'impulsion (f. é. m.)
égale à un signal sinusoïdal non modulé à la fréquence de réception ayant une f. é.m . avec
une valeur efficace de 2 mV [66 dB( µ V)] doit être de 44( B 3 -1 /2 ) µ Vs pour une cadence d e
répétition d'im pulsion de 1 kH z. Pour une largeur de bande en impulsions B im p de 1 MH z, la
valeur correspondante de B 3 est de 700 kH z. Par conséquent, l'aire d'im pulsion exigée est de
52, 6 nVs, ce qui signifie 31 , 5 dB de plus que pour le récepteur de m esure de crête avec une
B im p de 1 MH z.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 67 –
50 PRN
40
30
20
10
–1 0
Center 1 28 MHz 5 MHz Span 50 MHz
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Marker Marq ueu r
Centre Centre
Span Étendue
Figu re E.3 – Exempl e (captu re d'écran d e spectre) de sign al à modu lation
d'impul si on avec un e largeu r d'impul sion d e 200 n s
U
Bimp = p (E. 7)
D
de bande vidéo du récepteur. B im p est plus large que B 6 , mais il n'y a pas de facteur général
de relation entre B im p et B 6 ou B 3 du récepteur.
E.7.2 M éthode 1 : M esure par comparaison des réponses de B imp à deux impulsions
d'amplitude et de largeur identiques, mais avec des fréquences de répétition
d'impulsion (PRF) basse et élevée
Cette m éthode applique un signal RF m odulé en impulsion, avec une courte durée d'im pulsion
ainsi que décrit à la Figure E. 4 et deux valeurs différentes de PRF. Avec la valeur de PRF
élevée ( fp » B im p ), le récepteur peut être syntonisé sur la fréquence porteuse ainsi que décrit à
la Figure E. 5, et avec la valeur de PRF basse fp ( fp « B im p ), le spectre apparaîtra comm e un
signal en bande large comm e décrit à la Figure E. 6 avec une densité spectrale d'impulsion de
D = U1 × t . La form e d'impulsion (amplitude U1 et durée t ) doit être indépendante de la PRF.
Pour B im p = 1 MH z, fp1 peut être sélectionnée à 30 MH z et fp2 peut être de 30 kH z.
t T0
Voltage
U1
Time
An glais Français
Voltage Tension
Tim e Tem ps
Pulse width (at 50 % poi nts) Largeur d'im pulsion (à 50 % des points)
Pulse repetition frequ ency (PRF) Fréq uence de répétition d es impulsions (FRI )
Carri er sig nal freq uency Fréq uence du si gnal de porteu se
Figu re E.4 – Signal RF à modulation d'impulsion appliqué à un récepteu r de mesure
fp >> Bimp
U2 = U1 × t × fp
Voltage
Frequency
f0 – 1 f0 f0 + 1
t t
2 1
t t
IEC
An glais Français
Voltage Tension
Freq uency Fréq uence
Figu re E.5 – Filtrage avec une B imp nettement inférieu re à la PRF
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 69 –
fp >> Bimp
Voltage f0 – 1 f0 f0 + 1 Frequency
t t
2 1
t t
U1
Carrier signal
U2 = U1 × t × Bimp
Voltage
Frequency
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Voltage Tension
Freq uency Fréq uence
Carri er sig nal Signal de porteuse
RMS val ue of peak of transient response Valeu r efficace d e la crête d e l a réponse transitoire
Figu re E.6 – Filtrag e avec un e B i mp nettement plu s large qu e la PRF
Avec la première mesure, l'amplitude en valeur efficace U2 peut être calculée comme
U2 = U1 × t × fp1 . U ne faible incertitude de mesure peut être obtenue grâce à un rapport
signal sur bruit élevé. Mais des précautions doivent être prises pour éviter la surcharge. Avec
la seconde m esure, la réponse m axim ale de l a valeur efficace de la crête au transitoire peut
être calculée comm e Up = U1 × t × B im p . Si le produit U1 × t est parfaitement égal dans les
deux mesures, alors B imp peut être calculée à partir des deux résultats de m esure comm e
décrit à la Figure E.7 en utilisant l'Équation (E. 2):
U
Bimp = fp1 × p (E. 8)
U2
– 1 70 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Receiver response
U2 U2 = U1 × t × fp1
Up = U1 × t × Bimp
Up
Up Bimp = fp1 ×
U2
Cette méthode déterm ine la densité spectrale d'im pulsion D en utilisant l'équation D = Uk / fp ,
où Uk est la tension m esurée sur l'une des raies spectrales (c'est-à-dire, la fréquence
porteuse si le signal est une porteuse modulée en im pulsion, ou la raie centrale à la
fréquence de réception, pour laquelle B im p doit être mesurée) et fp est la PRF. I l est rappelé
que fp doit être très supérieure à la largeur de bande étroite et très inférieure à la B im p à
m esurer, c'est-à-dire que B étroite « fp « B im p . U n exemple de réglages peut être B étroite = 9 kH z,
fp = 1 00 kH z pour B im p = 1 MH z. La m éthode exige une comparaison des réponses du filtre en
bande étroite et du filtre à m esurer en appliquant un signal sinusoïdal non modulé aux deux
filtres et en dérivant un facteur de correction c pour le calcul de D ( c = U2 / U1 , U2 étant la
valeur pour le filtre bande large et U1 la valeur pour le filtre bande étroite). En conséquence
D = c × Uk/fp . Lorsque D est déterminé, Up est m esurée avec le détecteur de crête et B im p peut
être calculée en utilisant l'Équation (E.2).
Dans ce cas, la largeur de bande en impulsions d'un récepteur de mesure est définie comm e
l'aire de la fonction de sélectivité linéaire norm alisée U( f), 1 / Um ax représentant le facteur de
norm alisation:
1 +∞
Bimp =
∫−U ( f )df (E. 9)
Umax ∞
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 71 –
N
1 ∆f
[U( fn ) + U( fn +1 )] ×
Umax ∑
Bimp = (E. 1 0)
n =1 2
1 MHz
1 ,2
1 ,0
0,8
MHz
0,6 1 MHz
0,4
0,2
0
–3 000 –1 500 0 1 500 3 000
kHz IEC
Figu re E.8 – Exempl e de fonction de sél ectivité lin éai re n ormal isée
– 1 72 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Annexe F
(normative)
Contrôle des caractéristiques pour les exceptions aux définitions
d'un claquement selon 4.2.3 de la CISPR 1 4-1 : 2005
Pour l'application des exceptions données dans la CI SPR 1 4-1 , l'anal yseur de perturbations
doit fournir les informations com plémentaires suivantes (voir le Tableau F. 1 pour les détails
d'essai):
a) le nombre de claquements de durée inférieure ou égale à 1 0 m s;
b) le nombre de claquements d e durée supérieure à 1 0 m s mais inférieure ou égale à 20 m s;
c) le nombre de claquements de durée supérieure à 20 ms mais inférieure ou égale à 200
m s;
d) la durée de chaque perturbation enregistrée dont l'am plitude dépasse la limite du niveau
quasi-crête pour les perturbations continues;
e) une indication que l'appareil soumis à l'essai n'est pas conforme, s'il est clair qu'il produit
des perturbations autres que des claquements ne correspondant pas à la définition d'un
claquement et auxquelles aucune des exceptions ne peut s'appliquer;
f) l'intervalle de temps entre le début de l'essai et l'apparition des perturbations mentionnées
en e);
g) la durée totale des perturbations autres que des claquements dont le niveau limite quasi -
crête dépasse la lim ite pour les perturbations continues;
h) le taux de répétition des claquements.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 73 –
500 m s
2 1 9, 5 1 cl aquem ent
≤1 0 m s
500 m s
3 1 1 0, 5 1 cl aquem ent
> 1 0 m s,
≤ 20 m s
500 m s
– 1 74 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Tableau F.1 (2 de 6)
500 m s
5 1 21 1 claqu em ent
> 20 m s
500 m s
6 1 1 90 1 cl aquem ent
> 20 m s
1 s
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 75 –
Tableau F.1 (3 de 6)
Note 1 de ce 1 s
tableau, règl e
des 600 m s)
AU TREM EN T
Pertu rbati on continu e (570 m s)
8 5 5 220 220 1 90 REFUSÉ
Pertu rbati on
continu e
(Voir E2 et
Note 1 de ce
tableau: pas
d'exception
car la d urée
totale est
630 m s >
600 m s)
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000
1 s
9 5 5 1 90 1 90 1 90 SI
le tau x final de
répétition de
claquem ent est
inférieu r à 5:
2 claqu em ents
> 20 m s
(Voir E4 et Note
1 de ce tableau:
règ le d es 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 00
réfri gérateurs;
voi r aussi 1 s
Note 2 de ce
tableau. )
– 1 76 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Tableau F.1 (4 de 6)
Note 2 de ce 1 s
tableau. )
AU TREM EN T SI
une seule fois par cycl e de program m e ou pou r
la du rée d'observati on m inim ale: com pté
comm e 1 claquem ent < 600 m s
(Voir E2 et Note 1 d e ce tabl eau, 2 × 285 m s
> 20 m s)
AU TREM EN T
refusé: perturbation conti nue (285 m s)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 77 –
Tableau F.1 (5 de 6)
Tableau F. 1 (6 de 6)
Test Evaluation by
No Test signal the analyzer
1 click >20 ms
6 1 90 ms/1 dB
1 click ≤ 600 ms
21 0 ms/5 dB 21 0 ms/5 dB
7 1 50 ms (DUT programme-controlled)
Continuous
8 220 ms/5 dB 220 ms/5 dB
1 90 ms ≥ 600 ms
1 click ≤ 600 ms
1 90 ms/5 dB 1 90 ms/5 dB (counted as 2 clicks
9 1 90 ms refrigerator rule)
for N <5 - 2 clicks
for N ≥5 - continuous, or
10 50 ms/5 dB 50 ms/5 dB 1 click ≤600 ms
1 85 ms for programme controlled DUT
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Test No. Essai N°
Test signal Signal d'essai
Evalu ation by the anal yzer Évalu ation effectuée par l'anal yseur
1 click ≤ 1 0 m s 1 claqu em ent ≤ 1 0 m s
1 click ≤ 600 m s (DUT program m e-controll ed ) 1 claqu em ent ≤ 600 m s (DUT contrôlé par prog ram m e)
Conti nu ous ≥ 600 m s Conti nu ≥ 600 m s
1 click ≤ 600 m s (counted as 2 clicks refrigerator rule) 1 claqu em ent ≤ 600 m s (com pté comm e 2 claquem ents,
règl e des réfrigérateu rs)
for N< 5 – 2 clicks, for N≥ 5 – continu ous, or click ≤ 600 pou r N < 5 – 2 claquem ents, pour N ≥ 5 – contin u ou
s for program m e controlled DU T claquem ent ≤ 600 s pour le DU T contrôl é par
programm e
9 pulses/5 m s/20 dB 9 im pulsions/5 m s/20 dB
repeated u p to 40 counted clicks répétées j usqu'à 40 claqu em ents com ptés
Figu re F.1 – Présentati on g raph iqu e des sign au x d'essai u tilisés
pour l e contrôle des perform an ces de l'analyseur avec exigences
compl émentai res conformément au Tabl eau F. 1
– 1 80 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Annexe G
(informative)
Justifications relatives aux spécifications
de la fonction de mesure de DPA
Les spécifications sont basées sur les définitions et les considérations suivantes:
a) Plag e d ynamique de l'ampl itud e
La plage d ynamique de l'amplitude est définie comme la plage nécessaire pour obtenir la
DPA. La lim ite supérieure de la plage d ynamique doit être supérieure au niveau de crête
de perturbation à mesurer et la limite la plus basse doit être inférieure au niveau de la
lim ite de perturbation spécifiée par les com ités de produits.
Selon la CI SPR 1 1 , la limite de crête pour les équipem ents I SM de groupe 2, classe B, est
fixée à 1 1 0 dB( µ V/m) , et la limite pondérée est fixée à 60 dB( µ V/m). En conséquence,
une plage d ynamique supérieure à 60 dB avec une marge de 1 0 dB est proposée.
b) Tau x d'éch antil lon nage
I déalement, la DPA des perturbations est m esurée en utilisant la largeur de bande
équivalente du service de radiocomm unications à protéger. Cependant, la largeur de
bande de résolution de l'anal yseur de spectre est fixée à 1 MH z pour la plage de
fréquences au-dessus de 1 GH z. Le taux d'échantillonnage doit de ce fait être supérieur à
1 0 millions d'échantillons par seconde.
c) Temps m axim al mesu rable
La CI SPR 1 1 spécifie le tem ps de m aintien du maximum comm e une période de 2 m in
pour des mesures en crête sur des appareils de cuisson à micro-ondes au-dessus de
1 GH z. En conséquence, la durée d'une m esure de DPA doit être de 2 min au m inim um.
La taille du compteur ou de la m émoire étant limitée, des mesures continues peuvent
s'avérer difficiles à effectuer sur de longues périodes de m esure. C'est pourquoi une
mesure intermittente peut être réalisée, à condition que le tem ps mort soit inférieur à 1 %
de la durée totale de la mesure.
d) Probabil ité minimale mesurable
Environ 1 00 occurrences de signal peuvent être nécessaires pour obtenir un résultat
significatif. En conséquence, la probabilité minimale mesurable est calculée comm e suit:
considérant une durée de mesure de 2 m in et un taux d'échantillonnage de 1 0 m illions
d'échantillons par seconde, la probabilité est déterminée de la manière suivante:
1 00/(1 20 × 1 0 × 1 0 6 ) ± 1 0 –7
e) Affi ch age d es donn ées de mesu re de DPA
La résolution de l'amplitude pour l’affichage des résultats de la DPA dépend de la plage
d ynamique et de la résolution du convertisseur A/N. Par exem ple, la résolution de
l’affichage devient inférieure à 0, 25 dB ( ± 60 dB/256) lorsqu’un convertisseur A/N 8 bits
est appliqué à la plage dynam ique de 60 dB.
Les Figures G. 1 et G. 2 indiquent les schém as fonctionnels de mise en œuvre de la fonction
de mesure de DPA.
I nput
Pre-assigned
l evel N o. 1
Pre-assigned
level N o. 2
Pre-assigned
level No. n
IEC
An glais Français
I nput Entrée
Clock Horlog e
Com parator No. Com parateu r N°
Gate N o. Porte N°
Cou nter No. Com pteur N°
Pre-assigned level No. Niveau préassign é N°
Figure G.1 – Schéma fonctionnel du circuit de mesu re de DPA sans convertisseur A/N
+1 increm ent
APD( i )
IEC
Figure G.2 – Schéma fonctionnel du circuit de mesu re de DPA avec convertisseur A/N
– 1 82 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
1 00
1 0 –4
1 0 –6
EUT: OFF
(receiver noise)
1 0 –8
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Am plitude dB( µV/m )
IEC
Annexe H
(informative)
Caractéristiques d'un récepteur de mesure de quasi-crête
Le Tableau H . 1 donne les spécifications d'un récepteur de mesure de quasi-crête. Ces
spécifications décrivent les caractéristiques globales d'un tel appareil de m esure et ne
décrivent pas la spécification des com posants et sous-ensembles individuels de l'appareil.
Les réponses aux impulsions telles que spécifiées en 4. 4 sont calculées sur la base des
récepteurs de m esure ayant les caractéristiques fondamentales suivantes.
Annexe I
(informative)
Exemple d'architecture d'un récepteur de perturbations
électromagnétiques (EMI) et d'un anal yseur de spectre à
La présente Annexe donne une brève description des principales différences entre
"récepteurs de perturbations électromagnétiques (EMI )" et "anal yseurs de spectre à
balayage", dans le cadre de la présente norm e. La Figure I . 1 illustre un exemple de
l'architecture des deux types d'appareils. Les parties grisées sont normalem ent m ises en
œuvre dans les instrum ents d'essai pour assurer la conformité aux spécifications données
dans la présente norme.
NOTE Des i nform ations d e contexte supplém entai res sont actuell em ent en préparation pour la CI SPR 1 6-3.
Loudspeaker
Envelope
Attenuator Preselection Preamplifier Mixer IF bandwiths detector Detectors
Quasi-peak/
RF average
IF
e.g. 1 0 Hz-3 MHz
LO
Sweep Display
generator IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Lou dspeaker Haut-parl eu r
RF RF
Attenuator Atténuateur
Preselection Présélection
Pream plifier Préam plificateur
Mi xer Mél an geu r
e. g. 1 0 Hz-3 MH z p. ex. , 1 0 H z-3 M Hz
I F band widths Largeurs de bande f. i.
Envel ope detector Détecteur d'en vel oppe
Detectors Détecteurs
Quasi-peak/average Quasi-crête/m oyenn e
LO LO
Sweep generator Générateu r à balayage
Displ ay Affichage
Figu re I.1 – Exemple de sch éma fon ctionn el du récepteu r EM I constitu é d'un an alyseu r
de spectre à bal ayage avec ajout d'u n présélecteu r, d'u n préamplificateu r et d'u n
détecteu r de quasi-crête/valeu r moyen ne
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 85 –
Les principales différences entre les deux types d'appareils sont décrites ci -après.
a) Les anal yseurs de spectre à balayage sont des appareils à scrutation, qui accordent en
perm anence la fréquence de leur oscillateur local (LO) pour couvrir la plage de
fréquences choisie. Certains récepteurs EMI réalisent une scrutation incrémentale, c'est-
à-dire que l'appareil de m esure est accordé sur des fréquences fixes dans des tailles
d'incrém ents de fréquences définies pour couvrir la plage de fréquences étudiée.
L'amplitude de chaque fréquence de réglage est mesurée et conservée pour un traitem ent
ou un affichage ultérieur.
b) La plupart des anal yseurs de spectre à balayage ne possèdent pas de présélection (c'est-
à-dire de filtrage en entrée) intégrée à l'appareil avant la première étape de conversion de
fréquence. Ceci donne généralem ent lieu à une gamm e dynamique inappropriée pour les
m esures des impulsions de fréquences à faible répétition avec détection de quasi -crête et
cela peut conduire à des résultats de m esure erronés dans ces circonstances.
c) Des anal yseurs de spectre à balayage à présélection sont disponibles sur le marché. Ce
type d'appareils peut satisfaire à toutes les exigences im posées par la présente norme et,
s'ils sont com plètem ent conform es à la présente norme, ils peuvent être utilisés sans
restriction pour réaliser des mesures d'ém ission conform ém ent à la série CI SPR 1 6-2.
d) Les spécifications applicables aux anal yseurs de spectre qui ne possèdent pas de
présélection pour la détection de quasi-crête sont moins sévères et leur utilisation dépend
des signaux à m esurer.
e) Les anal yseurs de spectre peuvent ne pas être équipés d'un préamplificateur intégré. Les
récepteurs EMI reçoivent en général un préamplificateur intégré après l'étape de
présélection.
f) Les critères de sélectivité des fréquences, définis en 4. 5, peuvent ne pas être remplis par
les anal yseurs de spectre à balayage. Généralem ent, les anal yseurs de spectre à
balayage utilisent des filtres de type Gaussien qui peuvent ne pas satisfaire à ces
exigences. La présente norm e exige que les anal yseurs de spectre à balayage
satisfassent aux spécifications de 4. 5.
g) Les anal yseurs de spectre à balayage peuvent ne pas être équipés d'un détecteur de
quasi-crête intégré. La présente norm e exige q ue les anal yseurs de spectre satisfassent
aux spécifications de 4.4 pour la détection de quasi-crête. Toutefois, les exigences
documentées pour les fréquences de répétition d'im pulsions ne sont pas applicables aux
anal yseurs de spectre à balayage sans présélection.
h) Les anal yseurs de spectre à balayage peuvent ne pas avoir la réponse correcte aux
perturbations intermittentes à bande étroite, instables et dérivantes telles que décrites en
6. 5. 4. La présente norme exige que les anal yseurs de spectre satisfassent aux
spécifications de 6. 5. 4.
– 1 86 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Annexe J
(normative)
Exigences lors de l'utilisation d'un préamplificateur
externe avec un récepteur de mesure
J.1 Généralités
L'utilisation d'un préamplificateur externe à l'entrée d'un récepteur de m esure doit être
considérée avec soin étant donné que, m êm e s'il am éliore la sensibilité du systèm e, il peut
invalider la satisfaction du systèm e aux exigences de surcharge de la présente N orm e. De
plus, un préamplificateur externe peut invalider l'aptitude à l'utilisation d'un anal yseur d e
spectre sans présélection pour la m esure des signaux impulsionnels avec des fréquences de
répétition des im pulsions jusqu'à 20 H z, à l'aide du détecteur de quasi-crête (voir 4.4.2).
Par conséquent, l'opérateur d'un système de mesure doté d'un préam plificateur externe doit
déterm iner les limitations du systèm e et doit appliquer des contrôles de linéarité pour le
systèm e d'essai. Les résultats de m esures autom atisées obtenus avec des préamplificateurs
externes doivent être vérifiés par contrôle manuel de la linéarité. Les inform ations de la
présente Annexe donnent les lignes directrices aux utilisateurs des systèm es de m esure des
ém issions.
En interne, les récepteurs de m esure sont conçus pour obtenir une sensibilité optim ale tout
en évitant les surcharges. La présélection intégrée dans le récepteur de mesure évite la
surcharge par les signaux impulsionnels. M algré la présélection, les récepteurs de m esure ne
présentent en général aucune réserve de linéarité pour les mesures de quasi -crête d'une
seule im pulsion au-dessus de la plage de lecture ci-dessus. L'absence de présélection dans
des récepteurs de m esure provoque des problèmes de détection de quasi -crête des signaux
im pulsionnels à la fréquence de répétition des im pulsions (FRI ).
L'utilisation d'un préamplificateur externe à bande large doit uniquem ent être considérée
après avoir procédé à toutes les autres mesures possibles visant à améliorer la sensibilité du
système à l'aide, par exem ple, de récepteurs de m esure dotés de préamplificateurs intégrés,
d'antennes présentant un gain suffisant ou de câbles de connexion à faible perte. U n
préamplificateur externe doit uniquement être ajouté lorsque la limite de perturbation et toutes
les émissions prévues à m esurer sont très proches du niveau de bruit du système, par
exemple pour la conform ité aux limites de perturbations rayonnées de Classe 5 de la
CI SPR 25 [1 4]. Si des signaux d'émission élevés ou des valeurs am biantes élevées sont
prévu(e)s, des préamplificateurs externes ne sont pas recom mandés.
L'expérience a m ontré que les préam plificateurs externes ne sont pas utiles pour mesurer les
perturbations rayonnées conform es aux limites de la Classe B de la CI SPR 1 1 , la CI SPR 22
[1 3] et la CI SPR 32 [1 5], à une distance de m esure de 3 m ou de 1 0 m, lorsque des
récepteurs de m esure dotés de préam plificateurs intégrés contenant la présélection et des
câbles d'antenne à faible perte sont utilisés. La m ême situation s'applique aux m esures des
perturbations rayonnées selon la CI SPR 1 4-1 , la CI SPR 1 5 [1 ] et les normes d'ém ission
génériques, ainsi que pour les m esures de puissance perturbatrice.
Des préamplificateurs externes ne sont pas recommandés pour les mesures de perturbations
rayonnées inférieures à 30 MH z. Leur utilisation peut générer des harmoniques en présence
de perturbations de haut niveau à des fréquences inférieures à 1 50 kH z, où la plupart des
normes d'ém ission ne spécifient pas de lim ites de perturbations.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 87 –
Si un préam plificateur externe est aj outé pour la sensibilité am éliorée, les éléments suivants
doivent être pris en compte:
a) les préamplificateurs présentent une importante largeur de bande, c'est-à-dire qu'ils sont
susceptibles d'être surchargés par des signaux im pulsionnels et des signaux à bande
étroite de haut niveau;
b) les préam plificateurs peuvent générer des produits d'interm odulation et des harmoniques.
Cela est particulièrement important lorsque les mesures sont réalisées sur un site d'essai
en espace libre et/ou en présence d'un équipem ent de transmission radio;
c) les préamplificateurs augmentent le niveau du signal à l'entrée du récepteur et peuvent
donc surcharger les niveaux d'entrée du récepteur, une condition qui ne peut pas être
totalem ent évitée par la présélection intégrée du récepteur;
d) le gain de sensibilité est moindre que le gain du niveau de signal, ce qui limite la plage
d ynam ique de la com binaison préamplificateur/récepteur;
NOTE 1 Le gai n de sensibi lité est enten du com m e étant la différence entre le facteur de bruit sans
préam plificateur et le facteur de bruit du systèm e avec préam plificateu r.
e) pour la sensibilité maxim ale dans la plage de fréquences supérieure à 1 GH z, le
préamplificateur est m onté/connecté directement à l'antenne de mesure;
f) l'utilisation d'un préamplificateur externe exige de tenir compte d'une caractérisation
gain/fréquence précise dans le résultat de mesure;
g) l'incertitude du gain en fonction de la température et du vieillissement, ainsi que
l'incertitude de désadaptation supplém entaire entre la sortie du préam plificateur et l'accès
d'entrée du récepteur, doivent être incluses dans le budget d'incertitude pour la m esure.
Dans la mesure du possible, l'im pédance d'entrée doit satisfaire aux exigences pour le
récepteur de m esure et doit être incluse dans le budget d'incertitude;
h) pour la bande CI SPR E, un systèm e composé d'un préam plificateur externe et d'un
récepteur de mesure doit être conçu de manière à ce qu'il ne puisse pas être surchargé
par des signaux des bandes de fréquence inférieures et/ou par un signal dont les signaux
hors bande ou non essentiels doivent être mesurés (le signal I SM d'un four à m icro-ondes
ne doit pas surcharger le systèm e, par exemple).
Le gain de sensibilité est déterm iné à l'aide des grandeurs et équations suivantes:
Pie
F= et, (J.1 )
kT0 B
Po
pour un am plificateur, F = (J. 2)
gkT0 B
où
F est le facteur de bruit, avec 1 0 lg F = facteur de bruit (souvent indiqué par le
sym bole NF);
Pie est la puissance d'entrée du bruit équivalent;
Po est la puissance de sortie du bruit;
g est calculé à partir du gain, G = 1 0 lg g, respectivem ent g = 1 0 G/1 0 ;
k est la constante de Boltzm ann = 1 , 38 × 1 0 –23 Ws/K and kT0 = 4 × 1 0 –21 W/H z;
T0 est la tem pérature ambiante absolue de référence (293 K);
B est la largeur de bande du bruit (du récepteur de mesure, par exemple).
– 1 88 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Preamplifier Receiver
F1 , g1 F2
ac1 ac2
IEC
An gl ai s Françai s
Pream plifier Préam plificateur
Recei ver Récepteur
Figu re J. 1 – Récepteu r avec préamplificateu r
F2 − 1
1 0 lg Ftot = ac1 + 1 0 lg F1 + (J. 3)
g1
Si a c2 ≠ 0 dB, alors le facteur de gain du préam plificateur g 1 dans l'Équation (J . 3) doit être
rem placé par 1 0 (G 1 – a c2 )/1 0 . L'atténuation de câble a c1 = 0 dB est obtenue en m ontant et/ou
connectant directement le préamplificateur à l'antenne. Si a c1 ≠ 0 dB, alors l'atténuation de
câble a c1 s'ajoute au facteur de bruit du systèm e présenté par l'Équation (J. 3).
NOTE 2 Le facteu r d e bruit 1 0 lg F2 d'u n récepteur de m esure peut être déterm iné à partir du niveau de bruit
indi qué par
1 0 lg F2 = VN av + 67 – 1 0 lg B N – w N av
où
VN av est le bruit de fond d u récepteur avec d étection de val eu r m oyen ne li néaire, en dB( µ V);
BN est la largeur d e band e du brui t du récepteur d e m esure, en H z;
w N av est le facteur de pondération du bruit pour l a détection d e val eur m oyenn e lin éai re, en dB.
La grandeur w N av est la différence entre les lectures du détecteur de valeur moyenne linéaire
et du détecteur de valeur efficace pour le bruit Gaussien [21 ] . Les valeurs de détection de
quasi-crête wN qp sont d'environ de 4 dB pour la Bande B et de 6 dB pour les bandes C/D.
Pour la détection de crête w Npk atteint 1 2 dB, selon la durée de m esure.
Dans les exem ples ci-dessus, il peut être constaté qu'une amélioration de la sensibilité de
4 dB exige un gain du signal d'environ 1 0 dB pour un récepteur doté d'un préam plificateur
intégré. Pour un récepteur dépourvu de préamplificateur intégré, une am élioration de l a
sensibilité de 1 1 dB exige un gain du signal de pratiquem ent 1 8 dB, une amélioration de 8 dB
exigeant un gain du signal de 1 0 dB. I l est évident qu'un facteur de bruit du systèm e de
3, 5 dB ne peut pas être aisément obtenu avec un facteur de bruit du préamplificateur de 3 dB,
car un gain de préam plificateur excessif serait nécessaire. Voir le Tableau J. 1 pour des
exem ples de facteur de bruit.
I l n'est pas conseillé d'utiliser un préamplificateur présentant un gain d'au m oins 30 dB, car
cela limite sévèrement les performances de linéarité du systèm e.
Un exem ple de capture d'écran de la fonction de transfert d'un am plificateur est présenté à la
Figure J. 2. La réponse de ce type d'am plificateur utilisant un signal sinusoïdal dans le
dom aine temporel et le domaine fréquentiel est présentée à la Figure J. 3. Les num éros sur
les axes de la Figure J . 2, de la Figure J. 3 et de la Figure J. 4 sont par nature génériques
(valeurs de quantification) et ne représentent pas d'unités spécifiques.
La Figure J. 3 m ontre que le signal sinusoïdal est déform é dans le dom aine tem porel, en
raison des effets non linéaires du préam plificateur. L'affichage du dom aine fréquentiel indiqu e
que le niveau diminue à 1 00 MH z, et qu'il existe des harmoniques supplémentaires. U ne
sim ulation correspondante pour une impulsion à bande large est présentée à la Figure J . 4.
– 1 90 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
1 000
800
600
1 40
1 40
1 000
1 000
1 20
1 20
Relative level (dB)
500
Quantized values
500
1 00
1 00
Relative Level in dB
Quantized Values
00 8080
-500
-500 6060
4040
-1 000
-1 000
2020
11 50
50 200
200 250
250
Sample n
300
3 00 350
3 50 400
400
1100
00 200
200 3 00
300 400
400 500
500 600
600 700
700
Frequency / MHz
Sample n Frequency (MHz)
IEC IEC
1 400
1 400
9090
1 200
1 200
8080
1 000
1 000
7070
Quantized values
800800
Relative Level in dB
6060
600600
5050
400400
4040
200200
00 303 0
-200
-200
2020
4 4980
980 44985
985 44990
990 44995
995 55000
000 55005
005 5501
Sample n
0100 5501015 5 5020
5 020 5025
5 025 00 500
500 1 1000
000
11 500
Frequency 500
/ MHz 22000
000 22500
500
Sample n Frequency (MHz)
IEC IEC
En com parant la Figure J. 3 et la Figure J. 4, il peut être constaté que le niveau de saturation
dans le dom aine fréquentiel est exactem ent le m ême. Toutefois, dans le domaine fréquentiel,
les effets de la saturation du préamplificateur externe sont différents. Pour le signal
impulsionnel, le niveau d'amplitude dim inue, ce qui invalide le résultat de mesure. Pour les
signaux sinusoïdaux, l'amplitude de la fondam entale dim inue, alors que d'autres harm oniques
sont générées par l'effet non linéaire du préam plificateur externe. Le résultat de m esure est
égalem ent invalidé.
-2,50
deviation
Deviation
-3,00
-3,50
-4,00
-4,50
-5,00
-5,50
1 00 1 02 1 04 1 06 1 08 110 112 114 116 118 1 20
Input
Inputlevel / dB (μ V)
Level/dB(uV)
IEC
An glais Français
Sine wave sign al: deviati on from linearity Signal sin usoïd al: écart de li néarité
Deviati on / dB Écart/dB
I nput level / dB Niveau d'entrée/dB
Figure J.5 – Écart par rapport au gain linéaire d'une onde
sinusoïdale démodulée (exemple)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 93 –
0
-0,5
-1
-1 ,5
-2
/ dB
Deviation/dB
-2,5 Deviation for pos. pulse
NOTE A l'aid e de Fbw= 85 d B, la valeur de crête du sig nal im pulsionnel positif avec un e fréq uence de répétition
des im pul sions de 1 00 H z est d'envi ron 37 dB( µ V) + 1 2 dB + 85 dB = 1 34 dB( µ V), c'est-à-di re en viron 22 dB au -
dessus du point d e com pression de 1 dB de l a Figu re J . 5.
1 2 dB est le facteur de pond ération de q uasi-crête, c'est-à-dire la différence entre la crête et la quasi -crête pour
une fréquence de répétition des im pulsions de 1 00 H z.
Figu re J. 6 – Écart par rapport au gain li néai re d'un sign al impu lsionn el
à ban de l arge mesu ré avec l e d étecteur de quasi-crête (exempl e)
Dans l'idéal, la profondeur de réj ection de 20 dB serait nécessaire pour les mesures de quasi -
crête à toutes les fréquences de répétition des impulsions. Cela est présenté à la Figure J. 7
pour le préamplificateur utilisé ci-dessus avec un gain de 1 0 dB, où la profondeur de 20 dB
est conservée tant que le niveau de crête du signal d'entrée est inférieur à 37 dB( µ V) et que
celui du signal de sortie est inférieur à 46 dB( µ V) (courbe bleue). Pour une fréquence de
répétition des im pulsions de 1 00 H z, un niveau de crête de 37 dB( µ V) correspond à un niveau
de quasi-crête de 25 dB( µ V). Par conséquent, le point de compression de 1 dB pour le signal
impulsionnel à bande large dans "l'im pulsion positive" de la Figure J. 6 semblant se trouver à
37 dB( µ V) quasi-crête, le préamplificateur est déj à surchargé. I l convient que le signal
d'entrée soit inférieur d'au moins 1 2 dB, c'est-à-dire à la quasi-crête de 25 dB( µ V), afin
d'éviter une interm odulation excessive.
Dans la Figure J. 6, "l'impulsion positive" montre également qu'un simple essai de surcharge
avec un atténuateur de 1 0 dB comm utable à l'entrée du préam plificateur peut ne pas
correctement indiquer la surcharge dans le cas des signaux impulsionnels, le niveau de sortie
– 1 94 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
pouvant touj ours suivre le niveau d'entrée, alors que le signal d'entrée du préam plificateur est
de 20 dB supérieur au point de com pression de 1 dB. Le sim ple essai peut fonctionner pour
les signaux sinusoïdaux. U ne m eilleure caractérisation du systèm e eu égard aux signaux
im pulsionnels est obtenue grâce à l'essai d'interm odulation du filtre coupe-bande. Si l'essai
d'interm odulation du filtre coupe-bande n'est pas disponible, il convient de caractériser le
systèm e avec le point de com pression de 1 dB du préamplificateur, associé à cette entrée.
NOTE L'essai d'interm odulati on du fil tre coupe-ban de (réal isé par le fourn isseur d u systèm e, par exem ple) est
destiné à caractériser le systèm e. I l serait peu pratique d e procéd er à un essai d e filtre coupe-band e d ans ch aqu e
laboratoire d'essai CEM pen dant un essai d es ém issions.
Noter que, pendant l'essai d'intermodulation du filtre coupe-bande, il doit être vérifié que le
récepteur de mesure utilisé comm e indicateur à la sortie du préamplificateur n'est pas
surchargé. La Figure J. 8 m ontre que la profondeur de réj ection, obtenue dans le cadre d'un
essai d'intermodulation CI SPR réalisé sur un récepteur de mesure avec présélection, dépasse
toujours 30 dB avec un signal d'entrée (quasi-crête) de 55 dB( µ V), ce qui correspond à un
niveau d'entrée (quasi-crête) de 45 dB( µ V) à un préamplificateur de 1 0 dB. L'utilisation d'un
récepteur de mesure doté d'un préamplificateur à bande large intégré peut ne pas
correctement m ontrer la linéarité du préamplificateur externe, en raison de la surcharge du
récepteur de mesure (voir la Figure J . 9 et la Figure J. 1 0), alors qu'avec la présélection, la
sortie est linéaire.
90
1 PK
VIEW 80
2 PK
VIEW 70
3 PK
CLRWR 60
50
6DB
40 DC
30
1
20
10
90
1 PK
VIEW 80
2 PK
CLRWR 70
60
50
6DB
40 DC
30
20
10
IEC
IEC
NOTE Un atténu ateu r de 1 5 dB entre le préam plificateur extern e et le récepteu r a été utilisé pour éviter la
surcharge du récepteu r sans présél ection. Toutefois, le niveau de bruit du récepteu r m asque alors la réjection.
Figu re J.1 0 – Résu ltats de l'essai du filtre cou pe-bande pou r le même préamplificateu r
de 1 0 dB, mais avec l e récepteu r de la Fi gu re J . 9 avec présél ection (noir) et sans
présélecti on (vert)
La Figure J .1 1 présente les fonctions de pond ération des détecteurs spécifiées dans la
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 pour les bandes C/D CI SPR, et donne un exem ple de ligne "Bruit" pour illustrer
la plage de fonctionnement entre le niveau de bruit et le point de compression de 1 dB. Dans
l'exem ple, le niveau de bruit du détecteur de crête est 1 5 dB inférieur au point d e
com pression de 1 dB. Pour le détecteur de quasi-crête, le niveau de bruit est d'environ 5 dB
inférieur, c'est-à-dire que la plage de fonctionnem ent est d'environ 5 dB plus large. Pour les
détecteurs de valeur moyenne efficace et de valeur moyenne, le niveau de bruit est d'environ
1 0 dB inférieur, ce qui élargit la plage de fonctionnement à environ 25 dB dans l'exem ple.
Pour tracer la ligne de bruit présentée à la Figure J.1 1 , le niveau de crête Vp est utilisé suite à
l'essai du filtre coupe-bande de la Figure J. 7, et le niveau de bruit du détecteur de valeur
m oyenne VN av est déterm iné. La différence Vp – VNav m arque le croisement de la ligne "Bruit"
avec la ligne "Valeur m oyenne". Pour le préam plificateur de 1 0 dB ci-dessus, Vp = 37 dB( µ V),
VNav = –1 4 dB( µ V) pour un facteur de bruit de 4 dB et Vp – VNav = 51 dB. La ligne de bruit de
la Figure J. 1 1 est tracée à partir d'un exem ple dans lequel Vp – VN av = 27 dB.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 1 97 –
-20
Noise
-30
Quasi-Peak
-40
-50
Average
RMS-AV
-60
fp /Hz
-70
1 10 1 00 1 000 1 0 000 1 00 000 1 000 000
IEC
An glais Français
Weighting factor/dB Facteur de pondération/dB
Weighting functions with n oise levels (for Bands C and Fonctions d e pond ération avec niveau x d e bruit (pour la
D) bande C et la band e D)
Averag e Valeu r m oyenne
RMS-AV Valeu r m oyenne efficace
Quasi-Peak Quasi-crête
Peak Crête
Noise Bruit
Figure J.1 1 – Fonctions de pondération des différents détecteurs CISPR avec une
courbe de bruit pour illustrer les plages de fonctionnement restantes des signaux
impulsionnels à bande large (exemple)
Dans la Figure J. 1 1 , il peut être constaté que la fréquence critique de répétition des
impulsions à laquelle le niveau du signal im pulsionnel (le niveau de crête étant au point d e
compression de 1 dB) est égale au niveau de bruit. Toutefois, pour une mesure exacte, le
niveau de signal doit être environ 6 dB supérieur au niveau de bruit (la valeur réelle
dépendant de la fréquence de répétition des im pulsions). En conséquence, dans cet exemple,
les m esures de quasi-crête peuvent être réalisées au-dessus d'une fréquence de répétition
des im pulsions d'environ 60 H z. Pour les détecteurs de valeur moyenne efficace et de valeur
m oyenne, les fréquences critiques de répétition des im pulsions sont respectivem ent proches
de 1 kH z et de 1 0 kH z. Pour les m esures pratiques, un contrôle de linéarité est recomm andé
en utilisant le facteur de pondération à la fréquence critique de répétition des impulsions.
Pour cet exemple, le contrôle de linéarité se présente comme suit:
a) Pour la mesure de quasi-crête: la fréquence critique de répétition des impulsions de 60 H z
est dépassée si la différence entre les valeurs de crête et de quasi-crête est inférieure à
1 5 dB.
b) Pour les mesures de valeur moyenne efficace et de valeur moyenne: les fréquences
critiques de répétition des impulsions de 1 kH z et 1 0 kH z sont dépassées si la différence
entre les résultats du détecteur de crête et ceux du détecteur de valeur moyenne efficace
ou de valeur m oyenne est inférieure à 20 dB.
– 1 98 – CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5
Toutefois, si les m esures sont réalisées proches du niveau de bruit, les différences peuvent
être réduites par le niveau de bruit, ce qui donnera l'im pression de fréquences de répétition
des impulsions supérieures aux valeurs réelles.
La présence du préam plificateur dans la plage linéaire pendant la mesure peut être détectée
pour les signaux sinusoïdaux et impulsionnels en prenant le m aximum du signal de sortie du
préamplificateur, puis en le comparant à un niveau de seuil donné correspondant au point de
compression de 1 dB. La tension m axim ale (positive) et la tension m inim ale (négative) du
signal dans le domaine tem porel doivent être échantillonnées en permanence pendant la
durée de m esure, puis com parées à ce niveau d e seuil. Le point de compression de 1 dB est
défini pour un signal sinusoïdal donnant une sortie de 1 dB inférieure à celle prévue (voir la
Figure J. 5).
Annexe K
(normative)
Exigences d’étalonnage des récepteurs de mesure
K.1 Généralités
Lors des m esurages des EMI (perturbations électromagnétiques), il est indispensable
d'utiliser un appareil de mesure qui satisfait aux spécifications données dans la présente
norm e de sorte que l'incertitude de m esure prévue de l’appareil pour les m esurages des
perturbations conduites et rayonnées ainsi que pour les mesurages de la puissance de
perturbation puisse être obtenue. En outre, les résultats de ces mesurages doivent être
traçables (voir 3. 1 7) selon des norm es nationales ou reconnues au niveau international. Ces
exigences peuvent être satisfaites en sélectionnant un appareil de mesure correctem ent
étalonné. Les exigences d'étalonnage décrites dans la présente Annexe ne sont applicables
qu’aux appareils d'essai (c’est-à-dire, les récepteurs EMI et les anal yseurs de spectre)
couverts par la présente Norm e.
Le processus d'étalonnage proprement dit n’exige pas nécessairem ent l’ajustage de l’appareil
en cours d’étalonnage. Toutefois, des aj ustages peuvent être exigés si le processus
d'étalonnage déterm ine que l’appareil ne satisfait pas aux spécifications du fabricant. Le
processus d'étalonnage de l’appareil a pour obj ectif de déterminer la conformité d'un
récepteur de mesure en cours d’étalonnage avec ses spécifications publiées d’une manière
traçable (voir 3. 1 7).
ce processus d'étalonnage est égalem ent utilisé par le fabricant du récepteur pour établir les
spécifications du récepteur. Par conséquent, seul le processus d'étalonnage du fabricant ou
le processus de vérification conform ém ent à la présente Norm e doit être appliqué par un
laboratoire d'étalonnage ou un laboratoire d’essai procédant à ses propres étalonnages pour
déterm iner si le récepteur satisfait à ses spécifications au m om ent de l'étalonnage ou aux
exigences imposées par la présente N orm e. Cette exigence s'applique uniquem ent aux
récepteurs de m esure.
Le processus d'étalonnage des récepteurs de mesure définit égalem ent les paramètres
essentiels suivants qui doivent être utilisés pour un bon étalonnage:
a) l’installation spécifique du récepteur en cours d’étalonnage pour chaque mesurage dans
le processus d'étalonnage (par exemple, dans le cas d'un récepteur EMI ou d’un
anal yseur de spectre, la fréquence d'accord, le réglage de l'atténuateur, le réglage de la
résolution de la largeur de bande, et d'autres param ètres, pour chaque m esurage à
effectuer);
b) le m ontage d'essai exigé pour le mesurage d'un paramètre spécifique (par exem ple,
l'utilisation de répartiteurs de puissance pour les m esurages des rapports et tout autre
appareil de mesure nécessaire);
c) la précision exigée de l'appareil de mesure utilisé pour effectuer les m esurages d u
processus d'étalonnage (par exem ple, la précision de l'amplitude et la précision de la
fréquence exigées);
d) le nombre réel de mesurages à effectuer et leur séquence. Pour de nombreux types de
récepteur de mesure, cette séquence est obligatoire et ne peut être m odifiée du fait que
les m esurages de certains paramètres exigent la réalisation des mesurages des
param ètres d'étalonnage précédents. En outre, le résultat d'essai d'un param ètre
d'étalonnage peut être interprété en fonction du résultat d’essai d'un mesurage précédent
dans la séquence d'étalonnage;
e) les conditions d’environnem ent exigées (par exemple, température ambiante et hum idité
relative exigées), si cela est jugé nécessaire par le fabricant.
Les résultats des m esurages d'étalonnage ne peuvent être comparés aux spécifications
publiées que si le processus d'étalonnage du fabricant est utilisé. Par conséquent, il convient
que le laboratoire d'étalonnage ou le laboratoire d'essai effectuant ses propres étalonnages
(égalem ent appelés "étalonnages internes") utilise le processus d'étalonnage du fabricant
pour un récepteur de mesure spécifique. Si un autre processus est utilisé, il doit être validé
par vérification et il doit être indiqué dans le certificat d'étalonnage que ce processus s'écarte
du processus d'étalonnage défini par le fabricant.
Si la conform ité d'un récepteur de mesure est déterm inée par les spécifications de la
présente N orme, le jeu m inimum de paramètres suivant présenté au Tableau K. 1 doit être
inclus dans le processus de vérification.
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 201 –
I l doit être noté que les exigences im posées par la présente Norme constituent un sous-
ensem ble de toutes les spécifications que le fabricant du récepteur publie. En outre, certaines
exigences de la présente N orm e peuvent être énoncées d'une m anière qui diffère de la façon
dont sont énoncées les spécifications du fabricant (par exemple, précision de la fréquence
CW dans la présente N orme par rapport à une com binaison de la précision de l’amplitude
absolue à une fréquence de référence et de la réponse en fréquence).
Si la preuve de la conform ité aux exigences indiquées dans la présente N orm e ne peut être
fournie directement par le biais du processus d'étalonnage du fabricant, en raison d e
différences dans la form e des spécifications énoncées, le laboratoire d’essai doit demander la
vérification de ces exigences en plus de l'étalonnage effectif du récepteur sur la base du
processus d'étalonnage du fabricant.
inférieure, ou entre une lim ite supérieure et une limite inférieure. L'incertitude du m esurage
d'étalonnage ou de vérification a un impact direct sur la déterm ination de la réussite / échec.
Par conséquent, l'incertitude de mesure doit être prise en compte lors de la détermination de
la conformité d'un récepteur de mesure à ses spécifications énoncées. L'application de
l'incertitude de m esure à un résultat de mesure peut conduire à l'un des quatre cas décrits ci -
dessous et représentés dans la Figure K. 1 :
a) le résultat de mesure est dans la plage de limite spécifiée par une m arge supérieure à la
valeur d'incertitude élargie applicable au m esurage d'étalonnage;
b) le résultat de m esure est dans la plage de limite spécifiée par une m arge inférieure à la
valeur d'incertitude élargie applicable au m esurage d'étalonnage;
c) le résultat de m esure est en dehors de la plage de lim ite spécifiée par une m arge
inférieure à la valeur d’incertitude élargie applicable au m esurage d'étalonnage; ou
d) le résultat de m esure est en dehors de la plage de limite spécifiée par une m arge
supérieure à la valeur d'incertitude élargie applicable au mesurage d'étalonnage, et la
spécification n'est pas satisfaite.
Upper lim it
Measurem ent
result
Expand ed
uncertainty rang e
Lower lim it
An gl ai s Françai s
Upper lim it Lim ite supéri eu re
Lower lim it Lim ite inféri eu re
Measurem ent result Résultat de m esure
Expand ed u ncertainty rang e Étendu e d’i ncertitude élargi e
Case Cas
Figu re K. 1 – Processu s de détermin ati on d e l a conformité
avec l’ appli cation de l'i ncertitu de de mesu re
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 203 –
Les quatre cas sur la Figure K. 1 doivent être interprétés comm e suit:
b) et c) le résultat n'est pas concluant, une déclaration de conform ité définitive n'est
pas possible;
Bibliographie
[1 ] CI SPR 1 5 , Limites et méthodes de mesure des perturbations radioélectriques produites
par les appareils électriques d'éclairage et les appareils analogues
[2] CI SPR 1 6-1 -2: 201 4, Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des
perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques –
Partie 1 -2: Appareils de mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux
perturbations radioélectriques – Dispositifs de couplage pour la mesure des
perturbations conduites
[3] CI SPR 1 6-1 -3: 2004, Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des
perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques –
Partie 1 -3: Appareils de mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux
perturbations radioélectriques – Matériels auxiliaires – Puissance perturbatrice
[4] CI SPR 1 6-1 -4: 201 0, Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des
perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques –
Partie 1 -4: Appareils de mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux
perturbations radioélectriques – Antennes et emplacements d'essai pour les mesures
des perturbations rayonnées
[5] CI SPR 1 6-1 -5: 201 4, Spécification des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des
perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques –
Partie 1 -5: Appareils de mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux
perturbations radioélectriques – Emplacements d'étalonnage d'antenne et
emplacements d'essai de référence pour la plage comprise entre 5 MHz et 1 8 GHz
[6] CI SPR 1 6-2 (toutes les parties), Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de
mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations
radioélectriques
[7] CI SPR 1 6-2-4: 2003,Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des
perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques –
Partie 2-4: Méthodes de mesure des perturbations et de l'immunité – Mesures de
l'immunité
[8] CI SPR 1 6-4 (toutes les parties), Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de
mesure des perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations
radioélectriques
[9] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-1 : 2009, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-1 : Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Uncertainties in standardized EMC tests (disponible en anglais seulem ent)
[1 0] CI SPR 1 6-4-2: 201 1 ,Spécifications des méthodes et des appareils de mesure des
perturbations radioélectriques et de l'immunité aux perturbations radioélectriques –
Partie 4-2: Incertitudes, statistiques et modélisation des limites – Incertitudes de
mesure de l'instrumentation
[1 1 ] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-3: 2004, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-3: Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Statistical considerations in the determination of EMC compliance of mass-produced
products (disponible en anglais seulem ent)
[1 2] CI SPR TR 1 6-4-4: 2007, Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus and methods – Part 4-4: Uncertainties, statistics and limit modelling –
Statistics of complaints and a model for the calculation of limits for the protection of
radio services (disponible en anglais seulem ent)
CI SPR 1 6-1 -1 : 201 5 © I EC 201 5 – 205 –
____________
INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL
COMMISSI ON
3, rue de Varembé
PO Box 1 31
CH-1 21 1 Geneva 20
Switzerland
Tel: + 41 22 91 9 02 1 1
Fax: + 41 22 91 9 03 00
info@iec.ch
www.iec.ch